1crsfile 1.MBADualSpecialisation2019-20

Master of Business Administration 1
Course Curriculum (Session 2019-20)
Course Curriculum
Master of Business Administration
Session 2019-20
Institute of Business Management

ABOUT THE PROGRAM

Today's business environment is characterized by dynamic uncertainties and complexities, which makes
the work of managers and organizational leaders extremely challenging. Thus, those who aspire to
become organizational managers in today's business environment need to acquire specialized knowledge,
skills and attitude along with multi-tasking ability in order to understand and analyze complex business
situations. In pursuit of this goal, the MBA programme of GLA University, nurtures leaders capable of
making a difference in the corporate and service sectors
The MBA course employs various modes of teaching, learning and assessment that reflect in its
interdisciplinary approach. This integrated teaching allows understanding of the overlap and interaction
between the different business areas. This approach also allows the students to develop multiple skills
such as critical analysis, independent research, report writing, numerical ability, working with real-life
case studies, presentation skills and interpersonal skills through group tasks. These skills further enable
the students to take a full, active and responsible role within the business community, whether this is
through entrepreneurship, further study, or in managerial role.
The system of dual-specialization enables the students to choose specializations from the fields of
Marketing, Finance, Human Resource, International Business, Information Technology,
Development, Retail, Operations and Strategic & Technological Management, Business analytics,
Banking and Financial Services, Supply Chain management. An integration of technology with the
conventional teaching modes enables the students to acquire well-developed understanding of
management practices, knowledge and skills necessary to grapple with the complexities of the modern
business propositions.
The syllabus is directional in scope and permits the much desirable flexibility to keep pace with the ever
– growing body of knowledge, experience and explorations in management education with special
emphasis towards the human side of enterprise. The course structures are carefully designed so that
students get an edge in dealing with diverse situations when they step into the real corporate world.
S. Trimester Code Subject Credits

no.
1 MBAC0006 Business Environment 3
2 MBAC0007 Financial Accounting 3
3 MBAC0008 Micro Economics 3
4 MBAC0009 Principles and Practices of Management 3

I
5 MBAC0010 Quantitative Techniques 3
6 MBAC0011 Computer Applications in Management 3
7 MBAC0038 Managerial Communication 3
8 MBAC0012 Managerial Aptitude – I 1
Total 22
Business Law
1 MBAC0013 3
Macro Economics
2 MBAC0014 3
Cost and Management Accounting
3 MBAC0015 3
Organizational Behaviour
4 MBAC0016 3
II
Research Methodology
5 MBAC0017 3
Business Statistics
6 MBAC0018 3
Managerial Aptitude – II
7 MBAC0019 1
Total
19
Financial Management
1 MBAE0020 3
Human Resource Management
2 MBAC0021 3
III
International Business Management
3 MBAE0022 3
Operations Research
4 MBAC0023 3
5 MBAC0024 Marketing Management 3
6 MBAE0025 Operations Management 3
7 MBAE0026 Business Analytics 3
8 MBAE0027 Fundamentals of Banking and Insurance 3

Managerial Aptitude – III
9 MBAC0028 1
Total
19
# Students are required to choose Six theory subjects
Strategic Management
1 MBAC0029 3
Supply Chain Management
2 MBAC0030 3
Elective – 1
3 3
Elective – 2
4 3
Elective – 3
5 3
IV
Elective – 4
6 3
Summer Training Report
7 MBAJ0001 6
Managerial Aptitude – IV
8 MBAC0031 1
Total
25
Corporate Governance and Business Ethics

1 MBAC0032 3
Project Management
2 MBAC0033 3
Elective – 1
3 3
Elective – 2
4 3
V
Elective – 3
5 3
Elective – 4
6 3
Managerial Aptitude – V
7 MBAC0034 1
Total
19
Entrepreneurship Management
1 MBAC0035 3
Innovating for Sustainability
2 MBAC0036 3
VI
Elective – 1
3 3
Elective – 2
4 3
Open Elective – 1
5 3
Open Elective – 2
6 3
Research Project Report
7 MBAJ0002 3
Managerial Aptitude – VI
8 MBAC0037 1
Total
22
Total Credits
126
1 MBAE0001 Business to Business and E- Marketing 3

Group 1: Marketing
2 MBAE0002 Consumer Behavior 3
3 MBAE0055 Product and Brand Management * 3
4 MBAE0056 Marketing Research* 3
5 MBAO0001 Rural Marketing Management 3
6 MBAE0003 Sales and Distribution Management 3
7 MBAE0057 Advertising Management* 3

8 MBAE0019 International Marketing 3
9 MBAE0004 Marketing of Services 3
1 MBAE0058 Training and Development* 3

GROUP 2: HUMAN RESOURCE
2 MBAO0002 Leadership and Team Building 3

3 MBAE0005 Performance Management and Competency Mapping 3
4 MBAE0059 Industrial Relations and Trade Union* 3
5 MBAE0006 Change Management 3
6 MBAE0007 Managerial Counseling and Stress Management 3
7 MBAE0008 Conflict Management and Negotiation 3
8 MBAE0060 Organizational Development* 3
9 MBAO0003 International and Strategic Dimensions of Human Resource 3
10 MBAE0009 Labour and Social Security Legislations 3
Business Analysis and Valuation

MANAGEMENT
1 MBAE0010 3
Investment and Portfolio Management*
GROUP 3:
FINANCE
2 MBAE0061 3
3 MBAO0004 Mergers, Acquisition and Corporate Restructuring 3
4 MBAE0011 Working Capital Management 3
5 MBAE0012 Financial Derivatives 3
6 MBAO0005 Micro Finance 3

7 MBAE0062 Management of Financial Services and Instititutions* 3
8 MBAE0013 Tax Planning 3
9 MBAE0014 International Financial Management 3
10 MBAE0015 Risk and Insurance Management 3
11 MBAE0063 Wealth Management and Personal Financial Planning* 3
Global Business Environment

GROUP 4: International Business
1 MBAE0016 3
2 MBAE0064 International Trade* 3
3 MBAO0006 International Treaties and Conventions 3
Management
4 MBAE0017 Global Strategic Management 3

5 MBAE0065 Export- Import Procedures and Documentation* 3
6 MBAE0018 International Logistics 3
7 MBAE0066 Cross Cultural Issues in International Management* 3
8 MBAO0003 International and Strategic Dimensions of Human Resource 3
9 MBAE0019 International Marketing 3
1 MBAE0067 Business Intelligence and Data Mining* 3

Technology Management
Database Management System

GROUP 5: Information
2 MBAO0007 3
3 MBAE0020 Internet Programming and Visual Basics 3
4 MBAE0068 E-Business* 3
5 MBAE0021 Strategic Information System Planning 3
6 MBAE0022 System Analysis and Design 3
7 MBAE0069 Data Communication Networks* 3
8 MBAO0008 Software Management 3
1 MBAE0023 Finance in Retail Operations 3

Fundamentals of Retail Management*
GROUP 6: Retail Management
2 MBAE0070 3
3 MBAE0024 Shoppers’ Behaviour and Selling Skills 3
4 MBAE0025 Legal issues in Retail 3
5 MBAE0026 Retail Store Operation 3
6 MBAE0071 Store Design Layout and Visual Merchandising* 3
7 MBAO0009 Retail Information Systems 3
8 MBAO0010 Retail Merchandising 3
Retail Supply Chain Management and Vendor
Development*
9 MBAE0072 3
1 MBAE0027 Environmental Management for Rural Development 3

Development
Management
Inclusive Growth for Sustainable Development*

GROUP 7:
2 MBAE0073 3
3 MBAO0011 Non Government Organizations Management 3
4 MBAE0028 Developmental Projects and Impact assessment 3
5 MBAO0005 Micro Finance* 3
6 MBAO0001 Rural Marketing Management 3

7 MBAE0029 Livelihood System and Promotion 3
8 MBAE0030 Participatory Research Methods 3
9 MBAE0074 Public Policy and Health* 3
1 MBAO0012 Management of Innovation and Research and Development. 3

GROUP 8: Strategy & Technology
2 MBAO0004 Mergers, Acquisition and Corporate Restructuring 3

3 MBAE0075 Technology Policy * 3
4 MBAE0083 Business Intelligence 3
Management
Knowledge management Techniques for Technology

5 MBAO0013 Management 3
6 MBAE0076 Management of Intellectual Property Rights* 3
7 MBAE0033 Change Management 3
8 MBAE0077 Strategy Implementation and Control* 3
9 MBAE0034 Technology Forecasting 3
10 MBAE0035 Management of Technology Transfer and Adaption 3
Advance Project Management

GROUP 9: Operations
1 MBAE0036 3
Demand and Business Forecasting*
Management
2 MBAE0078 3
Operations Strategy
3 MBAO0014 3
4 MBAE0037 Advanced Inventory Control 3
5 MBAE0038 Manufacturing System 3
S. Trimester Code Subject
no. Credits
6 MBAO0015 Total Quality Management* 3
Management
GROUP 9:
Operations
7 MBAE0039 Service Operations Management 3

8 MBAO0021 Total Productivity Management 3
9 MBAE0079 Purchase Management* 3
1 MBAE0080 Management of Commercial Banks and Retail Banking* 3

2 Security Analysis and Portfolio Management
GROUP 10: Banking &
MBAE0040 3
Financial Services
3 MBAO0016 Investment Banking 3

4 MBAE0081 Financial Markets and Institutions* 3
5 MBAE0041 Risk Management in Banks and Derivatives 3
6 MBAE0042 Rural Banking and Micro Finance 3
7 MBAE0082 Principles and Practices of Life Insurance* 3
8 MBAE0043 Fundamentals of General Insurance 3
9 MBAO0017 International Banking 3
Business Modeling with Spreadsheets
Analytics
1 MBAE0044 3
Business
GROUP
Data Environment and Management

11:
2 MBAE0045 3
3 MBAE0083 Business Intelligence* 3
4 MBAO0018 Data Mining 3

5 MBAE0084 Data Visualization* 3
6 MBAE0046 Big Data Analysis 3
MBAE0047 Predictive Modeling 3
7 MBAE0048 Marketing Analytics 3
8 MBAE0049 Financial Analytics 3
9 MBAE0050 Human resource Analytics 3
10 MBAE0085 Social and web analytics* 3
11 MBAE0086 Programming for Analytics 3
1 MBAE0087 Logistics Management* 3
Recent Trends in E-Commerce
GROUP 12: Supply chain
2 MBAO0019 3
3 MBAE0051 Store Keeping and Warehousing 3
management
4 MBAe0088 Purchasing and Inventory Management* 3

5 MBAE0052 Green Supply chain Management 3
6 MBAO0020 Strategic and Implementation Issues in SCM 3
7 MBAE0053 Performance Metrics and Modeling 3
8 MBAE0089 Enterprise Resource Planning* 3
9 MBAE0054 Supply chain Analytics 3
Business Environment
Course Code: MBAC0006 Year: I Trimester: I Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:To provide an introduction to business and the economic environment within

which it operates, which has an increasingly important influence as free market policies are
pursued worldwide. Important economic principles will be explained and applied to provide
convincing explanations of current economic and business events. The consideration of issues
relating to policy towards business will encourage the development of student’s judgmental
skills. In addition, the concepts and knowledge learnt in this course will provide a firm basis
for the study of business strategy in future courses.
Objectives of the Course:

 To develop the concept of the business organization operating within the parameters of the
internal and external environment.
 To understand the place of business within the economic system and present some important
economic principles relevant to the behavior of business in response to changes in the
environment.
 To impart knowledge about, and encourage awareness of, current issues, facts and events in the
local national and international business world.
Introduction to Business Environment: Concept, Significance,
Nature, Framework for internal / external environment.
UNIT – I Environmental analysis: Meaning, Nature, Steps. Methods of (5 Sessions)
environmental scanning: SWOT, ETOP, PESTL.
Financial System & legal Environment: Indian financial
UNIT –II System: Objectives, features and components; Money & Capital (6 Sessions)
market, EXIM Policy and Role of FII & FDI.
UNIT – III RBI-Role and functions, Monetary policy and Fiscal Policy. (4 Sessions)
MID-TERM EXAMINATION
Economic & Political Environment: Economic Systems,NITI

UNIT – IV Aayog: Roles and responsibilities,Policy for Small Scale (6 Sessions)
Industry (MSME Act), Competition Act 2002.
Technological Environment: Overview of Technology policy-
UNIT – V Technology S Curve and Technology transfer, intellectual (4 Sessions)
property rights.
International Environment: Introduction to balance of
UNIT – VI payment and balance of trade, International Economic Institutes: (5 Sessions)
WTO, World Bank, IMF.
* Provision for presentations / assignments / case analysis in additional sessions

** 1 Session = 60 Minutes
Text Books:
 Aswathappa, K. (2010). Essentials of Business Environment. Himalaya Publishing House.
 Cherunilam, F. (2010). Business Environment. 18th edition. Himalaya Publishing House.
 Paul, J. (2008). Business Environment. 3rdEdition. Tata McGraw-Hill Publication.
Reference Books:
 Goyal, Dr. A. (2010). Environment For Managers. 1st edition. V.K (India) Enterprises.
 Neelamegam, V. (2010). Business Environment. Vrinda Publication.
Learning Outcomes
The students will be able to:
 Understand the concept of the business organization operating within the parameters of the
 The awareness about current business practices lasted emerging opportunities and issues.
 Have the ease in doing SWOT analysis of business.
 Understanding about financial market functioning.
 Students will be able to understand the factors affecting business.
 Understanding about economic systems will be developed.
The learning about the economic and non-economic aspects related to business will beacquired
Financial Accounting
Preamble:The prime motive of this course is to provide the student with a basic
understanding of financial accounting and enable the student to understand, analyze and
interpret financial statements for better decision making. The course is expected to make the
students financially literate.
By the end of this course, the student should be able to:

 Understand the role and relevance of financial accounting in management.
 Explore the various dimensions of financial accounting and their implications in financial
spectrum of a business entity.
Overview of Financial Accounting: Role, Functions, Users,

UNIT – I Principles, Concept, Conventions, Accounting Cycle: Original (5 Sessions)
Book of Entry, Journal, Ledger and Trial Balance.
Preparation of Income Statement and Position Statement,
Manufacturing Account, Trading Account, , Profit & Loss
UNIT –II Account, Profit & Loss Appropriation Account and Balance (5 Sessions)
Sheet (With Basic Adjustment).
Introduction to Financial Analysis: Role, Types, Tools,
Limitations
UNIT – III Ratio Analysis: Types of Ratios, Profitability Ratio, Turnover (5 Sessions)
Ratio, Financial Ratio: Computation & Analysis
Financial Statements Analysis-Common Size Statements,

UNIT – IV Comparative Statement & Trend Analysis
(4 Sessions)
Preparation and Interpretation of Fund flow Statement
UNIT – V Concept of fund flow, Statement of Change in Working Capital, (6 Sessions)
Fund from Operation, Fund Flow Statement
Preparation of Cash Flow Statement (As per AS 3)
Cash flow from Operating / Investing / Financing Activities
UNIT – VI Direct or Indirect Method of preparation of Cash Flow (5 Sessions)
Statement. Introduction to Triple Bottom Line Reporting.
Text Books:
 Tulsian, P. C. (2008). Financial Accounting. New Delhi: Pearson Education.
Reference Books:
 Narayanaswami, R. (2009). Financial Accounting: Managerial Perspective. New Delhi: Prentice
Hall of India Private Limited.
 Maheshwari, S. N., & Maheshwari, S. K. (2006). 4th Edition. An Introduction to Accountancy.
New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
 Neelakantan, Ramchandran & Kakani (2008). 2nd Edition. Financial Accounting for
Management.Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi.
Journals:
 Indian Journal of Finance
 The IUP Journal of Accounting Research and Audit Practices
Learning outcomes
 Students will be able to understand the role and relevance of financial accounting in
management.
 Explore the various dimensions of financial accounting and their implications in financial
spectrum of a business entity.
Microeconomics
Preamble:The paper intends to make the students familiarize about the modern economic
theories and the managerial implications in to the business practices. This is also
conceptualizing to develop the macroscopic and microscopic vision of the students related to
economic practices in the economy. The paper will also help the student to use their resources
optimally and arrive at sound decision making on operational grounds.

 To analyze & interpret fundamentals of economics.
 To study the interrelationship in an open economic system.
 To master a range of methods and techniques of strategic analysis and have a clear appreciation of
their theoretical and empirical foundations, range of applicability, qualifications and limitations.
Overview: Economics background to management, Nature and
scope of Managerial Economics, Its relationship with other
UNIT – I Disciplines, (4 Sessions)
Significance in Decision-Making and Fundamental Concepts,
Theory of Firm, Objectives of a Firm
Demand and Supply Analysis: Demand and its functions , Law
of demand and Reasons and exceptions of law demand,
Supply and Its functions, Law of supply, Market equilibrium.
UNIT –II Elasticity of Demand and supply : types and measurement.
(6 Sessions)
Consumer’s Behaviour : Utility Analysis,law of diminishing

marginal utility, Principle of equi-marginal utility.
Indifference Curve Analysis: Indifference Curves, Marginal rate
UNIT – III of substitution(MRS)-relationship between MRSand marginal (5 Sessions)
utilities. Revealed Preference Theory
Demand Forecasting Demand Forecasting methods,
Production: Production Concepts and Analysis, Production

Function,
UNIT – IV Characteristics of various Factors of Production; Laws of (4 Sessions)
Production, Short-Run, Long –Run
Cost Analysis: Cost Concepts and Analysis, Empirical estimates
UNIT – V of Production and Costs, Short-run and Long-run Average Costs (5 Sessions)
Curves and its Analysis
Pricing Decisions: Pricing under different Market Structure,
Perfect and Imperfect (monopoly, monopolistic and oligopoly)
UNIT – VI markets, (6 Sessions)
Pricing strategies: Collusive and Non-Collusive Oligopoly
Baumol and Marris’ Models
Text Books:
 Geetika, Ghosh P., Choudhary R. P. (2009). Managerial Economics. Tata McGraw Hill
Publication.
 Petersen, C. (2006). Managerial Economics. Pearson Education
Reference Books:
 Ahuja H.L. Managerial Economics. S. Chand
 Dornbusch, R. and Fischer, S. (2008). Macro Economics. 5th Edition. Tata McGraw Hill
Publication.
 Thomas, R. C., Maurice, C. S., & Sarkar, S. (2010).Managerial Economics. 9th Edition. Tata
McGraw Hill Publication.
 Dwevedi, D. N. (2009). Principles of Economics. Vikas Publication.
 Patnaik, P. (1997). Macro Economics. Oxford University Press,
 Rangarajan C. & Dholakia B.H. (2006). Principles of Macroeconomics. Tata McGraw Hill
Publication.
Learning Outcomes
 Will be able to understand the basic concepts in Managerial Economics relevant to consumer,
producer and wealth-owner.
 Analyze and forecast demand for consumers’ goods, capital goods, labour and other factors of
production.
 Determine and estimate supply of goods and resources using production and cost functions.
 Will be able to evaluate pricing decisions.
Course Outline
Principles and Practices of Management

Preamble:The course is aimed at equipping the students with necessary techniques and
skills of Basics of management and communication to inform inspire and enlist their activity
and willing cooperation in the performance of their jobs. This course’s goal is to help to gain
greater skill and confidence to communicate effectively as a manager.
 Evaluate and explore the basics of management and various dimensions of management
 Analyze communication situations and develop effective communication strategies and
Communicate persuasively
 Use visuals/graphics for impact and Make successful formal and informal presentations
Management: Concept, Nature, Importance; Management: Art

and Science, Management As a Profession, Management Vs.
Administration, Management Skills, And Levels of Management.
Evolution of Management: Early contributions, Taylor and
UNIT – I Scientific Management, Fayol’s Administrative Management, (7 Sessions)
Bureaucracy, Hawthorne Experiments and Human Relations,
Social System Approach, Decision Theory Approach.
Social Responsibility of Managers and Ethics in Managing
Planning: Nature, Scope, Objectives, Types, Process, and
UNIT –II Barriers to Effective Planning. Concept of planning premises, (4 Sessions)
Decision Making techniques.
Organizing: Concept, Forms of Organizational Structure,
UNIT – III Departmentation, Span of Control, Delegation of Authority, (4 Sessions)
Authority & Responsibility.
Staffing: Meaning, objectives and process.
Elements of Staffing: Concepts of Manpower Planning, Job
UNIT – IV Design, Recruitment & Selection, Training & Development, (5 Sessions)
Performance Appraisal
Directing: Concept of Direction and Supervision. Functions &
qualities of supervisor.
UNIT – V Motivation: Concept, Maslow’s Theory, Herzberg’s two factor (5 Sessions)
theory, Theory X & Theory Y.
Leadership: Concept and Functions, Leadership style,

UNIT – VI Leadership traits. (5 Sessions)
Controlling: Concept, Types of Control, and its process.
Text Books:
 Stoner, Freeman, & Gilbert, Jr. (2008).6th Edition. Management. Prentice Hall of India.
 Harold, K. & Heinz, W. (2008). Essentials of Management. 5th Edition. Tata McGraw Hill.
Reference Books:
 Robbins & Coulter. (2007). Management. 9th Edition. Prentice Hall of India..
 Robbins, S. P., & Decenzo, D. A. (2007). Fundamentals of Management: Essential Concepts and
Applications.6th Edition. Pearson Education.
 Weihrich Heinz and Koontz Harold - Management: A Global and Entrepreneurial Perspective
(McGraw Hill, 12Edition 2008)
Learning Outcomes
 Develop the understanding about basic management principles and concepts.

 Apply management theories in practical business set-up.
 Develop the practical skills of decision making and leadership in context to present business
scenario.
 Learn basic business presentation skills and enhance their communication skills.
[Course Outline
Managerial Communication
Preamble: Keeping the challenges of business communication in mind, the course is aimed
at equipping the students with necessary techniques and skills of business oral and written
communication. An effective oral and written communication of an executive is a great tool to
achieve both personal and professional goals. This course will help to gain greater skill and
confidence to communicate effectively as a manager.
 To enable students analyze communication situations and develop effective communication

strategies
 To develop skills for communicate professionally and persuasively
 To make students learn skills for successful formal and informal presentations
Communication at workplace: Understanding Corporate
communication, Objectives and Role of Communication, Process
UNIT – I (5 Sessions)
of Communication, Channels and Types of Communication,
Communication Network, The C’s of Good Communication.
Verbal communication: Introduction, Oral and Written
communication- letter writing and report writing.
UNIT –II Business Presentations: Elements of Business Presentation, (5 Sessions)
Visual & Audio aids in Presentation. Designing a Presentation,
Effective listening, and Technology Enabled Communication
Non- Verbal Communication:
Body language: concept, importance, kinesics and its various
elements: Eye Contact, Facial Expression, Gestures, Postures,
Proximics, Chronemics. Oculesics. Color as Non- verbal
UNIT – III Communication, (5 Sessions)
Paralanguage: Concept, Importance, Elements/Parts of
Paralanguage: Voice, Word Stress, Pitch, Pause, Rate, Volume,
And Articulation.
UNIT – IV Interpersonal communication at workplace: Building an (4 Sessions)

open climate for resolving conflict and developing effective

style of communication.
Creative business Meetings: Techniques to conduct
different types of business meetings.
Cross-Cultural Communication: Business Etiquettes and
cross-cultural issues. Introduction, Concept, Significance,
UNIT – V Exchanging Business Cards, Dinning Etiquettes, Telephonic
(6 Sessions)
Etiquettes, netiquettes, Interacting with foreign clients.
Group Communication
Media Management: Press Release, Press Report, Press
UNIT – VI (5 Sessions)
Conferences, Public Speaking, Role of communication in
Negotiation.
Text Books:
 Lesikar, R. V., & Petitt, J. D. Jr. (2005). Business Communication: Skills for Empowering the
Internet Generation. 10th Edition. Tata McGraw-Hill Publication.
Reference Books:
 Mohan, Krishna & Banerji M. (2008). Developing Communication Skills. Macmillan Publishers
India Ltd.
 Sharma, R. C. & Mohan, K. (2002). Business Report Writing and Correspondence: Practical
Approach to Business and Technical Communication. 3rd Edition. Tata McGraw-Hill Publication.
 Chaturvedi, P. D., & Chaturvedi, M. (2007). Business Communication: Concepts, Cases and
Applications. Pearson Education.
Course Outline
Quantitative Techniques
Course Code:MBAC0010 Year: I Trimester: I Max. Hours:
Preamble: Quantitative Technique is a scientific approach to managerial decision-making.

The successful use of Quantitative Technique for management would help the organization in
solving complex problems on time, with greater accuracy and in the most economical way.

 To provide students with the understanding of role of quantitative techniques in business decision
making
 To prepare a common platform for students for better understanding of statistical tools.
 To familarize the students of different streams about different quantitaive techniques.
Introduction
Introduction of statistics, types of statistical methods, importance
UNIT – I ,scope and limitations ,Data classification, tabulation and (4Sessions)
representation
Measures of Central Tendency: Arithmetic Mean, Geometric
Mean, Harmonic Mean and Weighted Average, Median and
Mode
UNIT –II Measures of Dispersion: Range, Average Deviations, Standard (4 Sessions)
Deviation, Combined Standard Deviation and the Coefficient of
Variation
Skewness , Moments and Kurtosis : Introduction, measures
and applications
Correlation and Regression: Introduction, Correlation Analysis
UNIT – III – Coefficient of Correlation, Regression, Estimation using, (7 Sessions)
egression lines, Multiple Regression and Partial and Multiple
Correlation (overview)
UNIT – IV Probability: Basic concept, Three Types of Approaches to (5 Sessions)
Probability, Addition and Multiplication Theorems, Conditional

Probability and Baye's theorem.
Probability Distribution: Binomial Distribution, Poisson
UNIT – V Distribution and Normal Distribution, their Characteristics and (5 Sessions)
Applications in Business Management
Estimation and Confidence Interval: Introduction, point
estimation, confidence interval estimation, estimating sample
UNIT – VI size (5 Sessions)
Introduction of SPSS and Practical Applications of Excel
Text Books:
 Sharma, J. K. (2010). Business Statistics. New Delhi: Pearson Education (P) Ltd.
 Bali, N. P., Gupta, P. N., & Gandhi, C. P. (2008). Text Book of Quantitative Techniques. New
Delhi: Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.
Reference Books:
 Bajpai, N. (2001). Business Statistics. New Delhi: Pearson Education (P) Ltd.
 Levin, R. I. (1997). Statistics for Management. New Delhi:Pearson Education (P) Ltd.
 Hooda, R. P. (2003). Statistics for Business and Economics. New Delhi: Macmillan Publication.
 Beri, G. C. (2010). Business Statistics. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd.
 Gupta, S.C. (2006). Fundamentals of Statistics. New Delhi: Himalaya Publishing House.
 Elhance, D.N. (2008). Fundamentals of Statistics. New Delhi: Kitab Mahal Distributors New
Delhi.
Suggested Journals:
 Journal of Business and Economic & Economic Statistics
 Journal of Statistical Software
 Journal of American Statistical Association
Learning outcomes:
 Students studied basic concepts of Business Statistics so will be able to analyze data with the
help of statistical tools.
 Students will be familiar with a variety of examples where mathematics or statistics helps
accurately to explain and solve physical phenomena
 Students will be able to Illustrate and describe information using a range of numerical and
graphical example.
 Students are now able to define and apply different type’s quantitative techniques to solve
managerial, scientific and social problems.
Computer Applications in Management

Course Code: MBAC0011 Year: I Trimester: II Max. Hours: 30
Preamble: Computer applications in management are one of the essential elements of any
business course as it focuses on the technological aspects and provides a practical insight. It
helps the managers to adapt to fast technological changes so that they can keep them updated.

 To provide hands on experience to students in using computers for data organization and
addressing business needs.
 Through this course, it is intended to familiarize the students of Management with the computer
hardware and software’s and their applications in various domains of the management through
studying software.
Teaching
Module No. Content
Hours
Introduction to Computer System: Basic Computer Organization:
Introduction, features and capabilities, components of computer system,
classification of computers; Applications of Computers in Business.
MS Word: Office Button, Ribbon and tabs, Text Basics, Proofing features,
Formatting text, Formatting Paragraph, Working with Tables, Inserting
Illustrations, Working with Lists, Using WordArt.
MS Power Point: Microsoft office Button, Quick Access Toolbar, Ribbon and
UNIT I.
Tabs, Creating a Presentation, Apply Theme, Text Basics, Inserting Pictures, 5 Sessions
Working with tables, Working with charts, Slide Effects.
Software’s : MS Word, MS power Point, MS Excel, Outlook, Internet
MS-Excel: Introduction to Microsoft Excel, How to Add, Subtract, Multiply,
Divide in Excel, Excel Data Validation, Filters, Grouping, Introduction to
formulas and functions in Excel, Logical functions (operators) and conditions
UNIT II. in Excel, Visualizing data using charts in Excel, Absolute & relative
addressing, Pivot Tables in Excel, Creating Advanced Charts in Excel, 6 Sessions
Introduction to Macros in Excel, Case Study: Managing personal finance
using Microsoft Excel.
Software: Introduction; Types of software with examples

Operating systems: Introduction to operating system, Functions of operating
system, Classification of operating System
UNIT III. Computer Networks: Computer and communication networks, Evolution of
4 Sessions
computer networks, LAN, MAN, WAN, Network topologies , Modes of Data
communication
Database Management System: Overview of DBMS; Components of DBMS.

Concept, Characteristics, Objectives, Advantage & limitations, entity, attribute,
schema, subschema, RDBMS, Introduction to MS Access, Creation of Table,
UNIT IV 6 Sessions
adding data in table, querying data in table, querying criteria, action queries,
create queries, parameter queries.
E-commerce: Introduction, Comparison between Traditional commerce and E-

Commerce, Advantages & Disadvantages of e-commerce, Issues in
UNIT V 4 Sessions
Implementing Electronic Commerce.
Accounting Information System: - Introduction to Accounting Packages:
Preparation of vouchers, invoice and salary statements; maintenance of
inventory records; maintenance of Accounting books and final accounts;
financial reports generation. Software –Wave Accounting
Human Resource Information System :-Use of various HR application – 360
Degree Feedback, Applicant Tracking, Attendance Tracking Marketing
UNIT VI Information System:- Brand Management, Campaign Management, Email 5 Sessions
Marketing, Mailroom Management, Contact Management
Software’s – QuickBase, HRIS
* Separate lab sessions will be conducted as per the syllabi
Text Books:
 Bharihoke, D. (2009). Fundamentals of Information Technology. New Delhi: Excel Books
 Norton, P. (2006). Introduction to Computers. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publications
 Ritendra Goel & D.N. Kakkar (2004). Computer Applications in Management.
New Delhi: New Age International (P) Ltd.
Reference Books:
 Basandra, S. K. (2003). Computers Today. Greater Noida: Galgotia Publication Pvt. Ltd.
 Leon, A., & Leon, M. (1989). Introduction to Computers. New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House
Pvt. Ltd.
Suggested Journals:
 Information Technology and Management

Suggested Link:
 http://www.capterra.com/accounting-and-finance-software
 https://www.guru99.com/excel-tutorials.html
 https://www.javatpoint.com/powerpoint-quick-access-toolbar
Learning Outcomes:
 Identify the current software programs available to assist managers in accomplishing their
jobs.
 Develop basic understanding of technology in order to make use of them in business.
 Explain how to make a professional looking and effective presence on the Internet.
 Develop reports to assist managers in recognizing problems and opportunities.
 Create a presentation to use in a sales meeting.
 Explain fundamental concepts of data communications, computer networking, and the related
hardware.
 Demonstrate technical knowledge of computer networks and various information systems
Course Outline
Business Law
Preamble:For running any enterprise there is a immense need of understanding the various
dynamics. It is not limited to understanding the surroundings of supplies, customers etc. but
also the law related to the every happening around in context of business. Because it is well
settled rule that “Ignorance of Law is no excuse”

 To make the student aware about the basic act The Contract Act 1872 so that the fair
level of understanding can be developed.
 Getting them acquainted with the other mercantile laws like ‘Partnership, Sales of good,
Company Act and IT Act.
 It is like a package for all the aspirants to understand at least the entry level complexities
in Law.
Introduction:-Meaning of Law.
Contract Act, 1872
Definition of a Contract and its essentials, Formation of a valid
UNIT – I Contract - Offer and Acceptance, Consideration, Capacity to (8 Sessions)
Contract, Free consent, Legality of object, Breach of a Contract,
Damages for breach of a contract.Quasi contracts.
UNIT –II Consumer Protection Act 1986. (3 Sessions)
Sale of Good Act, 1930
Definition of a Contract of Sale, Conditions and Warranties,
UNIT –III Passing of Property, Right of Unpaid Seller against the Goods, (4 Sessions)
buyer, Remedies for Breach.
Limited Liability Partnership: Meaning, Salient features and

Advantage.
Companies Act, 2013
UNIT – IV Nature and Definition of a Company, Registration and (5 Sessions)
Incorporation, Memorandum of Association, Articles of
Association.
Companies Act, 2013
UNIT – V Prospectus, Kinds of Companies, Directors: Powers and duties, (6 Sessions)
Meetings, Winding up.
The Information Technology Act, 2000
UNIT – VI Definition, Digital Signature, Electronic Governance, (4 Sessions)
Attribution, Acknowledgment and Dispatch of Electronic
Records, Secure Electronic Records and Secure Digital

Signatures, Regulation of Certifying Authorities, Digital
Signature Certificates, Duties of Subscribers, Penalties and
Offences.
Text Books:
 Porwal,L.M. & Kumar, S.(2010) Business Law. N. Delhi, Virnda Publication Ltd
 Kapoor,N.D. (2009). Elements of Merchantile Law. New Delhi: Sultan Chand & Sons.
 Tulsian, P.C.(2006).Business law.New Delhi:Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Ltd.
Reference books:
 ICFAI University Press Hyderabad.(2005) ,Business Law .

 Kuchhal, M.C.(2005). Business Law.New Delhi: Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd.
 Gulshan, S.S.(2007).Business law.New Delhi: New Age International Pvt Ltd.
 Related Bare Acts
Websites:
 http://www.caclubindia.com
 http://indiacode.nic.in
 https://www.pwc.in
 http://www.mca.gov.in
Learning Outcome:
After completion of course, student will be able to:
 Understand the contract Act 1872 with the Essential of Valid contract along with
classifications of special contract.
 Get exposure with the special mercantile laws like ‘Partnership Act , Sales of good
Act, Company Act and IT Act.
 Able to understand the applicability of laws and rules as per the today’s scenario.
 Understand and able to solve the basics complexities of situations that arose in
business world pertaining to legal regulatory framework
Macro Economics
Course Code: MBAC0014 Year: I Trimester: IIMax. Hours: 30

Preamble:This course aims to introduce the first year students to the basic concepts of
macroeconomics. Macroeconomics deals with the aggregate economy. This course discusses the
preliminary concepts associated with the determination and measurement of aggregate
macroeconomic variable like savings, investment, GDP, money, inflation, and employment.

 To analyze & interpret fundamentals of Macroeconomics.
 To study the interrelationship in an open economic system.
 To master a range of methods and techniques of strategic analysis and have a clear
appreciation of their theoretical and empirical foundations, range of applicability,
qualifications and limitations.
Introduction to Macroeconomics and National Income
Accounting
Basic issues studied in macroeconomics; measurement of gross
UNIT – I domestic product; income, expenditure and the circular flow;
(5Sessions)
real versus nominal GDP; price indices; national income
accounting for an open economy.
Money
Functions of money; quantity theory of money; determination of
money supply and demand; credit creation; tools of monetary
UNIT –II policy. (5 Sessions)
Inflation, Unemployment and Expectations

Inflation and its social costs; hyperinflation.
UNIT – III Phillips curve; adaptive and rational expectations; policy (6 Sessions)
ineffectiveness debate
Aggregate Demand and Aggregate Supply Curves

Derivation of aggregate demand and aggregate and supply
UNIT – IV curves; interaction of aggregate demand and supply. (5 Sessions)
Closed Economy in the Short Run

Classical and Keynesian systems; simple Keynesian model of
UNIT – V income determination; IS-LM model; fiscal and monetary (5 Sessions)
multipliers.
Open Economy Models

Short-run open economy models; Mundell-Fleming model;
UNIT – VI exchange rate determination; purchasing power parity; asset (4 Sessions)
market approach; Dornbusch's overshooting model; monetary
approach to balance of payments; international financial markets.

Text Books:
 N. Gregory Mankiw. Macroeconomics, Worth Publishers, 7th edition, 2010.
 Dornbusch, Fischer and Startz, Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill, 11th edition, 2010.
Reference Book:
 Olivier Blanchard, Macroeconomics, Pearson Education, Inc., 5th edition, 2009.

 Richard T. Froyen, Macroeconomics, Pearson Education Asia, 2nd edition, 2005. Andrew
B. Abel and Ben S. Bernanke, Macroeconomics, Pearson Education, Inc.,
7th edition, 2011.
 Errol D’Souza, Macroeconomics, Pearson Education, 2009.
 Paul R. Krugman, Maurice Obstfeld and Marc Melitz, International Economics,
 Pearson Education Asia, 9th edition, 2012.
Learning Outcomes
 Will be able to understand the basic concepts Macroconomics..
 Understanding of the interrelationship in an open economic system.
 Students will be able to know the dealings of Macroeconomics with the aggregate
economy.
 Develop their awareness regarding careers related opportunities associated with sectors
associated with macroeconomics.
Course Outline
Cost and Management Accounting
Course Code:MBAC0015 Year: I Trimester: II Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:Managerial accounting is concerned with providing information to managers-that

is, people inside an organization who direct and control its operation. Managerial accounting
is managers oriented therefore its study must be preceded by some understanding of what
managers do, the information managers need, and the general business environment.
This course introduces student to the fundamentals of management accounting. For better
managerial decision making its important for the student to understand these management cost
concept and their practical implications which can bring significant difference in their
managerial decision.

 To familiarize the students with cost records/statements and principles underlying them
and to develop their skills in understanding and appreciating cost information.
 To acquaint them in brief with cost and management accounting mechanics, process and
system, but emphasis is laid on sound concepts and their managerial implications.
 To develop an appreciation about the utility of cost information as a vital input for
management information and decision making process.
Introduction to Cost Accounting
Role of Cost Accounting in Decision Making, Scope, Nature,
Unit -I (4 Sessions)
Functions, Types of Cost, Cost Accounting and Financial
Accounting
Elements of Cost - Materials, Labour and Overheads and their
Unit- II Allocation and Apportionment, Preparation of Cost Sheet, (5 Sessions)
Methods of Costing.
Introduction and Application to Management Accounting
Scope, Nature, Functions of Management Accounting in
Managerial Decision Making.
Break Even Analysis: Marginal Costing versus Absorption
UNIT- III (6 Sessions)
Costing, Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis and P/V Ratio Analysis and
their implications, Concept and uses of Contribution and
Breakeven Point and their analysis, Margin of Safety, Angle of
Incidence
Budgeting and Budgetary Control: Concept of Budget,

Budgeting and Budgetary Control, Types of Budget, Static and
Flexible Budgeting, Preparation of Cash Budget, Sales Budget,
Unit- IV (6 Sessions)
Production Budget, Materials Budget, Capital Expenditure Budget
and Master Budget, Advantages and Limitations of Budgetary
Control. Zero Base Budgeting
Standard Costing and Variance Analysis: Concept of Standard
Unit- V Costs, Establishing various Cost Standards, Calculation of (4 Sessions)
Material Variance, Labour Variance. Overhead variance.
Recent Developments in Accounting:

Responsibility Accounting: Definition and Role, Centers of
Control,
Unit -VI Accounting for Price Level Changes: Inflation Accounting. (5 Sessions)
Methods of Accounting for Changing Prices.
Concept of Transfer Pricing, Concept of Social Cost Benefit
Analysis.
Text Books:
 Kishore, R. M. (2006). Advanced Management Accounting. New Delhi: Taxman.
 Khan & Jain. (2004). Management Accounting. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.
Reference Books:
 Horngrene, Datar, & Foster. (2002). Introduction to Management Accounting.New Delhi:
Pearson Education.
 Pandey, I. M. (2005).Management Accounting. New Delhi: Vikas Publication.
Suggested Journals:
 The IUP Journal of Accounting Research & Audit Practices, IUP Publications,
Hyderabad.
 Indian Journal of Finance, Satya Gilani Publication, New Delhi.
Learning outcomes:
 Students will be able to understand with cost records/statements and principles
underlying them and to develop their skills in understanding and appreciating cost
information.
 Students will know the cost and management accounting mechanics, process and system,
but emphasis is laid on sound concepts and their managerial implications.
 Know the utility of cost information as a vital input for management information and
decision making process.
Course Outline
Organizational Behavior
Preamble:Organizational behavior is a relatively young field of inquiry that studies what

people think, feel, and do in and around organizations. Organizations are groups of people
who work interdependently toward some purpose. OB concepts help us to predict and
understand organizational events, adopt more accurate theories of reality, and influence
organizational events.

 Understand the various approaches of OB as applied in the organization.
 Develop fundamental skills which they will need for understanding, diagnosing and
managing the organization, i.e., the human aspects of work organizations.
 Able to get the theoretical and practical knowledge of various dimensions of individual
behavior.
 It will help the students to recognize the differences and helps to see the value of
workforce diversity in present scenario.
Introduction to OB: Concept, Meaning & Importance of OB,
Levels of analysis.
Key Determinants: People, Structure, Technology and
Environment.
UNIT I (6 Sessions)
Multidisciplinary roots of OB: Psychology, Sociology,
Anthropology, Political Science, Economics.
Models of OB: Autocratic, Custodial, Supportive, and Collegial.
Emerging Challenges and opportunities for OB
Personality and Individual Differences: Concept and its nature,
Determinants of personality, Major personality attributes
UNIT II (5 Sessions)
influencing OB. The Big Five Model, MBTI Theory
Theories of Personality: Psychoanalytical, Trait & Type Theory.
Perception: Nature & Importance, Process of Perception,
Attribution Theory
Perceptual Errors: Halo effect, Selective Perception,
Stereotyping, First impression Error, Projection, Contrast Error,
Personal Effectiveness. Organizational applications of Perception
UNIT III (4 Sessions)
Learning: Concept, Nature and Factors affecting Learning
Theories: Classical Conditioning, Operant Conditioning, Cognitive
Learning Theory & Social Learning Theory.
Behavior Modification: Learning through reinforcement,
Reinforcement Strategies
Motivation: Concept, Nature and Importance.
UNIT IV (6 Sessions)
Individual Motivation Theories: Alderfer’s ERG Theory,
McClellands Achievement Motivation Theory, Vroom’s

Expectancy Theory, Porter & Lawler’s Model
Organizational Motivation
Concept, Group Motivation Theories – Adam’s Equity Theory,
Goal Theory
Attitudes
Components of Attitude: Cognitive, Affective and Behavioral,
UNIT V Functions of Attitude. (4 Sessions)
Cognitive Dissonance Theory
Job Satisfaction: Factors and outcomes affecting Job Satisfaction
Organizational Power and politics: concept, basis of power,
power tactics, Factors contributing to organizational political
UNIT VI behavior. (5 Sessions)
Organizational change: Importance, types of change, the change
process, Resistance to change, Managing change.
Text Book:
 Robbins, S.P. (2009). Organizational Behavior. New Delhi: Pearson Education.
\ Reference Books:
 Newstorm, J. & David, K. (2007). Organizational Behavior, Human Behavior at Work.

New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publication.
 Greenberg, J. & Baron, R.A. (2005). Behavior in Organizations. New Delhi: Pearson
Education.
 Singh, K. (2010). Organizational Behavior: Text and Cases. New Delhi: Pearson
Education
 Luthans, F. (2005). Organizational Behavior. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publication
Suggested Journals:
 The IUP Journal of Organizational Behavior- IUP Publications, Hyderabad

 Abhigyan: Quest for Excellence; The Quest for Excellence- Foundation for
Organizational Research and Education, New Delhi
 Vikalpa: The Journal for Decision Makers; Publication of the Indian Institute of
Management, Ahmedabad
Learning Outcomes
After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
 Understand the various approaches of OB as applied in organization.

 Develop fundamental skills of understanding, diagnosing and managing the
organization that is helpful for understanding the human aspect of work organization.
 Develop theoretical and practical knowledge of various dimensions of individual
behavior.
 Recognize the differences and will understand the value of workforce diversity in
present scenario.
Course Outline
Research Methodology
Preamble:Research Methodology helps in realizing business objectives. In today’s

competitive environment, doing good job is not enough, organizations need to excel in every
area to satisfy customer’s needs and wants. Organizations need to know even hidden needs of
the customers. Their tastes, preferences and attitudes are always changing, what they want
today, they may not want tomorrow. Thus, organizations should be well informed and they
should be always with the latest information. Research Methodology keeps them updated with
these information required for making relevant decisions.

 To create scientific attitude towards solving a management problem and impart
knowledge about tools available for carrying out research
 To introduce the basic concepts and need of research methodology that will help in data
analysis and preparation of reports.
 To understand the use of research design and software in research.
Meaning, Objectives and Motivation in research; Types of
UNIT I (4 Sessions)
Research; Research Approaches; Research Process.
Research Design – Definition, classification: Exploratory-
qualitative techniques, secondary data analysis, experience survey,
focus groups, two stage design; Descriptive - cross sectional &
longitudinal and Causal research design.
Measurement and Scaling Techniques - Errors in Measurement,
Tests of Sound Measurement; Scaling and Scale Construction
Techniques
UNIT III Sampling- Introduction, Sampling, Complete Enumeration or (5 Sessions)
Census, Types of Sampling, Sampling Errors; Sampling Design -
Steps in Sample Design, Types of Sample Design, Sampling
Distributions.
UNIT IV Types of data; Methods of Data collection- Questionnaire,

(4 Sessions)
Interviews, Cases and Schedules.
UNIT V Exploratory data analysis - Validity and Reliability in research;

(5 Sessions)
Testing of Hypotheses; overview of multivariate analysis.
(6 Sessions)
UNIT VI Interpretation of Data and Report Writing- Precautions in report
writing, Creating a Database and its Use for Statistical Analysis,

Styles of Referencing, Plagiarism. Applications through SPSS.

Text Books:
 Copper, Donald R. (2004). Business Research Method. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company New Delhi.
 Sekaran, U. (2008). Research Methods for Business: A Skill Building Approach. New
Delhi: John Wiley & Sons Inc. New Delhi.
Reference Books:
 Zikmund, W. G. (2009). Business Research Method. Cengage Learning. New Delhi.
 Collis, J., & Hussey, R. (2003). Business Research. Palgrave Macmillan, Hampshire.
 Beri, G. C. (2005). Marketing Research. Tata McGraw-Hill Publication. New Delhi.
 Bhattacharyya, D. K. (2004). Research Methodology. 1st Edition. Excel Book
Publication.
 Kothari, C. R. (2004). Research Methodology. New Age International Publication. New
Delhi.
Learning Outcomes
 Develop scientific thinking for critically analyzing management problems and develop
basic knowledge on qualitative, quantitative and mixed methods research, as well as
relevant ethical and philosophical considerations.
 Skill to assess the appropriateness of different kinds of research designs and
methodology, for instance in terms of their appropriateness, transparency and quality.
 Have knowledge and skill on various kinds of research designs and software in research.
Course Outline
Business Statistics
Preamble:Statistical thinking enhances our understanding of how life works, allows control
over societal& business issues and helps individuals make informed decisions. Studying the
subject enhances the skills in understanding the business &industry problems and finding out
their solutions.

 To provide students with the understanding of role of statistical techniques in business
research analysis.
 To familiarize the students with various statistical and analytical tools so that they can
benefit from use of appropriate statistical techniques to Decision-Making situations.
Introduction
Analysis of Time series: Meaning, Utility, Components, Models,
UNIT – I Methods of Measuring Trend, how to Calculate and Eliminate (6 Sessions)
Trend , measurement of season effects
Index Numbers: Meaning, Uses, Problems in construction of

Index Numbers, Methods of Construction of Index Numbers,
UNIT –II Quantity and Value Index, Tests of adequacy, Chain Base Index (4 Sessions)
Numbers , consumer price index
Tests of Hypotheses: meaning of hypothesis, test statistics and
their types, Significance Level, Hypothesis Testing of
Proportions and Means and Differences between Means and
UNIT – III Proportions (Large and Small Samples), Test based on Z- test, t – (5 Sessions)
test and F -test
Analysis of Variance: Introduction, ANOVA approach ,
UNIT – IV applications , one way classification and two way classification (4 Sessions)
for testing equality of treatment means.
Chi – Square and Non-parametric Tests :Introduction,
advantages and limitations of non-parametric tests, chi-square
UNIT – V test, Run test for randomness, Mann-Whitney U test, Wilcoxon (5 Sessions)
test and Kruskal –Wallis test
Multivariate Analysis : Introduction,Multiple regression ,
UNIT – VI discriminant analysis, MNOVA, SEM, conjoint , factor and (6Sessions)
cluster analysis
* Introduction of SPSS and practical application.
Text Books:
 Sharma, J. K. (2010). Business Statistics. New Delhi: Pearson Education (P) Ltd.
 Bali, N. P., Gupta, P. N., & Gandhi, C. P. (2008). Text Book of Quantitative Techniques.
New Delhi: Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd.
Reference Books:
 Bajpai, N. (2001). Business Statistics. New Delhi: Pearson Education (P) Ltd.
 Levin, R. I. (1997). Statistics for Management. New Delhi:Pearson Education (P) Ltd.
 Hooda, R. P. (2003). Statistics for Business and Economics. New Delhi: Macmillan
Publication.
 Beri, G. C. (2010). Business Statistics. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd.
 Gupta, S.C. (2006). Fundamentals of Statistics. New Delhi: Himalaya Publishing House.
 Elhance, D.N. (2008). Fundamentals of Statistics. New Delhi: Kitab Mahal Distributors
New Delhi.
Suggested Journals:
 Journal of Business and Economic & Economic Statistics
 Journal of Statistical Software
 Journal of American Statistical Association
Learning outcomes:
 Students will be able to apply different statistical methods to solve various statistical and
decision making problems with the help of software’s.
 Students will be able to understand role of statistical techniques in business research
analysis.
 Students will be able to analyze and interpret managerial, scientific, health , engineering
statistical problems.
Management Information Systems

Course Code: MBAM0004 Year: I Trimester: III Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:MIS are business concepts in which the influence of information technology has
caused change. Management Information Systems aims to give students a practical and
theoretical background to the use of IT in the business world. It covers various business
initiatives and how technology supports these initiatives

 Provide the fundamentals associated with the management of information technology in a
business enterprise.
 Provides an understanding of the Information Systems (IS) management framework of
Ebusiness.
 Provides insight on how to develop and implement enterprise-wide IT strategies,
initiatives and programs

Credits: 04 TrimesterII L–T–P: 4–0–0
Teaching
Module No. Content
Hours
System Concept: Definition of Systems, Components of system, Types of
System, Concept of Data and Information
UNIT I.
Information Systems: Definition of Information System, Classification of 6 Sessions
Information System, Operation support system, Management Support System,
Importance of Management Information System
Management support system and classifications: Management Information

UNIT II.
System, Decision Support Systems, Executive Information System, Knowledge 4 Sessions
Management Systems and Expert System
Role of Management Information System: Competitive Strategy concept,
UNIT III.
Value Chain and Strategic IS, Business Process Reengineering, Difference 5 Sessions
between Business Improvement and BPR
Developing MIS System (Part 1): System Development Life Cycle-
UNIT IV Traditional approach and Prototyping approach, Feasibility Analysis, System 5 Sessions
Analysis, System Design
Developing MIS System (Part 2): System Implementation, Testing,

UNIT V 5 Sessions
Documentation, Training, Conversion & Maintenance
Applications: Enterprise Resource Planning, Customer Relationship

UNIT VI Management. Security & Ethical challenges of IT. Ethical Responsibilities – 5 Sessions
Business Ethics, Technology Ethics.
Text Books:
 O’Brien, J. (2007). Management Information System. 8th Edition; Tata McGraw-Hill
Publication.
Reference Books:
 Laudon & Laudon. (2007). Business Information System. 9th Edition. Tata McGraw-Hill
Publication.
 Behl, R. (2006). Information Technology for Management. Tata McGraw-Hill
Publication.
 Jawedkar, S. (2007). Management Information System. 3rd Edition. Tata McGraw-Hill
Publication.
 David, W. (2008). Business Data Analysis using Excel. Oxford Publications.
Suggested Journals:
 Journal of Information Systems
 Journal of Cost Management
 International Journal of Technology Management
 International Journal of Management Information Systems
Learning Outcomes:
 Demonstrate effective analytical and critical thinking skills to make an appropriate business
related decisions
 Distinguish and analyze ethical problems that occur in business and society
 Apply leadership skills and competencies in business situations
 Illustrate how current technologies and decision-support tools can be utilized to the
advantage of business operations.
 Demonstrate an understanding of the major functional areas of Business
 Explain the role and significance of effective management information systems, and describe
how they contribute to optimizing organizational performance.
 Explain fundamental database concepts and apply these concepts to the design and
development of relational databases.
 Demonstrate the major steps in the design and implementation phases of the system
development life cycle (SDLC)
Course Outline
Financial Management
Course Code: MBAE0020 Year: I Trimester: III Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:Financial management entails planning for the future of a person or a business

enterprise to ensure a positive cash flow. It includes the administration and maintenance of
financial assets. Besides, financial management covers the process of identifying and
managing risks. From an organizational point of view, the process of financial management is
associated with financial planning and financial control.
 To learn the financial tools needed to make business decisions.

 To get a basic insight of corporate finance theory, but emphasizes the application of
theory to business decisions.
Overview of Financial Management:

Traditional and Modern Approach of Financial Management;
UNIT I Objective: Profit vs. Wealth Maximization and EPS Maximization; (5 Sessions)
Functions of Financial Management; Risk and Return; Time Value
of Money
Investment Decisions
Nature & Techniques of Capital Budgeting, Traditional Methods:
Payback Period Method, Average Rate of Return Method, Time-
Adjusted Methods: Net Present Value, Internal Rate of Return
Method, Profitability Index Method, Discounted Payback Period
Method.
Cost of Capital
Concept and Measurement of Cost of Capital, Debt vs. Equity. Cost
UNIT III of Equity, Cost of Preference shares, Cost of Retained Earnings. (4 Sessions)
Weighted Average Cost of Capital (WACC) and Marginal Cost of
Capital.
Capital Structure Decisions:

Capital Structure vs. Financial structure – Capitalization.
UNIT IV Leverages: Financial Leverage, Operating Leverage and Composite (5 Sessions)
Leverage. EBIT-EPS Analysis, Indifference of Financial Leverage.
Theories –The Modigliani Miller Theory –A critical appraisal.
Dividend Decisions:
Dividends and Value of the Firm - Relevance of Dividends; Factors
UNIT V (6 Sessions)
determining Dividend Policy. Dividend & Valuation of the firm-
The Basic Models: Walter Model and Gordon Model.
Business Valuation: Basics
Value Concept, Principles & Techniques of Valuation, Discounted
Cash Flow Valuation: Steps, Assumptions, Applications, Value
UNIT VI (4 Sessions)
Drivers; Relative Valuation: Steps, Applications, Valuation
Multiples, Value based Management
An overview of Working Capital Management
Text Books:
 Kishore, R. M. (2008). Financial Management. 6th Edition. New Delhi: Taxmann
Publication.
 Pandey, I. M. (2009). Financial Management. 9th Edition. New Delhi: Vikas Publishing
House.
Reference Books:
 Khan, M. Y., & Jain, P. K. (2009). Financial Management. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-
Hill Publication.
 Chandra, P. (2009). Financial management. 7th Edition. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill
Publication.
 Brealey, M. (2002). Principle of Corporate Finance. 7th Edition.New Delhi: Tata
McGraw-Hill Publication.
 Maheswari, S. N. (2007). Financial Management.New Delhi:Vikas Publishers.
Journals:
 The Quarterly Journal ofIndian Institute of Finance
(http://www.financeindia.org/fi.htm)
Learning Outcome
 Understanding the basic finance concepts like cash-flow, time value of money, return,
and risk as the building blocks of finance theory.
 Identify factors that have a bearing on the investment, financing and dividend decisions.
 Evaluate the financial viability of a capital budgeting exercise in various situations.
 Able to discuss the issues involved in value based management and corporate
governance.
 Will be able to analyze relevant factors that have bearing on the management of working
capital.
Course Outline
Human Resource Management

Course Code: MBAC0021 Year: I Trimester: III Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:Human Resource Management has wide application in industry. As human beings

are the most important asset of the organization, HRM guides us in their optimum utilization.
Right from the entry till the exit of human resource in the organization, they need to be
properly taken care of, guided and controlled if the organization is to get the best out of them.
This objective can be achieved with the knowledge of the subject. In fact, this subject provides
immense career opportunities in any type of industry as human being are the part & parcel of
each & every industry. The knowledge of this subject is the essential requirement of every
manager.

 To develop a holistic understanding of Management of HR starting from procurement to
separation in an Organization.
Evolution of HRM: Personnel Management, HRM – concept,
objectives, Functions. Personnel Management vs. Human resource
UNIT I (4 Sessions)
Management. Concept of HRD.
Trends and emerging issues in HRM.
Human Resource Planning: Concept of HRP, Process.
Job Analysis: Concept, Job Description, Job Specification, Concept (5 Sessions)
UNIT II
of HRIS, HR Accounting and HR Audit.
Talent Acquisition: Recruitment - Procedure, Methods and Sources,
Selection-Procedure and types of selection tests.
Training and Development: Key Issues in Training, Training Vs
Development, Challenges in Training, Managing the Training (6 Sessions)
(Assessment Phase, Implementation Phase and Evaluation Phase),
UNIT III
Different Methods of Training and Management Development.
Performance Management: traditional and modern techniques,
Identification of Key Performance Areas and Key Result Areas –
Ethical issues in performance appraisal. Concept of Potential
appraisal, Feedback mechanisms.
Compensation Management –Concepts and Components-Job
UNIT V (5 Sessions)
Evaluation- Incentives, Benefits and employee welfare facilities.
Industrial relations- Concept: Grievance Procedure, collective
UNIT VI Bargaining, Worker’s participation in Management, IR Machinery for (4 Sessions)
handling disputes.
Retirement/Separation- Concept: Superannuation, Voluntary

Retirement Schemes, Resignation, Discharge, Dismissal, Suspension,
Layoff.
Text Book:
 Rao, V.S.P. (2010). Human Resources Management. Excel Books. New Delhi.
Reference Books:
 Flippo, E. B. (2008). Personnel Management. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill
International Series.
 Gomez, M. & Balkin. (2008). Managing Human Resources. Pearson Education. New
Delhi.
 Rao, P. (2007). Essentials of Human Resources Management & IR. (3rd Edition).
Himalaya Publishing House. New Delhi.
 Aswathappa, K. (2008). Human Resource management / Text & Cases. Tata McGraw-
Hill Publication. New Delhi.
 Aquinas, P.G. (2009). Human Resource Management. Vikas Publishing. New Delhi.
 Ivancevich, John M. (2005). Human Resource Management. Tata McGraw-Hill
Publication. New Delhi.
 Monappa, A., & Saiyadain, M. S. (2006). Personnel Management. Tata McGraw Hill
Publication. New Delhi.
 Snell & Bholander. (2007). Human Resource Management. Cengage Learning. New
Delhi.
Journals:
 Advances in Developing Human Resources, Sage Publication
 Human Resource Development Review, Sage Publication
 HBR (Harvard Business Review)
Learning Outcome:
After completion of course student will be able to:
 Students were able to develop the main HR functions viz. acquisition, development, and
maintenance functions.
 Able to understand Compensation administration, transfers discipline, redressal which

brought under the title Maintenance function.
 Able to Analysis and develop the Meticulous planning in orchestrating whole functions
of HRM the will obviate the future problems and accelerate the progress of the
organization.
 Enhance in knowledge related to Human Resource strategies which make a greater

contribution to the performance of any firm.
Course Outline
International Business Management
Course Code:MBAE0022 Year: I Trimester: III Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:The Primary objective of this course is to acquaint the students to emerging

global trends to business environment and introducing learners to the framework of
International Business. This course introduces students to the world of international business
and management by studying cultural influences, government and business structures in our
global economy.

 To achieve a real understanding of the complexities, opportunities & creative challenges
of international business across time, space & cultures and recognize those factors which
distinguish the marketing mix for overseas markets as opposed to domestic markets.
 To learn how to track & evaluate changes in world markets that effects the consumers
demand & shape of marketers’ strategies.
 To identify & analyze ethical issues in international marketing affecting sustainable
development (“green-marketing”) & social justice in business and to create awareness
about the various bodies working on the international level for the promotional of
international trade & business.
Conceptual Framework of International Business
History , Nature & Scope of International Business, Comparison
of Domestic Business and International Business, Reasons for
Growth of International Business, Stages of Internationalization,
EPRG Framework, Globalization , Multinational Corporations,
India and International Business.
Cross Cultural Communication, Effect of Environment on
International Business
International Business Theories
International Trade Theories : Mercantilism, Adam Smith’s
Absolute Cost Advantage Theory, Ricardo’s Comparative Cost
Advantage Theory, Haberler’s Opportunity Cost Theory, Hecksher-
UNIT –II (6 Sessions)
Ohlin Theory.
Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) Theories: Market Imperfection
Approach, International Product Life Cycle Theory, Transaction
Cost Approach, The Eclectic Paradigm.
International Business Organization Structure
Importance of Organization Structure, Different forms of
Organization Structure- Vertical Organization Structure, Horizontal
UNIT-III Organization Structure, Matrix Structure, Synthesis: Strategy & (5 Sessions)
Architecture- Multidomestic Firm, International Firm, Global Firm,
Transnational Firm.
International Business Risk: Country Risk Analysis,
Classification of Risk Involved- Political Risk, Socio-cultural Risk,

Economic Risk, Importance of Risk Analysis for International
Business. Regional economic integration, role of world bodies in
International business- WTO, IMF, World Bank
INTERNATIONAL STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
Strategy in International Business, Pressures for Cost Reductions &
Local Responsiveness, Role of Strategic Management in
International Business,
Entry Decisions for International Business- Timing & Scale of
UNIT – IV Entry, Mode of entry in Foreign Market- Exporting, Turnkey (6 Sessions)
Projects, Licensing, Franchising, , Joint Venture, Wholly Owned
Subsidiary by Green-Field Venture or Acquisition,
Competitive Strategies for International Business- International
Strategy, Multidomestic Strategy, Global Strategy, Transnational
Strategy.
International Financial Management
An Overview of International Financial Management- Emergence
of International Finance; Difference between Domestic Finance and
International Finance; Development of International Finance,
UNIT – V International Monetary System, International Banking Services (5 Sessions)
International Marketing Management
Overview of International Marketing- Framework of International
Marketing, Nature & Scope of International Marketing,
International Marketing Mix Elements.
International Human Resource
Importance of HR in International Business, Recruitment &
Selection in International Business,
UNIT – VI Training & Development in International Business, Performance (4 Sessions)
Appraisal
Ethics and International Business
Ethical Business, Social Responsibility of International Business.
Text Books:
 Hill, C.W. (2009). International Business. 5th Edition. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.
 Keegan, J. W. (2007). Global Marketing Management. 7th Edition. New Delhi: Pearson
Education.
Reference Books:
 Daniel, J., & Lee, H. (2009). International Business Environment. 11th Edition. New
Delhi: Pearson Education.
 Onkvisit, S., & Shaw, J. (2004). International Marketing. 3rd Edition. New Delhi:
Pearson Education.
 Derskey, H. (2008). International Management. 4th Edition. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of
India.
 Aswattapa, K. (2003). International Business. 3rd Edition. New Delhi: Tata McGraw
Hill.
Suggested Journals:
 Global Business Review; International Management Institute, India.
 Journal of World Economic Review; Serial Publications, India.
 IUP journal o Intellectual Property rights; IUP, India.
 Foreign Trade review; IIFT, India.
Learning Outcomes
 Students will be able to develop an understanding of global perspective.
 Students will be able to understand the dimensions of international marketers’ strategies.
 Students will understand the ethical implication of business decision making and
recognize ethical dilemmas. Students will have awareness about international trade
promotion bodies.
Course Outline
Operations Research
Course Code: MBAC0023 Year: I Trimester: III Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:The Decision Making Body of any organization constitutes of Managers, who

work at different levels. Their ultimate goal is maximization wealth for the organization
through the optimum utilization of resources.

 To enable in understanding the role and relevance of operations research in management.
 To enable them to use these techniques optimizing the profitability and solving the
business problems of the organization.
Introduction of operation research, Scope, Nature and its
Applications in Decision Making.
Decision theory: Introduction, Types of Environment, Certainty,
UNIT I (5 Sessions)
Uncertainty, Conflict and Risk, Payoff and Retreat Tables Decision
Rules – One Stage Decision Making Problem and Multi Stage
Decision Making Problem: Decision Tree.
Linear programming: Mathematical Formulations of LP Models for
Product-Mix Problems; Slack and Surplus Variables, Standard form
of LPP, Graphical method, Simplex Method and Big M method for
Solving LP Problems and Concept of Duality
Transportation problem: Various Method of finding Initial Basic
Feasible Solution; N-W Method, Least Cost Method, VAM Method,
UNIT III (4 Sessions)
and Optimality; MODI Method, its Application
Assignment model: Algorithm and its Applications.
Game Theory: Concept of Game; Two-Person Zero-Sum Game;
Pure and Mixed Strategy Games; Saddle Point; Odds Method;
Dominance Method and Graphical Method for solving Mixed
UNIT IV Strategy Game (7 Sessions)
Sequencing Problem: Johnsons Algorithm for n - Jobs and Two -
machines, n - Jobs and Three - Machines, Two - jobs and m -
Machines Problems.
Queuing Theory: Characteristics of M/M/I Queue model;
Application of Poisson and Exponential Distribution in Estimating
UNIT V (4 Sessions)
Arrival Rate and Service Rate; Applications of Queue Model for
Better Service to the Customers.
Project Management: Introduction, Rules for Drawing the Network
UNIT VI Diagrams, Application of CPM and PERT Techniques in Project (4 Sessions)
Planning and Control.
Text Books:
 Vohra, N. D. (2010). Quantitative Techniques in Management. New Delhi: Tata
Reference Books:
 Sharma, J. K. (2006). Operations Research. New Delhi: Macmillan Publication.
 Taha, H.A. (2008). Operations Research: An Introduction. New Delhi: Pearson
Education.
 Swarup, K. (2008). Operations Research. New Delhi: Sultan Chand & Sons.
 Sharma, S.D. (2005. Operations Research. Meerut: Kedar Nath Ram Nath.
 Gupta, P. K., & Hira, D.S. (2008). Operations Research. New Delhi: S. Chand &
Company Ltd.
Suggested Journals:
 Journal of Operations Research Society
 European Journal of Operations Research
 Asia Pacific Journal of Operations Research
 International Journal of Operations Research.
Learning outcomes:
 Students will be able to design, solve and improve mathematical model of different type
of scientific and managerial problems.
 Students will be able to find optimal solution of various mathematical models of different
decision making physical problems with various mathematical and computational tools.
 Students will be able to define and apply different type’s quantitative techniques to solve
managerial, scientific, engineering and social problems.
Course Outline
Marketing Management
Course Code: MBAC0024Year: I Trimester: III Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:It is an introductory course designed to give students in business and other

disciplines an overview and understanding of the important role of marketing in
organizational success. Students will be introduced to all the significant uses and functions of
marketing. In addition to learning basic marketing techniques, students will learn to
appreciate why small, medium, and large organizations must develop a market and consumer
oriented focus if they are to succeed in the emerging competitive environment in India and
abroad.
 To introduce students to the basics of marketing, dealing competition and familiarize

students with marketing mix decision.
 To create awareness about the latest trends and developments in marketing and enhance
their problem-solving and decision-making abilities in strategic areas of marketing.
 To get students to think as business & marketing professionals involved in the effort of a
modern day business organization.
Introduction: Importance and Scope of Marketing, Philosophies
of Marketing Management Elements of Marketing, Marketing Vs
UNIT – I Selling, Consumer Markets and Industrial Markets. Marketing (5 Sessions)
Mix, Market Demand, Marketing Information System.
Consumer Buying Behaviour: Types, Process and Factors.
Market segmentation, Targeting and Positioning: Segmenting
UNIT –II Consumer and Business Markets – Bases, Purpose and Process, (5 Sessions)
Market Targeting, Positioning – Nature and Importance,
Differentiating the Product
Product Decisions: New Product Planning and Development
Process, Failure of New Products.
UNIT – III Product Life Cycle: Stages & Strategies. (5 Sessions)
Strategies for competition: Leaders, Challengers, Followers and
Nichers.
Product-Mix: Product Characteristics and Classification,

Product Differentiation, Product Hierarchy, Product System &
UNIT – IV Mixes, Product line and length analysis, Packaging, Labeling,
(5 Sessions)
Warrantees & Guarantees
Pricing Decisions: Understanding Price, Setting the Price,

Adapting the Price, Initiating & Responding to Price Changes.
Promotion Mix: Advertising, Sales Promotion, Sales Promotion
UNIT – V techniques, Personal Selling, Public Relations, Direct Marketing, (4 Sessions)
and Publicity, Factors in setting Promotion mix.
Channels of Distribution: Channel of Distribution for
Consumer/ Industrial Products, Functions Performed by Channel
Members, Channel design decisions.
Channel dynamics: Vertical Marketing Channel, Horizontal
UNIT – VI Marketing Channel, Factors Affecting Channel Distribution, (6 Sessions)
Channel conflict Retailing/wholesaling: Functions and
Classifications.
New trends in Marketing Management
Text Books:
 Kotler, P. (2007). Marketing Management, Analysis Planning, Implementation and
Control. 12th Edition. Pearson Education.
 Kotler, P., & Keller, K. L. (2007). Marketing Management. 12th Edition. Pearson
Education.
 Kotler, P., & Armstrong, G. (1999). Principles of Marketing. 12th Edition. Pearson
Education.
Reference Books:
 Ramaswamy, V. S., & Namakumari, S. (2002). Marketing Management: Planning,
Implementation and Control: Global Perspective Indian Context. 3rd Edition.McMillan
Publication.
 Kumar, A. & Meenakshi, N. (2008). Marketing Management.Vikas Publishing House
 Czinkota & Kotabe. (2001). Marketing Management. 2nd Edition; Australia : Thomson
Learning
 Saxena, R. (2003). Marketing Management. 3rd Edition. Tata McGraw-Hill Publication.
Journals:
 Journals of Marketing Management by Westburn Publishers
 Indian Journal of Marketing (www.indianjournalofmarketing.com)
 Marketing Management JOURNAL (www.mmaglobal.org)
Learning Outcomes
 Understand the concepts, tools and techniques relevant to marketing management

 Develop an insight into basic marketing mix issues
 Go through the complexities of buying Behavior
 Solve the strategic marketing problems faced by marketing managers
 Design marketing strategies
Course Outline
Operations Management
Preamble:This course is designed to meet the requirements of students regarding operations

management, its emerging issues and practice applications in corporate world.

 To enable in understanding the role and relevance of operations management.
 To enable them to use these techniques for optimizing the manufacturing process of the
organization.
Introduction to Operation Management: Introduction,
Historical Evolution, Scope of Operation Management, Operating
System – Classification,
UNIT – I Plant Location and Layout: Introduction and Managing Need for (5 Sessions)
Selecting a Suitable Location, Factors influencing Plant Location,
Location Models, Plant Layout, Classification of Layout, Design
of Product Layout, Design of Process Layout.
Material Handling: Introduction and Meaning, Objectives and
Principles of Material Handling, Selection of Material Handling
Equipments, Evaluation of Material Handling System, Material
Handling Equipments, Guidelines for Effective Utilization of
Material Handling Equipments,
UNIT–II (4 Sessions)
Material Management: Introduction and Meaning of Material
Management, Scope of Material Management, Material Planning
and Control, Purchasing, Store management, Inventory Control,
Standardization, Simplification, Value Analysis, Ergonomics, JIT
Manufacturing.
Production Planning and Control: Introduction and Meaning,
Need for Production Planning and Control, Objective of
Production Planning and Control, Phase of Production Planning
(6 Sessions)
UNIT –III and Control, Operation Planning and Schedule System, Aggregate
Planning, Master Production Schedule, Material Requirement
Planning, Capacity Planning, Routing, Scheduling.
Quality Control: Introduction, Quality, Inspection, Quality
Control, Statistical Quality Control, Quality Circle.
Work Study: Introduction, Productivity, Work Study, Method
UNIT – IV (6 Sessions)
Study: Motion Study, Work Measurement, Time Study
Quality Assurance and Certification: ISO 9000, ISO 9004,
ISO 14000 Series
UNIT – V Maintenance Management: Introduction and Meaning, (4 Sessions)
Objectives of Maintenance, Types of Maintenance, Maintenance

Planning, Maintenance Scheduling, Total Quality Maintenance,
Total Productive Maintenance
Waste Management: Introduction and Meaning, Identification
and Control of Waste, Disposal of Scrap.
UNIT – VI Automation: Introduction, Types of Automation, Computer (5 Sessions)
Integrated Manufacturing, Reason of Automation, Advantages of
Automation, Automation Strategies.
Text Books:
 Everett, A. Ronald, J. & Ebert, J. (2007). Production and Operations Management:

Concepts, Models and Behavior. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India Private Limited.
 Bedi, K. (2010). Production and Operation Management. New Delhi: Oxford University
Press.
Reference Books:
 Chary, S. N. (2010). Production and Operations Management. New Delhi: Tata
 Chunawala & Patel. (2009). Production and Operation Management. Mumbai: Himalaya
Publishing House.
 Goel, B. S. (2010). Production Operations Management. Meerut: Pragati Prakashan.
Suggested Journals:
 International Journal of Operations and Productions Management
 International Journal of Production Economics
 International Journal of Production Research
Learning Outcomes
 Understand the basic frame work and significance of plant location and layout decisions.
 Understand various tools and techniques of, necessary for running the production process
like, Capacity planning, Master production schedule, Routing and scheduling decisions.
 Analyze the processes involved in production, a scientific manner by utilizing the

concepts like work study and method study.
 Understand the importance of Quality control tools and their implementation, in order to
maintain the quality of product/services.
Technology and Innovation Management

Course Code:MBAM0005 Year: I Trimester: III Max. Hours:
30
Preamble:Technology is today seen as an integral component of the global strategy for
economic growth. It is seen as a key driver of wealth creation, and the ability to respond to
change through technology is seen as a major competitive advantage. Executives are required
to understand technology needs of their companies and manage the integration of technology
into the workplace. All modernization in industries has depended on the skillful use of
technology, and innovation forms the basis of survival and growth of all companies. Success of
a business strategy is directly related to the correct identification of technology required for
the business (e.g. product design is a key technology requirement for manufacturing) and
correct analysis of the strategic options provided by the existing and emerging technologies.
The course focuses on different matters of importance related to Technology and Innovation
Management. A unit has been dedicated to understanding the scenario in India regarding
technology usage and development.

 To enable students understand the importance of continuous innovation and
effectivetechnology utilization in globalised economy.
 To provide an overview of current developments in the field of technology and
innovation management in organizations.
 To develop an understanding of laws and practices followed in India towards technology
management.
Creativity: Definition, Creative process, Techniques for creative
problem solving
Innovation: Difference between creativity, invention and
innovation, Sources of innovation, Importance, Process and
types/organizational dimensions of innovation, Factors and
barriers affecting innovation in organizations
Technology: Concept and meaning of technology, Evolution and
growth of technology, Impact of technology on society and
business, Forms of technology: process technology and product
UNIT –II technology, Technology and market interaction (5 Sessions)
Innovation and Technology Management: Management of
technology process and its significance, Technology life cycle, R
& D and Competitive advantage
Technology Forecasting: Technology monitoring, Technology
strategy: concept, types, key principles, framework for
UNIT-III (5 Sessions)
formulating technology strategy, Technology development,
Technology acquisition and transfer, Technology absorption and
diffusion - rate of diffusion, Strategic technological alliances.

Managing technology as a strategic asset: RBV theory, Booz
Allen and Hamilton methodology,Human aspects in technology
management: integration of people and technology,
organizational and psychological factors, organizational structure.
Social Issues in Technology Management: Technological
UNIT – V change and industrial relations, Technology assessment, (4 Sessions)
Environmental impact analysis, TAM
Technological environment in India: Technology policy, Role
of various government, organizations in development and
dissemination of technology-DST, CSIR, DRDO, UGC and
CART, Emerging perspectives on technology management
Text Books:
 Khalil, T, M, & Shankar, R. (2013) Management of Technology. New Delhi: McGraw-
Hill.
 Khurana, V.K, & Saini, A. K. (2017) Management of Technology & Innovation. New
Delhi: Ane Books.
 Betz, F. (1993). Strategic Technology Management. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Reference Books:
 Narayanan, V. K. (2007). Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive
Advantage. NewDelhi: Pearson Education Asia
 Schilling. (2006). Strategic Management of Technological Innovation. New York:
McGraw-Hill
 Sullivan, N. (1995). Technology Transfer. New York: Cambridge University Press.
Journals:
 Journal of Manufacturing Technology Management
 Journal of Science and Technology Policy Management
Learning Outcomes
1. Stimulate and inform a strategic perspective on the role of innovation, and in particular
to increase understanding of:
 The characteristics of innovation processes and the factors that shape and drive
innovation;
 The potential roles of incremental and disruptive innovation in creating and
sustaining firm competitiveness
2. Understand the sources of innovation competence in firms and how these competences
are developed, and in particular to increase understanding of:
 Why some firms are more successfully innovative than others;

 The many different sources of knowledge and capability used for innovation and the
strategies for accessing them.
 Understand the major tools that are used increasingly to assist innovation
management, both at the project level and at the level of organizational development.
 Understand the central role of learning in innovation and in innovation management.
Business Analytics
Course Code: MBAE0010 Year: II Trimester: III Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:Business Analytics refers to various categories of analytical approaches for modelling

different business situations and arriving at strategies as solutions for optimal decision-making
managerial processes. Thus, Business Analytics today refers to different approaches for modelling and
arriving at assessing and predicting risk, predicting market preferences, project feasibility, customer
segmentation, inherent and underlying dimensions in consumer preferences, factors leading to
probability of purchase, preferred segments in financial and credit card industry, probability of attrition
in large organizations.

 This course prepares students to lead in analytics-driven organizations.
 Students will explore the capabilities and challenges of data-driven business decision
making .
 The course will include hands-on work exposure with data and software.
 Topics to be covered include data manipulation, predictive analytics, decisions under
uncertainty, and decision analytic tools (linear and nonlinear optimization).
Introduction to Business Analytics:

What is Business Analytics? Evolution of Business Analytics;
Impacts and challenges; Scope of Business Analytics; Software
Support; Data for Business Analytics: Data Sets and Databases,
UNIT – I Big Data, Metrics and Data classification, Data reliability and (5 Sessions)
validity; Models in business analytics: Decision Models, Model
Assumptions, Uncertainty and Risk, Prescriptive Decision
Models; Problem solving with Analytics, Business Intelligence
Analytics on Spreadsheets:
Basic Excel Skills: Excel Formulas, Copying Formulas; Excel
functions: Basic Excel functions, functions of specific
UNIT –II applications, insert function, logical functions; Using Excel (6 Sessions)
Lookup functions for Database queries; Spreadsheet Add-Ins for
Business Analytics
Visualizing and Exploring Data
Data Visualization: Dashboards, Tools and software for data
visualization; Creating charts in Microsoft Excel; Other Excel
UNIT – III Data Visualization Tools: Data Bars, Color Scales, and Icon Sets, (4 Sessions)
Sparklines, Excel Camera tool; Data Queries: Tables, sorting and
Filtering
Descriptive Analytics:
Populations and samples; Measure of Locations; Using Measure
of Locations in Business Decisions; Measures of Dispersion;
UNIT – IV Measures of Shape; Excel Descriptive Statistics Tool; Measures
(5 Sessions)
of Association; Statistical thinking in Business Decisions:
variability in Samples
Predictive Analytics:
Modeling relationships and trends in Data; Finding the Best-
Fitting Regression Line; Testing Hypothesis for Regression
UNIT – V Coefficient; Multiple Linear Regression;
(5 Sessions)
Data Mining: Scope of Data Mining; Data Exploration and
Reduction
Prescriptive Analytics:
Building Linear Optimization Model; Implementing Linear
Optimization Model on Spreadsheets; Excel functions to Avoid
UNIT – VI in Linear Optimization; Solving Linear Optimization Models;
(5 Sessions)
How Solver Works; Solver outcomes and solution; Using
Optimization Models for Prediction and insight.

Text Books:
 Albright, S., and Wayne Winston. Business Analytics: Data Analysis & Decision
Making. Nelson Education, 2014.
 Anil Maheswari (2017). Data Analytics. Mc Graw Hill
 Sandhya Kuruganti & Hindol Basu (2017). Business Analytics: Applications to
Consumer Marketing. Tata McGraw Hill
 Kadre, Shailendra, and Venkat Reddy Konasani. Practical Business Analytics Using
SAS: A Hands-on Guide. Apress, 2015.
 Rao, Purba Halady. BUSINESS ANALYTICS: An application focus. PHI Learning Pvt.
Ltd., 2013.
 Liebowitz, Jay, ed. Big data and business analytics. CRC press, 2013.
 Laursen, Gert HN, and Jesper Thorlund. Business analytics for managers: Taking
business intelligence beyond reporting. John Wiley & Sons, 2016.
 Hofmann, Markus, and Ralf Klinkenberg, eds. RapidMiner: Data mining use cases
and business analytics applications. CRC Press, 2013.
Learning Outcomes
Student will be able to
 Develop new or improved innovative business processes from gap analysis through
process design in support of a company's strategic objectives in a socially responsible
manner.
 Develop business models that support a company's strategic objectives.
 Articulate the interdependence between financial and operational metrics used in value
chain analysis to key decision makers.
 Appraise the impact on financial and operational performance of specific business
processes/models.
 Evaluate the opportunities for business process and supply chain improvement based on
current best practices across industries, as well as new breakthrough thinking.
Fundamentals of Banking and Insurance

Preamble:This course is designed to provide a broad view on fundamentals of banking
business their functions and impact on economy of India in general and on different segments
of the society. It will also explain the role of Reserve Bank of India in monitoring and control
of the banking system. The role of financial institutions and markets will also be covered. The
course will also provide an overview on the business of insurance sector. The very purpose of
this course is to an insight of banking, finance and insurance services.

 To have an understanding about the role of commercial banks in India
 To get familiarize with the functions of and financial system and role of financial services in the
economy of a country
 To understand the fundamentals of insurance business
Commercial Banking system:Evolution of banks in India,
different types of banking system in India, contribution of banks
UNIT – I in the economic growth of the country. Trends of banking (5 Sessions)
business. Functions of commercial banks
Regulatory Mechanism:Role of the Reserve Bank of India,

Functions of Reserve Bank of India, Regulatory Mechanism for
UNIT –II monitoring and control of commercial banks by the Reserve Bank (5 Sessions)
of India.
Financial system of a Country
Functions of financial system, important pillars of financial
UNIT – III system; Financial markets , financial institutions and financial (5 Sessions)
instruments, financial flows in the economy
An overview of financial services: The concept of financial
UNIT – IV services in the economy, types of financial services, role of (5 Sessions)
financial services in the economy,
An overview of financial markets:
Types and nature of financial markets, role of financial markets
UNIT – V in mobilization of financial resources, functions of financial (5 Sessions)
markets
An overview of Insurance Business:
The fundamentals of insurance business, types of insurance
products and services, role of insurance in the financial system,

insurance business as social security measure.

Text Books:
 Singh & Dutta (2013), Management of Commercial Banks- Tata McGraw-Hill Company
Limited.
Reference Books:
- Padmalatha Suresh & Justin Paul, (2010) , Management of Banking and Financial
Services, Pearson, Delhi
- Khan & Jail (2015), financial Services, Tata Mcgraw
- Arora (2014), Principles of Banking, S chand & sons, Delhi
- Annual Reports of RBI
- “The Banker”, A Journal of Indian Banks Association
- Websites- SEBI, RBI and IRDA
Learning Outcomes:
 Basic understanding of banking functions and role in the economy
 An overview of financial system, financial services and financial markets
 An overview of insurance business.
Course Outline
Strategic Management
Course Code: MBAC0029 Year: II Trimester: IV Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:Strategic management is the core element of any business course as it acts like
glue that holds other business subjects together. It is the field of management designed to help
general managers improve the long-term competitive position of their organization. It is about
success and failure, both from an individual and organizational perspective. It can help
management trainee to master the corporate jungle and to achieve individual career aims. It
instills the habit of reaching an identified goal by developing the necessary competence and
seizing available opportunities. In short, an understanding of strategy enhances performance
and improves career prospects

 To understand the nature of strategic management and its competitive and institutional
context
 To appreciate the strengths and limitations of strategic analysis, and how it fits into the
overall strategy process
 To master a range of methods and techniques of strategic analysis and have a clear
appreciation of their theoretical and empirical foundations, range of applicability,
qualifications and limitations.
Introduction to Strategic Management
Definition and importance of Strategic Management, Strategic
Management Process, Levels of Strategy
UNIT – I Strategic Intent: Hierarchy of Strategic Intent (6 Sessions)
Basic Concepts: Stretch, Leverage, Business Definition &
Model, Business Policy, emergent and realized strategy
Internal Environmental Analysis
The Resource Based View Of The Firm, VRIO Framework &
UNIT –II Application, SWOT Analysis, Value chain analysis, (4 Sessions)
Evaluating Firm’s Internal Capabilities,
External Environmental Analysis
Macro Environment, Industry analysis, Porter’s 5 Forces Model,
UNIT – III Strategic Groups and Strategic Types, Imitation & Competitive (5 Sessions)
Dynamics in an Industry
Strategy Formulation- Environment And Positioning School
Corporate Level Strategies: Portfolio Analysis – BCG and GE
UNIT – IV models, The Corporate Parent, Directional strategies – types of (6 Sessions)
strategies for Growth, Stability & Retrenchment
Business Level Strategy: Porter’s Generic strategy model,
UNIT – V Strategic Choice, ‘Blue-Ocean’ Strategy (5 Sessions)
Strategy Implementation
Strategy Implementation and challenges, Structural, Cultural and
Functional aspects of Implementation - Strategic Management in
HR, Marketing, Finance, Operations, etc., McKinsey 7S’Frame
work, Corporate Restructuring
Strategy Evaluation
Strategy Evaluation and Control, Developing Performance
UNIT – VI Indicator-Balance Score Card, Delta Model, Porter’s Diamond (4 Sessions)
Model, Managing Strategic Change
Text Books:
 Thompson, Strickland, Gamble & Jain. (2005). Crafting and Executing Strategy. 14th
Edition. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publication
 Azhar, K. (2008). Business Policy and Strategic Management. New Delhi: Tata McGraw
Hill Publication.
 Hamel, G. & Prahalad, C. K. (2003). Competing for the Future. Harvard Business
School.
Reference Books:
 Johnson, & Scholes. (2006). Exploring Corporate Strategy. Prentice Hall India.
 Hunger and Wheelen, (2004). Strategic Management. New Delhi: Pearson Education.
 Galbraith, J.R. (2006). Strategy Implementation: The Role of Structure and Process. West
Publishing Company.
 Macmillan, H. & Tampoe, M. (2005). Strategic Management. Oxford University Press.
 Pearce II, Robinson Jr., & Mittal. (1999). Strategic Management: Formulation, Implementation
and Control. Tata McGraw Hill.
Learning Outcomes
On successful completion of this course, students will be able to:
 Identify and demonstrate the key components of the strategic management process and
how it can be applied in organizations in order to increase value propositions for all the
organization’s stakeholders.
 Appraise and judge strategic inputs, including the external and internal environment,
strategic mission and strategic intent.
 Create a strategy including synthesizing appropriate elements of business level strategy,

competitive dynamics, corporate level strategy, cooperative strategies and international
strategies.
 Apply selected theories and strategy frameworks to analyze practical strategy related
issues in organizational contexts.
 Effectively communicate the change management strategies in various forums to an array
of audiences with accuracy, clarity, specificity and professionalism.
Course Outline
Supply Chain Management
Course Code: MBAC0030 Year: II Trimester: IV Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:Supply Chain as a management discipline originated after use of logistics in the

military and later branched into the commercial sector as business logistics. Now, the hottest
topic in the commercial sector is supply chain management. This course examines the
historical evolution of management thought to its newest frontier—supply chain management,
reviews the emerging practices that define supply chain management in business applications,
and demonstrates that supply chain management is more than integrated logistics.

 Understand the framework and fundamentals of Logistics & Supply Chain Management
as the foundation for building and sustaining high performance and effectiveness in the
organization.
 Develop an understanding of the significance of Supply Chain Management to achieve

cost effective supply and distribution of goods & services to meet varying customer
demand.
 Demonstrate the ability to analyze and apply critical thinking and learning skills related
to "real life" problems and situations.
Concept of Supply Chain Management- Evolution, Flows in
SCM, Process View of SCM, Drivers of SCM, Macro Process of
Unit -I SCM, Value Chain Analysis, Supply Chain Decision Phases. (5 Sessions)
Supply Chain Performance: Competitive and Supply Chain
Strategies, Achieving Strategic Fit.
Forecasting in Supply Chain: Forecasting in Supply Chain,
Methods of Forecasting, Planning Supply and Demand in a Supply
Chain.
Unit- II Inventory Management: Concept of Inventory, Types of (4 Sessions)
Inventory, Inventory Systems, Inventory Modeling: Deterministic
and Probabilistic Models( Single Period Decision
Model).ABC/VED and other Inventory Control Techniques
Designing Distribution Network: Role of Distribution in Supply
Chain, Factors influencing Distribution Network Design, Design
UNIT- III Options for a Distribution Network, Role of Network Design in (6 Sessions)
Supply Chain,
Risk Management and Network Design
Unit- IV Logistics Management: Role of logistics in SCM, Difference (5 Sessions)
between SCM and Logistics, Logistics Costs, Logistics Models,

Bullwhip Effect, 3PL, 4PL.
Transportation Management: Role of Transportation in SCM,
Transportation Decisions, Push vs. Pull System, Cross Docking.
Purchasing Management: Meaning, Functions of Purchase
Department, Purchasing Policies.
Material Handling System Design and Decision: Warehousing,
Unit- V (6 Sessions)
Store Management
Sourcing Decision: Role of Sourcing in Supply Chain, &
Outsourcing, Vendor Rating & Vendor Management
IT in SCM: Supply Chain Integration, Role of IT in SCM, EDI,
ERP, Internet and Intranet, Bar-coding, RFID
Unit -VI (4 Sessions)
Development in SCM: Supply Chain Restructuring,Demand
Chain Management, Virtual Supply Chain Management.
Text Books:
 Chopra, S., & Meindel, P. (2007). Supply Chain Management –Strategy, Planning and
Operation. 3rd Edition. Pearson/PHI.
Reference Books:
 Levi, S. D. et al. (2003). Second Edition. Designing and Managing the Supply Chain:
Concepts, Strategies and Case Studies. Tata McGraw-Hill.
 Christopher, M. (2000). Second Edition. Logistics & Supply Chain Management:
Strategies for Reducing Cost & Improving Service. Pearson, India.
 Shapiro, J. F. (2001). Modeling the Supply Chain. Duxbury.
 Sople, Logistics Management. Pearson, India.
 Agrawal, D. K. Supply Chain Management-Strategy, Cases & Best Practices. Macmillan.
 Shah, J. Supply Chain Management- Text and Cases. Pearson, India.
Suggested Journals:
 International Journal of Decision Making in Supply Chain & Logistics, Serials
Publications, New Delhi.
 Supply Chain Management: An International Journal, Emerald.
 Journal of Supply Chain Management, Wiley-Blackwell.
 Supply Chain Forum: An International Journal, BEM – ISLI.
Learning Outcomes
 Will be able to understand the basic framework of supply chain working and its
significant in achieving firm’s objectives.
 Will be able to solve real business life issues related to forecasting and inventory
management.
 Will be able to design and develop suitable distribution network.
 Will be able to make decisions about purchasing policies, vendor selection and material
handling issues.
Course Outline
Business to Business and E-Marketing
Course Code: MBAE0001 Year: II Trimester: IV Max. Hours:30
Preamble:B2B marketing throws up special challenges and opportunities to those who serve
market other than for personal consumption. Since the students get more exposed to B2C
situations, the course is intended to help students develop a greater understanding of
institutional markets, where are they , and how do they operate ,strategies to tap these markets
and serve them.
This course will provide the students with an analytical and technical framework to
understand the emerging world of e-Business. e-Business poses both a challenge and an
opportunity for managers. As a matter of competitive necessity, savvy managers must gain an
understanding of the rapidly changing technology and business models. They need to develop
a basic understanding of how electronic business differs from “real” business settings.

 To prepare for a career in “Business to Business Marketing”
 To expose the students to a variety of product-market situations in the Indian context
 To share the concepts and frameworks which may be more relevant in industrial
marketingsituations
 Have a understanding of various data analysis techniques
 Evaluating the opportunities and risk factors involved in conducting e-Business.
 Identifying organizational processes and relationship that may have value added through
the application of an e business strategy
 Assisting in the incorporation of an e-business strategy into the organization’s goals and
objectives.
B2B Market, B2B Versus Consumer Marketing, Understanding

B2B Markets,
B2B Marketing Environment, Strategies for managing the B2B
marketing environment
Nature of Business Buying, Interpersonal dynamics of
UNIT –II organizational buying behavior, Accessing market opportunities, (6 Sessions)
Segmentation, targeting and positioning in B2B marketing
UNIT – III Developing product strategy, Strategic innovation and new (5 Sessions)
product development, Marketing channels participants, Physical

distribution and customer service.
Planning, Organizing and Controlling selling function,
UNIT – IV Managing advertising, sales promotion and publicity (5 Sessions)
strategy,Pricing decision analysis
Introduction to E-Marketing. Mapping fundamental concepts of
Marketing, Strategy and Planning for E-Marketing, Models Of
UNIT – V E-Marketing, Ethical and Legal Issues. (5 Sessions)
Internet of the future: “Customerization”.
Online Advertising: Display Advertising, Pay-Per-Click
UNIT – VI Marketing, Email Marketing, Blogging, Podcasting, RSS, Social (5 Sessions)
and Business Networking, Product Opinion Sites. Forums.
Text Book:
 Ghosh,P.K., Industrial Marketing, Oxford Publication
 Kalakota,Ravi,E-Business, Delhi, India: Pearson Education.
Reference books:
 Havaldar,K. Industrial Marketing, New Delhi, India: Tata McGraw Hill.
 Vitale,P. Robert, Business to Business Marketing,Delhi,India:Thomson
Learning Outcomes
 Analyze the consumer and business markets.
 Explain relationships among marketing and macro-micro environmental factors.
 Recognize marketing information systems and marketing research applications in
industrial market.
 Explain industrial market segmentation, positioning and selecting target markets.
 Explain the industrial marketing mix strategies that are possible for marketing managers.
 explain the importance of e-marketing;
 explain and illustrate the use of search engine marketing, online advertising and online
marketing strategies;explain the role of e-marketing plans as a component of corporate-
level plans;
 conduct secondary research using various sources to identify and synthesis data into
useful management information.
Course Outline
Consumer Behaviour
Course Code: MBAE0002 Year: II Trimester: IV Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:Human behavior is very complex and difficult to predict. Marketers have always
been interested in knowing how consumers make their buying decisions regarding various
products. Who influence them and how. How do they respond to the various marketing stimuli
like advertisements, sales promotional offers, use of celebrities etc. offered by the marketers.
What are the latent motives behind the purchase of product. If these things are known to the
marketers it is possible to influence the consumers in favorable way.
This course will give knowledge about the determinants of consumer behavior which fall under
four main categories- cultural, social, personal and psychological. Insights from the industry
will help to understand the behavior of consumers. Developing marketing mix according to the
consumer behavior is the main motive behind this course.
 To develop an understanding of consumer behavior from a variety of perspectives

(multicultural, interdisciplinary, etc.).
 To develop an understanding of peoples' consumption-related behaviors and to develop
and evaluate marketing strategies intended to influence those behaviors.
 To develop understanding of concepts in consumer behavior.
 To develop ability to apply the concepts to strategic marketing decisions.
 To develop ability to conduct research in consumer behavior.
Consumer Behavior – Disciplines and applications of consumer

UNIT – I behavior, Reasons for studying consumer behavior, Cultural (3 Sessions)
factors- Culture and Sub-culture, Core cultural values
Social factors- Social Class, life style profile and applications,
reference groups- Consumer related reference groups, Celebrity
UNIT –II and other reference groups, Family- Functions and roles, Family (6 Sessions)
Life Cycle
Personal/Psychological factors:- Personality, self concept and life
UNIT – III style, Motivation- Buying motives, learning and memory, (6 Sessions)
Information Processing models
UNIT – IV Attitude formation and change, consumer loyalty towards (5 Sessions)

product, brand and stores, diffusion of innovation process,

opinion leadership.
Consumer Decision Making Process: Problem Recognition and
marketing strategy, Information search- sources and
UNIT – V implications, Evaluation of alternatives- evaluation criteria and (5 Sessions)
decision rules.
Purchasing Process and Outlet Selection, Purchase Behavior ,
Post-purchase Behavior, Models of Consumer Behavior,
UNIT – VI Organizational/institutional Buying Behavior, intermediary (5 Sessions)
decision making
Text Books:
 Schiffman Leon G. and Kanuk Leslie lazar- Consumer Behavoiur (Pearson/ Prentice
Hall, 9th Edition.
Reference Books:
 Hawkins, Best and Coney- Consumer Behaviour (Tata Mc Graw Hill, 9TH Edition).
Loudon, David L. and Della Bitta, Albert J. - Consumer Behavior (Tata Mc Graw Hill,
4TH Edition).
Learning Outcomes
 Learn key concepts and theories of consumer behavior

 Learn psychological theories relevant for understanding consumer behavior
 Learn how various environmental factors influences consumer behavior
 Learn what marketing strategy is and how it influences consumer behavior
 Understand applications of important concepts and theories in developing viable
marketing strategies
 Be able to develop appropriate marketing strategies for different segments of consumers.
Course Outline
Product and Brand Management
Preamble: It is a course designed to give marketing students, an overview and

understanding of Brand management. It discusses various aspects about how a product is
developed as a brand in market. The second half of the course we discuss the role of the
various components & strategies in building a brand.
 This course will attempt to understand various types of products in the product portfolio
of an organization. Developing new products and eliminating exiting products from the
portfolio will be examined. Why a marketer needs brand names and what is the need to
maintain brands equity
Product Management: Product Mix concepts, Product
Classification, Product Management: Product Development,
UNIT – I Product focused organization; Market focused organization, (6 Sessions)
Factors influencing design of the product, Changes affecting
product management.
Product Market Strategies: Product Life Cycle Stages and
corresponding Strategies, Product Evaluation Product
UNIT –II Positioning: Concept, Product Differentiation, Positioning (5 Sessions)
Strategies, Preference Analysis, Benefit Segmentation
Brand Management: Brands Vs Products, Benefits of branding;
UNIT – III Brand attributes, Significance of branding to consumers & firms, (4 Sessions)
Brand Elements
The Brand Equity concept, Brand Equity Models – Brand Asset
Valuation, Aaker Model, BRANDZ, Brand Resonance. Brand
UNIT – IV Building: Brand building blocks and implications, Measuring (6 Sessions)
Brand equity: Brand Value Chain and Brand Tracking, Brand
Equity Management System
Brand Positioning & Values: Brand Knowledge, Identifying
UNIT – V and establishing Brand Positioning, Positioning Guidelines, (4 Sessions)
Brand Values and Brand mantras.
Designing & Sustaining Branding Strategies: Brand hierarchy,
Branding strategy, Brand extension and brand transfer,
UNIT – VI Managing brand over time- Reinforcing Brands, Revitalizing (5 Sessions)
Brands, Co-branding, Celebrity endorsement, Brand Crisis.

Text Books:
 Keller, K. L. (2004). Strategic Brand Management: Delhi: Pearson Education.
 Kotler, P., Keller, K. L., Koshy, A., & Jha, M. (2007). Marketing Management. New
Delhi: Pearson Education
Reference Books:
 Sengupta, S. (2006). Brand Positioning.
 Majumdar, R. (2007). Product Management in India. Delhi: Prentice Hall of India
 Kazmi, S. H. H. & Batra, S. K (2008). Advertising and Sales Promotion. New Delhi:
Excel Books.
Suggested Journals:
 Indian Journal of Marketing- Associated Management Consultants
 Journal of Marketing – American Marketing Association
 Journal of Marketing Management – ICFAI University Press
Learning Outcomes
 Understand key principles of branding
 Explain branding concepts and ideas in their own words
 Understand and conduct the measurement of brand equity and brand performance
 Practically develop a brand, including positioning and communication
 Prepare a professional, logical and coherent report in the form of a brand audit
 Deliver an oral presentation in a professional, engaging manner
 Develop an argument and express themselves clearly in both written and oral
communicationConsider ethical issues
Course Outline
Training and Development
Preamble:The efficiency of an organization depends directly on the capability and talent of

its personnel, and how motivated they are. Capability of a person depends on his ability to
work and the type of training he receives. While his personal capability is evaluated through
proper selection procedure, his training is taken care of by the organization after he has been
employed by the organization. Since training inputs may vary from on-the job experience to
off-the-job training, most of the organizations conduct skill based & specific training for their
employees. In Indian organizations, training and development activities have assumed high
importance in recent years because of their contributions to the achievement of organizational
objectives. The present course is designed to study the concepts and processes of training and
development.
 To enable one to develop the necessary knowledge, skills and confidence for undertaking
training activities.
 To develop an understanding of how to identify and assess training needs, and to develop,
plan, organize, deliver and evaluate the training programmes in an organisational setting.
 To develop an understanding on various training & development solutions to improve

employee performance.
Human Resource Development: concept, need and importance of
HRD, evolution of HRD in India, nature of Training and
Development, training approaches, Need for Training , Types of
UNIT – I Training, Aligning training function to business strategies, (5 Sessions)
training & development as source of competitive advantage,
Forces influencing working and learning.
Training Models, The Systematic Training Cycle, Methods of
Training Needs Assessment, Training Process, Design of
UNIT –II Evaluation Programme, Determining Return on Investment, (6 Sessions)
Types and Methods of Training Evaluation
Employee Development: Approaches to employee development,
UNIT – III the development planning process, company strategies for (4 Sessions)
providing development.
Employee’s career management, a model of career development,

role of employees, managers, and company in career
UNIT – IV management, challenges in career management: dealing with (4 Sessions)
older workers.
Introduction, characteristics, approaches and domains of

learning, Principles of Learning, Loops of learning, Learning
Process in training, Holistic approach to learning.
UNIT – V Key attributes and factors influencing the learning process (6 Sessions)
during training.
Organizational learning: concept and need, practices and values
of learning organization, manager’s role in learning organization.
Special issues in Training & Development program: Train the
trainer, on line learning & computer based training, outsourcing
training, training for developing Creativity, Managing Change,
UNIT – VI Leadership development, Team Playing , Effective (5 Sessions)
Communication, Managing Cultural Diversity, Time
management, Ethical issues for training & Development
Professionals, future trends that will affect training.
Text Book:
 Noe, A. R. (2008). Employee Training & Development. Tata McGraw-Hill Education.
Reference Books:
 Deb, T. (2008). Training & Development- Concepts & Applications. Ane’s Books India
 Krishnaveni, R. (2008). HRD- A researcher’s Perspective, Excel Book Publication.
 Lall, M., & Sharma, S. (2009). Personal Growth and Training and Development. Excel
Book Publication.
Journals:
 International Journal of Training and Development
 International Journal of Training and Development.
 Journal of Counseling and Development
 Corporate Training: Pulse Check, Training
Learning outcomes:
 Students must be able to develop the necessary knowledge, skills and confidence for
undertaking training activities.
 Students must have better understanding of how organizations making training need
assessment and identification, planning and organizing training activities, delivering and
evaluating the training programmes in an organizational setting.
 Students must also develop an understanding on various training & development
solutions to improve employee performance.
 This course will develop better understanding of being HR professional how one should
handle training and development related activities, tasks and responsibilities in the
organizations.
Course Outline
Leadership and Team Building
Course Code: MBAO0002 Year: II Trimester: IV Max. Hours: 30
Preamble: The leadership and team building course is designed to provide the student the
essentials of leadership and team building by developing the student’s ability to apply and
build skills using the leadership concepts studied. This course foundation is built on creating a
leadership vision, articulating this through effective communication, motivational skills, and
team building while helping students to identify and develop their leadership style.

After finishing this course the student will be able to:
 Assess adequately preconditions for leadership and team-building.
 Respect other people’ personality and take the full advantage of differences between
them as well as of their individual abilities and skills for the synergic effect.
 Understand the conditions for formation and development of team co-operation.
 Adopt crucial competences like Problem-solving, creativity, independence and
responsibility-taking.
Leadership: Concept, Introduction, meaning, definition,

Components of Leadership- Leader, Followers and situation,
Leadership myths.
Assessing leadership: Managerial incompetence, Leadership
UNIT – I Talent Management system. (4 Sessions)
Measuring effects of Leadership: Superior’s effectiveness &
performance ratings, subordinate’s rating of satisfaction,
organizational climate, morale, motivation and leadership
effectiveness, and Unit performance indices
Power, Influence and leadership: Sources of power, Power
acquisition for leadership, approaches to understanding power:
Emerson’s power dependence theory, Salancik & Pfieiffer
Strategic contingency Model, Mintzberg’s Genesis of power
theory. Influence tactics.
UNIT –II Leadership and values: Concept, forms of leadership, Moral (4 Sessions)
reasoning, Key work values, Stages of Leadership culture
development, Moral justification.
Organizational Politics: Concept, significance, Political
strategies: increasing power and exercising power.
Leadership Theories: Evolution of leadership theories, Basic
leadership models- Trait theory, Behavioral theories- Ohio State
UNIT – III studies, University of Michigan Studies, Blake and Mouton’s (7 Sessions)
Managerial Grid, Contingency Models- Fiedler’s Contingency
Theory, Hersey and Blanchard’s Situational Leadership theory,

Contemporary theories- Servant leadership, transactional and
transformational leadership.
Leadership and Change: Concept, approaches to organizational

change.
Leadership traits: bright side of personality and dark side of
UNIT – IV personality. (5 Sessions)
Leadership skills: Basic and advanced skills.
Leadership styles: Lewin’s leadership styles. Behavioral,
charismatic, traditional and Situational leadership styles.
Groups – Nature, Group Size, Stages of Group Development,
Group Roles, Group Norms, Group Cohesion.
Group Dynamics: Factors affecting group dynamics,
UNIT – V Approaches- Proximity theory, Homan’s Interaction theory, (6 Sessions)
Balance theory, Exchange theory.
Teams – Types, Ginnett’s Team Effectiveness Leadership
Model, Leadership prescription of the model.
Team Building: Stages in team building, Effective Team
Characteristics, Team building skills.
UNIT – VI Team building interventions: Levels of Team Building (4 Sessions)
interventions, types of interventions.
Building high performance teams: The Rocket Model.
Text Books:
 Hughes, Ginnett, Curphy (2010) - Leadership, Enhancing The Lessons of Experience

(Tata Mc Graw Hill, 5th Ed.)
Reference Books:
 Halder U (2010) - Leadership and Team Building (Oxford university Press, 2nd Ed.)
 Yukl G (2007) - Leadership in Organisations (Pearson Education Ltd., 6th Ed.)
 West Michael (2003) - Effective Team Work (Excel Books, 1st Ed.)
 Sadler Philip (2007)- Leadership (Crest Publishing House).
Learning outcomes:
 Students will have better idea about preconditions for leadership and team-building.
 This course will make them sensible about respecting other people’ personality and
take the full advantage of differences between them as well as of their individual
abilities and skills for the synergic effect.
 Students will be able to understand the conditions for formation and development of
team and development of co-operation.
 Students must adopt crucial competences like Problem-solving, creativity,
independence and responsibility-taking for being an effective leader and for handling
team work adequately.
Course Outline
Performance Management and Competency Mapping
Preamble: Today, organizations operate in very competitive global environment along with
the focus on employing knowledgeable and skilled workers. Universities are challenged with
providing scholars as skilled workers who will meet the expectations of the employers and
other stakeholders. The public want to see evidence of the efficiency and effectiveness.
This present course is to prepare the scholars to have theoretical and hands-on experience of
various tools and techniques used in assessing, managing and mapping the performance and
competencies of individual and organization.
 Performance management and competency mapping is the most critical function and
strong determinant of organizational excellence.
 To develop and appreciation skills essential for designing and instituting effective
performance management and competency management systems.
Introduction: Basic concept of performance and performance
management system, objectives, components, benefits, the
UNIT – I performance management model, approaches to performance (5 Sessions)
management and performance management process.
Performance Appraisal: Need and methods for Performance
UNIT –II Appraisal: Assessment center and its process. (3 Sessions)
Performance Appraisal Techniques: Psychometric tests,
Leaderless group discussions, Management games, Simulation
UNIT – III exercises, Role Plays, Self-appraisal,360 Degree appraisal, (7 Sessions)
BARS, Balance score card, Performance analysis, Performance
review discussion.
Competency: Concept, origin and development, factors
affecting competency, classification of competencies.
UNIT – IV Competency mapping: Concept, process. Methods of (4 Sessions)
Competency Mapping: Critical incident technique, interview
technique and questionnaires.
Developing Competency Models: The Lanchester Model of
UNIT – V Managerial competency, the Transcultural Managerial (4 Sessions)
competencies.
Issues related to development of competency models, resistance

and recommendations.
Application of Competency Mapping: Competency based:
UNIT – VI recruitment, selection, performance linked remuneration system,
(7 Sessions)
Training and development and succession planning.

Text Book:
 Deb Tapomoy (2009). Performance & Reward Management.,Ane Books Pvt. Ltd.
Reference Books:
 Herman Aguinis (2009). Performance Management, Pearson Education.
 T. V. Rao (2002). Appraising & Developing Managerial Performance, Excel Books
 GaneshShermon (2004). Competency Based HRM, , TMH.
 SeemaSanghi(2004). A Handbook of Competency Mapping, Response Books.
 Radha R Sharma (2006). 360 Degree Feedback, Competency Mapping and Assessment
Centers, , TMH.
Learning Outcomes
 Understanding about performance appraisal need and process will be developed.
 Performance management process will be learnt
 Students will single handedly able to prepare performance appraisal form.
 Student will be able to run competency mapping process.
Course Outline
BUSINESS ANALYSIS AND VALUATION
Preamble:Corporate world in recent times has increasingly become more dynamic as

well as volatile. Globalization, enhanced IT capabilities, the all pervasive role of the
media, and growing awareness of investors have rendered the situation quite complex.
This subject attempts to give an insight into valuation approaches and align it along with
transactions, financings, taxation planning and compliance, ownership transition, and
planning and litigation support.

 To enable the students with key issues in financial analysis and business valuation
 An understanding of the importance of various assumptions underlying the valuation models
along with explanation of various business valuation techniques, with their pros and cons
 To develop an understanding of the valuation approaches for various with the help of application
of the concepts in real-life situations, with many examples.
Financial Statement: An Overview

 Balance Sheet
UNIT – I  Profit and Loss Account (4 Sessions)
 Economic versus Accounting Profit
 Statement of Changes in Financial Position
Financial Statement Analysis (I)
 Users of Financial Analysis
UNIT –II  Liquidity, Leverage and Profitability Analysis (5 Sessions)
 Financial Ratios as Predictor of Failure
 DuPont Analysis (Evaluation of a Firm’s Earning Power)
Financial Statement Analysis (II)
 Comparative Statements Analysis
UNIT – III  Trend Analysis (6 Sessions)
 Intra-firm & Inter-firm Analysis
 Analyzing Historical and Forecasting Future Performance
Business Valuation: Basics
 Concept of Value, Principles & Techniques of Valuation

Discounted Cash Flow Valuation: Steps, Assumptions,
Applications, Value Drivers
 Relative Valuation: Steps, Applications, Advantages &
Disadvantages, Valuation Multiples
 Impact of Different Stakeholders in terms of Business
Valuation
 Priorities of Different Stakeholders in terms of Business
Valuation
 Value based Management
Valuation of Assets and Liabilities (I)
 Valuation of Fixed Assets
UNIT – V  Valuation of Inventories (5 Sessions)
 Valuation of Financial Investments and Marketable
Securities
Valuation of Assets and Liabilities (II)
 Valuation of Goodwill, Patents and Copyrights
UNIT – VI  Valuation of Brands (5 Sessions)
 Valuation of Real Estate
 Valuation of Liabilities
Text Books:
 Prasanna Chandra. (2011), Corporate Valuation and Value Creation. (ISBN:
9780071078221). Tata McGraw Hill.
Reference Books:
 Edward Nelling. (2011). Business Valuation Demystified. (ISBN: 9780071702744). Tata
McGraw Hill.
 Robert Reilly, Jr., Robert Schweihs (2004). The Handbook of Business Valuation and
Intellectual Property Analysis. (ISBN: 9780071429672). Tata McGraw Hill.
 Institute of Cost and Works Accountants of India Study Material
(http://students.icwai.org/studies/studies/Bus_val_man.aspx).
Learning outcomes:
 The students will be enable with key issues in financial analysis and business valuation
 Development of an understanding of the importance of various assumptions underlying
the valuation models along with explanation of various business valuation techniques,
with their pros and cons
 Development of an understanding of the valuation approaches for various with the help
of application of the concepts in real-life situations, with many examples.
Course Outline
Investment and Portfolio Management
Preamble:The course is intended to develop familiarity with the theory and empirical
evidence related to investment analysis and portfolio management. An emphasis is placed on
understanding how an investment professional would allocate funds in an hypothetical
portfolio. Major topics include estimation of capital market parameters, trade-off between
risk and return, optimal portfolio selection, equilibrium asset pricing models, and
delegated portfolio management. Emphasis will be put on development of techniques that
should be part of the tool kit of those interested in becoming professional investors and/or
researchers in finance.

 To develop an understanding of the investment alternatives that exists in the financial markets
 To develop ways of analysis of different securities.
 To instill in them the ability to construct and analyze a portfolio of investments.

Introduction:
The Investment Environment, Financial Markets, Investment
Alternatives, Trading Procedure
UNIT – I Investment Approaches, Structure of Securities Market, (5 Sessions)
Participants in Security Market
Regulatory Mechanism: SEBI and its Guidelines; Investor
Protection
Concept and Measurement of Risk & Return.
Market Efficiency, Empirical Evidence on Security Returns.
UNIT –II EMH & its implications for investment decision. (4 Sessions)
Adaptive Markets Hypothesis (AMH) as an Alternative to the
Efficient Market Hypothesis (EMH)
Valuation of Equity:
Nature of equity instruments, Equity Valuation Models.
Approaches to Equity Valuation:
UNIT – III Technical Approach: Overview of Concept & Tools Used (6 Sessions)
Fundamental Approach: Economy, Industry and Company
Analysis
Fixed Income Securities:
UNIT – IV Nature of Bonds, Bond Prices and Yields, Term Structure of (3 Sessions)
Interest Rates, Managing Bond Portfolio, Bond Theorem
Portfolio Theory & Equilibrium in Capital Markets:
Portfolio Return & Risk, Efficient Frontier, Optimal Portfolio,
UNIT – V Risk-less Lending & Borrowing, Optimal Risky Portfolio, (7 Sessions)
Capital Asset Pricing Model, Single-Index and Multifactor
Models, Arbitrage Pricing Theory,

Portfolio Management: Portfolio Management Process,
Approaches to Portfolio Construction, Determinants of
Objectives, Choice of Asset Mix, Formulation of strategy,
UNIT – VI Portfolio Execution, Portfolio Evaluation and Portfolio Revision. (5 Sessions)
Portfolio Management and Performance Evaluation:
Performance Evaluation of Existing Portfolio: Sharpe, Treynor,
Jenson, Fama Measures
Text Books:
 Chandra, P. (2008). Investment Analysis & Portfolio Management. New Delhi: Tata
McGraw-Hill Company Limited.
Reference Books:
 Bodie, Zvi, K., Alex, Marcus, Alan, J. & Pitabas, M. (2008). Investments. Tata McGraw-
Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi.
 Jones, C. P. (2008). Investment Analysis & Management. New York: John Wiley &
Sons.
 Sharpe, W. (2008). Investments. New Delhi: Prentice Hall India.
 Fischer & Jordan (2008). Security Analysis & Portfolio Management. New Delhi:
Pearson Education.
 Ranganatham & Madhumati (2008). Investment Analysis & Portfolio Management. New Delhi:
Pearson Education.
 Kester, Ruback & Tufano (2007). Case problems in Finance. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-
Hill.
 Indian Securities Market Review (2009), www.nseindia.com.
 The Fact Book (2009). www.nseindia.com.
Suggested Journals:
 Journal of Fixed Income
 Review of Derivatives Research
 Case Folio: ICFAI
 Portfolio Organizer, ICFAI
 The Chartered Financial Analyst, ICFAI
Learning Outcomes:
 Acquaintance of Students with contemporary investment avenues and determining their
risk-return propositions
 Understanding of fundamental and technical analysis to identify correct ‘entry’ and ‘exit’
time.
 Assessment of Risks involved in capital market investments and optimizing returns for
the same
 Exposure to real life buzzes of portfolio formation, evaluation and revision.
Course Outline
Merger Acquisition and Corporate Restructuring
evidence related to strategic alliances and various allied finance related issues. Major topics
include theories and motives behind M&A, Financial Engineering, Takeover Defenses,
Valuation of M&A, Pricing of M&A Deals, and Legal framework as to M&A in India.
Emphasis will be put on recent cases of corporate alliances and exploration of synergy
benefits of such deals to understand the relevance of M&A in global business environment.

 To develop an understanding of the motives and modes of M&A in contemporary business
environment.
 To enable the students to explore the valuation of M&A deals from finance perspective
 To instill in them the ability to evaluate the benefits and costs of M&A deals.
Introduction
Business Alliances: Various Forms of Business Alliances,
Strategic Choice of Type of Business Alliance, Basic
Concepts in M&A, Forces driving M&A Activities, Types of
Merger, Motives behind Mergers, Theories of M&A,
Operating, Financial and Managerial Synergy of Mergers,
Merger Process, Legal Procedures, Major Challenges to
success of Mergers, Due Diligence
Corporate Restructuring: Reasons, Broad Areas, Techniques,
Implications
Takeover Defenses
Defensive Operating Performance, Defensive Financial
UNIT –II Techniques, Restructuring and Financial Engineering, Anti- (4 Sessions)
takeover Charter Amendments, Other Board or Management
Methods, Post Acquisition Bid Techniques
Valuation of M&A (I)
UNIT – III Valuation Approaches, Discounted Cash Flow Valuation, (7 Sessions)
Relative Valuation, Valuing Operating & Financial Synergy,
Valuing Corporate Control, Share Exchange Ratio

Valuation of M&A (II)
Pricing of M&A Deals, Estimating Merger Gains and Costs,
Methods of Payment in Merger Transactions, Comparable
Companies or Transactions Approach
Key Financial Management Issues in M&A
Mergers as a Capital Budgeting Decision, Cost of Capital,
UNIT – V (6 Sessions)
Financing the Mergers and Takeovers, Tax Planning for
M&A
M&A Ethical and Legal Framework
Ethical Issues of Merger and Take-over, Legal and
UNIT – VI Regulatory Framework of M & A, Provisions of Company’s (4 Sessions)
Act 1956, Indian Income Tax act 1961, SEBI Takeover Code,
Provisions of Competition Act
TEXT BOOKS:
 B Rajesh Kumar (2010). Mergers & Acquisitions: Text & Cases. McGraw Hill
Education.
 Chandrashekar Krishna Murthy & Vishwanath S.R (2008). Merger Acquisitions &
Corporate Restructuring. Sage Publication.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
 Ashwath Damodaran (2010). Corporate Finance – Theory And Practice. John Wiley &
Sons
 Ravindhar Vadapalli (2007). Mergers Acquisitions and Business Valuation; Excel books,
1/e
 Sudi Sudarsanam (2003). Value Creation from Mergers and Acquisitions. Pearson
Education, 1/e
 Weston, Mitchel And Mulherin (2003). Takeovers, Restructuring And Corporate
Governance. Pearson Education, 4/e
 Ravi M. Kishore (2009). Financial Management. TaxMann Publications, 7th Edition
Learning Outcomes:
 Understanding of Contemporary Business Alliances and their long-term strategic
implications
 Exploration of various possible ways of Restructuring and Financial Engineering in
modern business
 Assessment of mechanism of Merger and Acquisition Deals and valuation of corporate
controls
 Acquaintance of Students with legal framework related to mergers and acquisitions in
India
Course Outline
WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT
Preamble: Corporate world in recent times has increasingly become more dynamic as
well as volatile. Working capital management ensures a company has sufficient cash flow
in order to meet its short-term debt obligations and operating expenses. This course
attempts to enable students to explore various strategies and approaches for working
capital management in real scenario.

 To enable the students with key issues in working capital management
 To develop skills for interpretation business information and application of financial theory in
corporate investment decisions, with special emphasis on working capital management.
 To develop an understanding of the working capital management approaches for various
components with the help of application of the concepts in real-life situations.
Introduction to Working Capital

Conceptual Framework, Operating Environment of Working
Capital, Determination of Working Capital Requirement,
Working Capital Policy - Aggressive & Defensive
Management of Receivables
Receivables: Nature & cost of maintaining receivables, objectives
UNIT –II of receivables management, policies for managing accounts (5 Sessions)
receivables, determination of potential credit policy and its
implications
Management of Cash and Marketable Securities
Cash: Motives for holding cash, objectives of cash management,
Cash Management Models
UNIT – III (6 Sessions)
Cash Management: basic strategies, techniques and processes,
cash management practices in India
Marketable Securities: Concept, types, choice of securities;
management practices
Management of Inventory
Inventory: Need for monitoring & control of inventories,
objectives of inventory management, risks and costs associated
UNIT – IV with inventories (5 Sessions)
Inventory Management: Minimizing cost in inventory,

Techniques of Inventory Management
Working Capital Financing
Need and objectives of financing of working capital, cost-benefit
UNIT – V analysis of alternative strategies for financing working capital, (5 Sessions)
Pattern and sources of Working Capital Financing in India, with
reference to Government policies
Working Capital Management: An Integrated View
Liquidity vs. Profitability Trade-off, Payables Management,
Short-term International Financial Transactions, Integrating
Working Capital and Capital Investment Process
Text Books:
 Pandey, I. M. (2009). Financial Management. 9th Edition. New Delhi: Vikas Publishing
House.
 Bhalla, V. K. (2011). Working Capital Management: Text and Cases. 13th Edition.
Anmol Publication Pvt. Ltd.
Reference Books:
 Kishore, R. M. (2008). Financial Management. 6th Edition. New Delhi: Taxmann
Publication.
 Khan, M. Y., & Jain, P. K. (2009). Financial Management. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-
Hill Publication.
 Rangarajan, K., Rangarajan, K., & Misra, A. (2006). Working Capital Management.
Excel Books India
 Periasamy, P. (2011). Working Capital Management –Theory & Practice. Himalaya
Publishing House.
Learning outcomes:
 The students will be enable with key issues in working capital management
 Development of skills for interpretation business information and application of financial
theory in corporate investment decisions, with special emphasis on working capital
management.
 Development an understanding of the working capital management approaches for
various components with the help of application of the concepts in real-life situations.
Course Outline
Global Business Environment
Preamble: International business has created a network of global links that bind countries,
institutions, and individuals with trade, financial markets, technology, and living standards.
International business: – causes the flow of ideas, services, and capital across the world –
offers consumers new choices – permits the acquisition of a wider variety of products –
facilitates the mobility of labor, capital, and technology – provides challenging employment
opportunities – reallocates resources, makes preferential choices, and shifts activities to a
global level What is International Business? International business consists of transactions
that are devised and carried out across national borders to satisfy the objectives of individuals,
companies, and organizations. International Business Questions • How will an idea, good, or
service fit into the international market? • Should trade or investment be used to enter a
foreign market? • Should supplies be obtained domestically or abroad? • What product
adjustments are necessary to be responsive to local conditions? • What are the threats from
global competitors, and how can these threats be counteracted?
 To explain the social, political and economic context of business.

 To understand cross cultural management and different forms of business organization
 To analyze emerging market multinationals
 To understand liberalization and economic nationalism.
Introduction to International Business Environment: Social,
cultural and technological environment - Understanding the role
of culture – communicating across cultures – cross cultural
UNIT – I negotiations and decision making. Political Environment foreign (5 Sessions)
legal environment, Foreign Corrupt Practices Act; Demographic
Environment – Segmentation of the International Market.
International Economic Environment: International Monetary
System and Foreign Exchange Marketing: The Pre-
UNIT –II Bretton Wood’s period, breakdown of Bretton Wood system and (5 Sessions)
emergence of EMS, EU and EURO.
International Investment: Types and significance of foreign
investments– factors affecting international investment – growth
UNIT – III and dispersion of FDI – cross border mergers and acquisitions – (5 Sessions)
foreign investment in India – The New Policy – EURO/ADR
issues – M & A – Indian companies going global.
Global Integration and Regional groupings: Regional

integration and trade blocks – Types of integration – theory of
customs union, European union – regional groupings –
integration of developing countries – SAARC, SAPTA, Bilateral
UNIT – IV & Multi lateral contracts – Economic institutions – International (5 Sessions)
Monetary Funds (IMF) – World Bank, Asian Development
Bank, UNCTAD, UNIDO, International Trade Centre, WTO,
GATT, GATS, TRIM, TRIPS.
Multi National Corporation : Multi National Corporation :
Definition and Meaning – Importance and dominance of MNCs
– Code of conduct – MNCs in India – Transfer of Technology –
global competitiveness –indicators of competitiveness -
UNIT – V competitive advantage of nations – Technology and Global (5 Sessions)
competitiveness. International Operations – Global supply chain
management – global manufacturing strategies – factors
affecting international HRM and staffing policy – International
negotiations –international asset protection – Protection of IPRs.
Country Risk Analysis: Country Risk Analysis; Classification
UNIT – VI of Risk Involved- Political Risk, Socio-cultural Risk, Economic (5 Sessions)
Risk; Managing risk.
Text Books:
 The International Business Environment by Anant K. Sundaram / J. Stewart Black-
Prentice Hall
 International Business environments and Operations John D Daniel,
Lee H Radebaugh, Daniel P Sulivan- Pearson Education, 10th ed,
2004
 Reference Books:
 International Management Managing Across Borders and Cultures, Fourth Edition by
Helen Deresky – PHI
 Dynamics of successful International Business Negotiations by Robert T. Moran,
William G. Stripp – JAICO
 The International Environment of Business by Gerald M. Meier – Oxford press, 2006.
Learning outcomes
By the end of the course Students will:
 Understand the social, political and economic environment in context of International

business.
 Get a brief idea about cross cultural management and different forms of business
organization.
 Learn the significance of Foreign Investment in the growth of any nation.
 Learn about the various trade blocks for regional integration.
Course Outline
International Trade
Preamble: This course is designed to give students a fundamental understanding of the

growing importance of trade in world economy. Increasing international trade is crucial to the
continuance of globalization. Without international trade, nations would be limited to the
goods and services produced within their own borders. A great increase in the importance of
international trade has brought the various parts of the world into much closer economic
relations. Practically all countries governments seek to regulate foreign trade in the national
interest.

 To explain the importance of international trade.
 To understand the implications of international trade theories in modern era.
 To understand the functioning of balance of payment.
 To conceptualize the idea behind administered protection and economic integration.
 To explain the dimensions of trade promotion measures.
 To create awareness about the various bodies working on the international level for the
promotion of international trade.
INTRODUCTION TO INTERNATIONAL TRADE
International Trade: Concept and Definition, Growing
importance of trade in world economy , differences between
UNIT – I domestic and international trade; Gains from trade; trade (4 Sessions)
equilibrium and determination of terms of trade; Government role
in foreign trade.
TRADE THEORIES AND BALANCE OF PAYMENTS
Classical Trade Theories: Absolute advantage theory,
Comparative advantage theory, Factor Proportion theory
International Trade Theories: Human capital approach theory,
Natural resource theory, Identical preferences theory, Strategic
UNIT –II trade theory, International product life cycle theory (7 Sessions)
Balance of Payment: Meaning, Balance of trade and balance of
payment, structure of balance of payment; equilibrium,
disequilibrium and adjustments; Different approaches to
adjustment.
ADMINISTERED PROTECTION AND INTERNATIONAL
ECONOMIC INTEGRATION
Trade Barriers: Free trade versus protection; tariff classification;
UNIT – III economic effects of tariff; tariff retaliation; export subsidies, (4 Sessions)
countervailing duties and anti-dumping duties, quota and other
non-tariff measures
International economic integration – forms and levels; trade
creating and trade diverting effects of a custom union;
UNIT – IV repercussions of regional economic groupings on the strategy of (4 Sessions)
international marketers.
TRADE PROMOTION MEASURES
Export assistance and promotion measures; EPCG scheme;
Import facilities; Duty exemption schemes; Duty drawback; Tax
UNIT – V concessions; Marketing assistance; Role of export houses, (7 Sessions)
trading houses and state trading organizations; EPZs and SEZs;
import substitution; logic of state trading and canalized trade;
trade fairs and exhibition.
INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIC ORGANISATIONS
World Trade Organisation (WTO); International Monetary Fund
(IMF); International Bank for Reconstruction and Development
UNIT – VI (IBRD);Organisation of Petroleum Exporting Countries (4 Sessions)
(OPEC) ;United Nations Conference on Trade and Development
(UNCTAD) ; North American Free Trade Area (NAFTA);
South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC).
Text Books:
 Hill C.W. (2009), International Business, Tata McGraw Hill (5th Edition) New Delhi.
 Heller H.R(2009), International Trade, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi
Reference Books:
 Keegan J Warren,,Global Marketing Management, Pearson Education (7th Edition), New
DelhiOnkvisit, S & Shaw. J, , International Marketing, Pearson Education (3rd Edition),
New Delhi.
 Aswattapa K, International Business, Tata McGraw Hill (3rd Edition) New Delhi.
 Paul.Justin(2005):International Business, PHI, New Delhi
 Varsheny R.L. and B. Bhattacharya: International Marketing Management, Sultan Chand
& Sons, New Delhi.
 Rawat, M.S.: International Trade and Commerce,Deep & Deep Publications,New Delhi
 Subba Rao, P.: International Business,Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai
 Verma, M.L(2005): International Trade, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi.
Suggested Journals :
 Global Business Review; International Management Institute
 Journal of World Economic Review; Serial Publications,India.
 IUP journal of Intellectual property rights; IUP,India
 Foreign trade review, IIFT
Learning Outcomes
 Understand the importance and significance of international trade in economic

development.
 Develop an idea about the use of international trade theories in modern era.
 Understand the functioning of balance of payment and the idea behind administered
protection and economic integration.
 Be aware about the various bodies working on the international level for the promotion of
international trade.
Course Outline
International Treaties and Conventions
Preamble:International treaties and conventions is sub-part of international business.

Through this subject student will get exposure about international environment, international
treaties and conventions and role of theses treaties in international business prospective.
Through this subject, role of international laws in global environment can also be realized.

 To prepare for a career in “International Business”
 To expose the students about international treaties and conventions.
 Have a understanding of international business environment.
The making of treaties

Entangled treaty and custom ,Methods of expressing consent to be
UNIT – I bound, Unilateral statements, Non-binding agreements, “Object and (4 Sessions)
purpose” of a treaty, International Treaties: Features and Importance
The Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties
The observance, interpretation, and application of treaties
Internal law, Interpretation, Rights and obligations of third states,
Invalidity and violation of treaties
UNIT –II Generally, Error, fraud, corruption and coercion, Ultra vires treaties, (6 Sessions)
Breach ,War between the contracting parties ,Termination by consent,
State succession
“German Court: No Airline Shoot downs,”
General principles, equity, judicial decisions, and highly qualified
publicists
The broad expanse of general principles ,Considerations of equity and
UNIT – III humanity ,Judicial decisions ,International law scholars, Declarations (5 Sessions)
and resolutions of international organizations
Limits of Law, Prerogatives of Power
Conflicts between statutes and treaties

UNIT – IV General principles, The last-in-time doctrine (5 Sessions)
“The Legality of Using Force,”
Constitutional limits on treaties
Federalism and other constitutional prohibitions ,Self-executing and

non-self-executing treaties, Limitations concerning subject matter,
Interpretation and amendment,
“Texas Executes Mexican Despite Objection,”
The constitutional power to terminate treaties
General principles ,The ABM Treaty
Goldwater v. Carter,
UNIT – V Statehood and recognition (5 Sessions)
What is a state, Termination of recognition,Criteria, necessity and
effect of recognition
“The World Courts Non-Opinion,”
International Treaties and Conventions on Intellectual
Property
a)The Paris Convention for the Protection of Industrial Property
UNIT – VI b)The Berne Convention for the Protection of Literary and Artistic (5 Sessions)
Works
Implementation of international law in India: role of judiciary
Text Books
 Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties (VCLT)
 Harris, Cases and Materials on International Law
 Dixon and McCorquodale, Cases and Materials on International Law, Brownlie, Principles
of Public International Law, Ch. XXV
 Shaw, International Law
 Dixon, Textbook on International Law
Reference Books
 Aust, Modern Treaty Law and Practice
 Jennings and Watts, Oppenheim's International Law, Volume 1, Parts 2-4, Ch.14
 Sinclair, The Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties
 Reuter, Introduction to the Law of Treaties
 Rosenne, Developments in the Law of Treaties
 Klabbers, The Concept of Treaty in International Law
 Klabbers and Lefeber, eds., Essays on the Law of Treaties

 Multilateral Treaties Deposited with the Secretary General
Learning Outcomes
 Students will be able to identify the avenues for career opportunities in International
Business.
 Students will be able to understand the dimensions of international treaties and
conventions.
 Students will understand the implications of business environment for international
marketers.
BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE AND DATA MINING

Preamble:Data mining is not an “intelligence” tool or framework. Business Intelligence,

typically drawn from an enterprise data warehouse, is used to analyze and uncover information
about past performance on an aggregate level. Data warehousing and business intelligence
provide a method for users to anticipate future trends from analyzing past patterns in
organizational data. Data mining is more intuitive, allowing for increased insight beyond data
warehousing. An implementation of data mining in an organization will serve as a guide to
uncover inherent trends and tendencies in historical
‘ information, as well as allow for statistical
predictions, groupings and Classification of data

 It advances in data gathering, distribution and analysis have also created a need for an
application of intelligent data analysis techniques to solve business modeling problems.
 Intelligent data analysis provides powerful and effective tools for problem solving in a
variety of business modeling tasks
Module Teaching
Content
No. Hours
Introduction to Data Mining: Motivation for data mining, Data
UNIT I. 5
mining definitions and functionalities, classification of data mining
Sessions
Systems, data mining task primitives
Integration of data mining systems with a database or a data ware
UNIT II. house, Major issues in data mining, Data preprocessing: why?, 6
descriptive data summarization, data cleaning: missing values, Sessions
noisy data.
UNIT III. data integration and transformation, Data reduction: Data cube 4
aggregation, dimensionality, reduction, numerosity reduction Sessions
Mining frequent patterns, Associations and correlations: Market
basket Analysis, frequent items and association rules, frequent 5
UNIT IV
pattern mining, efficient and scalable frequent itemset mining Sessions
methods
The Apriori Algorith for finding frequent Itemsets using candidate
5
UNIT V Generation, Generating Association Rules for frequent itemsets,
Sessions
Frequent itemsets without Candidate generation using FP tree
Data Mining for Business Intelligence Application: Data Mining
5
UNIT VI for applications like data mining for financial data analysis, retail
Sessions
industry, telecommunication industry, biological data analysis etc.
Text Books:
 Jiwaei Han, M. K. (2008). Data Mining Concepts & Techniques. Elsevier.

Reference Books:
 Dunham, M. H. (2008). Introduction to Data Mining. New Delhi: PHI.
Learning Outcomes:
• Understand what business intelligence and data mining are.
• Critique and interpret business intelligence and data mining reports prepared by others.
• Effectively apply data mining techniques in a variety of business applications.
• Understand how to avoid common business intelligence mistakes.
MBAO0007: DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

(MBA)
Prerequisite:A Database Management System (DBMS) is a set of computer programs that

controls the creation, maintenance, and the use of a database. It allows organizations to place
control of database development in the hands of database administrators (DBAs) and other
specialists. A DBMS is a system software package that helps the use of integrated collection of
data records and files known as databases. It allows different user application programs to easily
access the same database. DBMSs may use any of a variety of database models, such as the
network model or relational model.

 To provide knowledge regarding how data is more secure in this as compared to flat file
systems.
 How to manage data in the form of tables. In DBMS you can update/select/delete data or
records.

Credits: 04 TrimesterIV L–T–P: 4–0–0

Module Teaching
Content
No. Hours
Introduction: An overview of database management system,
UNIT I. database system Vs file system, Database system concept and 5
architecture, data model schema and instances, data independence, Sessions
DDL, DML.
Data Modeling using the Entity Relationship Model: ER model
concepts, notation for ER diagram, mapping constraints, keys,
UNIT II. 5
Concepts of Super Key, candidate key, primary key,
Sessions
Generalization, aggregation, reduction of an ER diagrams to
tables.
Relational data Model and Language: Relational data model
UNIT III. 5
concepts, integrity constraints, entity integrity, referential integrity,
Sessions
Keys constraints, Domain constraints, relational algebra.
Introduction on SQL: Characteristics of SQL, advantage of SQL.
SQL data type and literals. Types of SQL commands. SQL
7
UNIT IV operators and their procedure. Tables and views. Queries and sub
Sessions
queries. Aggregate functions. Insert, update and delete operations,
Joins, Unions, Intersection, Minus.
Data Base Design & Normalization: Functional dependencies,
normal forms, first, second, third normal forms, loss less join 4
UNIT V
decompositions, normalization using FD, MVD, and JDs, Sessions
alternative approaches to database design.
Transaction Processing Concept: Transaction system, Testing of

serializability, serializability of schedules, conflict & view 4
UNIT VI
serializable schedule, recoverability, Recovery from transaction Sessions
failures.
Text Books:
 Date C J, “ An Introduction to Database Systems”, Addision Wesley
 Korth, Silbertz, Sudarshan,” Database Concepts”, McGraw Hill
Reference Books:
 Ramkrishnan, Gehrke, “ Database Management System”, McGraw Hill
 Bipin C. Desai, “ An Introduction to Database Systems”, Gagotia Publications
 Majumdar & Bhattacharya, “Database Management System”, TMH
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand and evaluate the role of database management systems in information technology
applications within organizations.
 Recognize and use contemporary logical design methods and tools for databases.
 Derive a physical design for a database from its logical design.
 Implement a database solution to an information technology problem.
 Understand the SQL data definition and SQL query languages.
MBAE0020: INTERNET PROGRAMMING AND VISUAL BASICS

(MBA)
Prerequisite: Common approaches for this class include lecture, written assignments,
presentations, and small group & team exercises. The success of the course will depend upon
student’s understanding of concepts and the way they relate these with real life corporate. A
proper methodology will be followed to make the students aware about Internet programming
and visual basics.

 To describe basic Internet Protocols.
 Explain JAVA and HTML tools for Internet programming.
 To enable students to get an idea about visual basic language

Credits: 04 TrimesterIV L–T–P: 4–0–0
Module Teaching
Content
No. Hours
INTRODUCTION TO WEB: Internet: Internetworking,
UNIT I. Concepts, Internet Protocol Addresses, WWW Pages & Browsing, 5
Security, Internet Applications, Analog & Digital Signals, Sessions
Bandwidth, Network Topology.
More About Web: Packet Transmission, Long Distance
UNIT II. communication, Network Applications. E-mail. URL, Domain 5
Name System, Overview of HTTP,HTTP request response, Sessions
generation of dynamic web pages, cookies.
HTML, An Introduction, Basic HTML, Formatting and Fonts,
UNIT III. Commenting Code, Anchors, Backgrounds, images, Hyperlinks, 5
Lists, Tables, Frames, simple HTML Forms, XHTML. Sessions
Introduction to dynamic HTML.
Introduction to Visual Basic: Event-driven Programming,
Starting and Exiting VB, Understand VB Environment, Project
5
UNIT IV Explorer, Properties
Sessions
Window, Toolbox, Form Layout Window, Property Pages, Getting
Help, Saving Project, Printing Project, Running Applications.
How to code in Visual Basic: Code Window, Naming
Conventions, Variables ( all datatypes ) - Byte, Boolean, Integer,
Long (long integer), Single (singleprecision floating point),
Double (double-precision floating 5
UNIT V
point), Currency (scaled integer), Decimal, Date, Object, String Sessions
(variable- length), String (fixed-length), Variant (with numbers),
Variant (with characters), User- defined (using type), Scope
(Global, Local, Static), Constants
VISUAL BASICS: Functions and control statements String

Functions, Mathematical Functions, Date Functions, Data type
5
UNIT VI Conversion Functions.
Sessions
Control Statement: IF and IIF Statement, Select Case Statement,
Do Statement, For Statement Exit Statement.
Reference Books:
 Deitel, Deitel and Nieto, “Internet and World Wide Web – How to program”, Pearson
Education Publishers, 2000.
 R. Krishnamoorthy & S. Prabhu, “Internet and Java Programming”, New Age
International Publishers, 2004.
 Thomno A. Powell, “The Complete Reference HTML and XHTML”, fourth edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2003.
Learning Outcomes:
 Familiarize students with Internet structure and with basic protocols
 provide knowledge of and proficiency in basic techniques for the development of web-based
applications,
 provide basic knowledge of construction techniques related to client-server applications
 Design, create, build, and debug Visual Basic applications.
 Explore Visual Basic’s Integrated Development Environment (IDE).
 Implement syntax rules in Visual Basic programs.
 Explain variables and data types used in program development.
 Apply arithmetic operations for displaying numeric output.
 Write and apply decision structures for determining different operations.
Course Outline
Finance in Retail Operations

Preamble: Financial retailing gives more exposure of financial and accounting dimensions
apart from retail marketing practices. This knowledge will explore more opportunities apart
from marketing domain to financial domain that are still not explored. This course will create
awareness about the accounting procedures, cost concepts and working capital practices in
Retail Management.
 To prepare for a career in “Finance in Retail Operations”

 To share the concepts and frameworks of Financial Dimensions of Retailing
 Have a understanding of various financial analysis techniques in Retail Operations
Practices.
 Assisting in the incorporation of financial strategy in the retail organization’s goals and
objectives.
Introduction, Merchandising Transactions - Income measurement
for a Merchandising company — Revenue from sales - Cost of
UNIT – I goods sold -Operating expenses - Work sheet for Merchandising
(5 Sessions)
Company – Classified Financial Statements.
Management of Debtors - Objectives - Credit standard norms –
Credit analysis - Determination of credit policy - Management of
UNIT –II cash - Motives –Cash planning and control - preparation of cash
(5 Sessions)
budget in Retail Management
Costing - Cost concepts - Cost classification – CVP analysis -
UNIT – III BEP calculation - Cost control - Cost reduction technique and (5 Sessions)
tools in Retail business
Pricing the merchandise in Retail, Pricing Objective and
Policies; Interaction between Retailer’s pricing Objectives and
UNIT – IV other Decisions; Specific Pricing Strategies; Basic Markup
(5 Sessions)
Formulas; Markdown Management
Management of Working Capital - Meaning - Significance -
UNIT – V Types; Factors Determining working capital needs in retail (5 Sessions)
business - optimum working capital— working capital cycle.
UNIT – VI Financial Merchandise management, Inventory Valuation: The (5 Sessions)
Cost and Retail Methods of Accounting; Merchandise

Forecasting and Budgeting; Unit Control System; Financial
Inventory Control. Financial Implications of Retail Strategy
Reference books:
 Retail Management; Michael Levy, Barton A Weitz, & Ajay Pandit; The McGraw Hill
publications.
 Retail Management, Chetan Bajaj, Rajnish Tuli, & Nidhi V Srivastava; Oxford
University Press.
 Retail Management: A strategic approach, Barry Berman and Joel R. Evans; Prentice-
Hall, Inc.
 Cost. Accounting: Principles and Practice; Manash Dutt; Pearson Education, India
 Financial Management; S.N. Maheswari; Sultan Chand & Co. New Delhi
Learning Outcomes
 At the end, this course may lead students to emerge as confident individuals who,
having sound domain knowledge of various financial aspects of a retail environment,
are ready to explore suitable career options in this field.
 This course may help them in strengthening their conceptual base of various Financial
Dimensions of Retailing.
 This course may help them in developing analytical skills of dealing with financial data
usually generated, stored and mined in Retail Operations Practices for the managerial
reasons.
 This course may enable them to assist their supervisors/managers/bosses in devising,
evaluating and incorporating the financial strategy in the retail organization’s goals and
objectives.
Course Outline
Fundamentals of Retail Management
Course Code: MBAe0070 Year: II Trimester: IV Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:This course will develop knowledge of contemporary retail management issues at

the strategic level and helps the students in analyzing the retailing works, specifically the key
activities and relationships. It also provides an academic underpinning to the above through
theapplication of retailing theory and research.
 Understand effective methods and strategies required for retail management.

 Understand how to utilize resources and techniques used in retail management.
 Understand analysis of store location, merchandising, products and pricing.
Introduction to Retailing – Definition and Concept, Functions of

Retailing, Significance of retail industry, Marketing retail
UNIT – I equations, Marketing concepts applied to retailing, Driving (4 Sessions)
Forces for Retailing.
Understanding the Retail Consumers- The factors influencing
retail shopper, Consumer decision making process, changes in the
UNIT –II Indian consumer, the use of market research as a tool for (5 Sessions)
understanding markets and consumers
Retail Formats and Theories- Theories of retail development,
Concept of retail life cycle, Classification of retail stores.
UNIT – III Choosing a Store Location: types of locations, steps involving in (6 Sessions)
choosing a location, trade areas and their evaluation
Retail Merchandising- The concept of merchandising, the

evolution of merchandising function in retail, Store design and
UNIT – IV Layout, The Store and its Image, The External Store, Internal (5 Sessions)
Store, Display, Visual Merchandising and Atmospherics
Managing Retail Business: HRM in retail, Retail Organization
and Operations Management, Financial Dimensions, Managing
UNIT – V Retail Services. Service Characteristics, Branding, Perceptions (5 Sessions)
of Service Quality.
Retail in India: Evolution and Size of retail in India – Drivers of
retail change in India, Foreign Direct Investment in retail –
UNIT – VI Challenges to retail developments in India. (5 Sessions)
Global retail markets: Challenges and Threats in global retailing.
Text Books:
 Berman B and Evans J.R - Retail Management (Pearson Education, 9th Ed.)
Reference Books:
 Michael Levi M and Weitz BW - Retailing Management (Tata McGraw Hill, 5th Ed.)
 Swapna Pradhan – Retailing Management – Text and Cases, Tata McGraw Hill – 2 nd
edition, 2004
Learning Outcomes
 This course may enable the students to strengthen their domain knowledge of Retail
market operations
 This course may lead them to get familiarized with the real retail world scenario with
specific reference to Indian Retail Market.
 This course may help them understand how the decisions are taken like the day to day
operations and their requirements at operational level, the manpower planning at
tactical level and store locations, size, number etc at strategic level.
Course Outline
Shoppers’ Behavior and Selling Skills
Preamble: Shopper’s behavior course will provide the understanding about different
consumers and their motives for shopping. This study will help in understanding consumers
and their opinion towards retailing in Indian context.
This course will provide the understanding about the concept and techniques of selling. This
will also enlighting the ethical issues in selling to develop customer satisfaction.

 To prepare for a career in “Retail business ”
 To expose the students to with shoppers behaviors in Indian context in retailing
 Outline the functions of selling in different contexts and introduce the concept of ethical
behavior in selling
 Make candidates aware of factors influencing customers’ purchasing decisions
 Have the knowledge of how to ‘sell’ themselves
Introduction to the Study of Shoppers behaviour, dynamics of
shopping -
UNIT – I Demographics of shopping (Men, Women and Kids) factors (4 Sessions)
influencing Shoppers Behaviour - Shoppers Behaviour in Indian
Environment
Shopper Decision Making Process - Need/Problem
Recognition -Information Collection - outlet selection and
UNIT –II Purchase Alternative evaluation in shopping - Shopping Behavior
(6 Sessions)
- Post of Purchase Behavior.
Influence of Culture, Cross Culture & Sub Culture on Shoppers
Behavior, Influences of Social class on Shopper's Behavior,
UNIT – III Element of Perception -Learning-Attitude, Motivation and (5 Sessions)
Motives & Shoppers Behaviour
Shopper Delight - e-shopper Behaviour
Functions of the sales role -
Satisfying the customer ,Closing the sale ,Helping the sales person’s
UNIT – IV organization achieve its objectives ,Retaining customers, Getting (5 Sessions)
referrals and repeat business
Roles of a sales person in a variety of selling situations-

Retail sales ,Field sales ,Telemarketing, telephone sales support
Basic influences on customers’ buying behavior
The buying process, AIDA model,
UNIT – V Internal (personal) influences on buyer behaviour: (5 Sessions)
External influences on buyer behaviour: Marketing by competitors,
Opinion formers and other influencers
Identify sales activities in the sales cycle-
Pre-Sale: Finding potential customers/prospecting, Making
appointments ,Preparation
UNIT – VI Sale: Rapport building/ice-breaking ,Need/problem identification, (5 Sessions)
Presentation, Handling objections, Closing the sale
Post-Sale: Processing the order, Follow-up contact
Ethical selling-Truth, Honesty, Professionalism
Text Book:
 Berman, Evans ,Retail Management, Pearson publication, New Delhi
 Levy, Weitz, Pandit ,Retailing Management, TMH Publication,New Delhi
 Still, Cundifts, Govani ,Sales Management, Pearson Publication,New Delhi
 Sahu & Raut ,Salesmanship & Sales Management, Vikas publication
Reference books:
 Paco Underhill : Why we buy - the ScienceofShopping, SIMON & SCHUSTER
Rockefeller Center, NewYork.
 ICFAI: Retailing Sector, 1CFAI Press, Hyderabad, Andhra Pradesh.
 S.Ramesh Kumar :Conceptual Issues in Consumer Behaviour, Pearson Education,
Delhi, India.
Learning Outcomes
 By instilling the thorough knowledge about the consumer attitude, behavior, their
decision making process and related issues, they will be better equipped to make their
career in “Retail business”.
 The course is supposed to increase the familiarization of students with the shoppers’
behaviors specifically in Indian Retail Environment.
 This course is to mould them not only as a competent but also an ethical salesman.
 For making them competitive salesmen, this course necessitates them to study the
various factors influencing customers’ purchasing decisions.
 In the end, “a ready to enter” prospective candidate is expected to emerge.
Course Outline
Environmental Management for Rural Development

Course Code:MBAE0027 Year: II Trimester:IV Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:This paper introduces the students, coming from disparate backgrounds, to the
basics ofEnvironmental Science. Major themes and issues confronting our present day
environment are introducedin this paper from a scientific perspective.
The paper also deals with the human dimension of development and environment. It aims to
provide adequate insight on management of natural resources by imparting training in tools
andmethodologies of ecological and environmental economics .

 Introduction to the principles and practices of environmental management.
 Its ambit also covers the management of dry land agriculture.
 Paper aims to equip students with basic skills required for dealing with land and water
management projects putting people at the centre stage.
Introduction to Environmental management
Self, Society, and Environment, Preservation vs. Conservation,
UNIT – I Fundamental Causes of Environmental Problems, Opposing (3 Sessions)
Values and Viewpoints on the Environment, Literature and
the Environment
Environmental policy
Introduction to Public Policy, Environmental Policy/Politics,
UNIT –II International Environmental Law, International Environmental (4 Sessions)
Politics.
Land management
Soil, formation processes and factors, physical, chemical and
biological composition and properties of soil, soil classification.
UNIT – III Manures and fertilizers importance of organic matter for soil, (8 Sessions)
manure and compost preparation green manuring, use of
fertilizers, soil testing.
Water Management
Water: Importance source and various uses. Concept, principles
UNIT – IV and practices of people’s friendly watershed management water (5 Sessions)
conservation factors influencing soil erosion and damages.
Forestry
Definition & classification; Definition of Forest – General,
UNIT – V Ecological and Legal classification of forests based on method of (6 Sessions)
regeneration, Age, composition, objects of management and
Legal status. Forest types of India. Extent, Role and importance

of forests to rural/tribal people
Global issues in environmental management
Impact of human activities of developmental and non-eco-
UNIT – VI friendly technologies on environment. Global concern for (4 Sessions)
Environment.
Text Books:
 William Dudley: The Environment: Opposing Viewpoints. Opposing Viewpoints Series.
Greenhaven Press, 2001.
Reference Books:
 Craig. J.R., Vaughan. D.J., Skinner. B.J., 1996, Resources of the Earth: origin, use, and
environmental impact, 2ndEd. Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
 Klee. G.A, 1991, Conservation of natural resources.. Prentice Hall Publ. Co., New Jersey.
Learning Outcomes
 Learn basic principles and practices of environmental management.
 Develop awareness about sustainable development and its role in present business
economies.
 Enhance basic skills required for dealing with land and water management projects
putting people at the centre stage.
Course Outline
Inclusive Growth for Sustainable Development
evidence related to inclusive growth and sustainable development. Major topics include
gender equity, relevance of inclusive growth in economic development, policy framework,
market and non-market mechanism for inclusive growth and role of financial bodies for
inclusive growth.Emphasis will be put on live field cases of success stories of inclusive growth
in India.

 To develop an understanding of relevance of inclusive growth for a developing economy
 To enable the students to explore the various dimensions of sustainable development and
inclusive growth
Inclusive Growth
Meaning, Rationale, Need, Evolution of Inclusive Growth
Inclusiveness, Growth and Gender Equity
Inclusive Growth Focus on Employment
Inclusive Growth and Economic Development
Inclusive Growth and Globalization
Inclusive Growth in India
India’s Growth : Past Performance and Future Prospects
Financial Inclusion: A Step towards Inclusive Growth
UNIT –II Equity and Growth, Inclusion Dynamics of Gender Disparities
(5 Sessions)
in India
SWOT Analysis of Inclusive Growth Initiatives
Policy Framework for Inclusive Growth in India
Expedition for Inclusive Growth : Continuity and Constraints
in Indian Economic Policies
Environment, Development and Inclusive Growth in India
UNIT – III Regulatory and Policy Framework for Inclusive Growth in
(5 Sessions)
India
The way forward: Good and inclusive growth policies tailored
to real-world challenges
Sustainable Development & Inclusive Growth
Role of Inclusive Growth in Sustainable Development
UNIT – IV Natural Capital: Managing resources for Sustainable Growth (5 Sessions)

Physical Capital: The role of Infrastructure in Inclusive
Growth
Inclusive Growth: Influencing Firms, Consumers, and Policy Makers
through Market and Nonmarket Mechanisms
Incentivizing: Providing effective market signals to spur green
UNIT – V growth (5 Sessions)

Informing and nudging: Using information and framing to
influence economic actors
Imposing: Using rules and regulations
Inclusive Growth : The Role of Banks in Emerging Economies
Microfinance: As a vehicle of Financial Inclusion
UNIT – VI Rural Credit: A New Model of Credit Delivery for Inclusive (5 Sessions)
Growth
Financial Innovation for Inclusive Growth
TEXT BOOKS:
 Tandon B. B & Vasudeva P.K. (2010). Inclusive Growth and Sustainable Development: Ideal for
Indian Economy. Neha Publishers & Distributors. ISBN: 8184502621
 World Bank Group (2012). Inclusive Green Growth: The Pathway to Sustainable Development.
World Bank Publications. ISBN: 0821395513
REFERENCE BOOKS:
 Raj Kn Ashoka. (2010). Inclusive Growth. Orient Longman Limited. ISBN: 812503045X.
 Katuri Nageswara Rao. (2009). Inclusive Growth: Global Perspective. ICFAI University Press.
ISBN-10, 8131424715.
 Dholakia J R. (2008). Perspectives on Inclusive Growth in India. ICFAI University Press. ISBN:
8131415279
Learning Outcomes
 Understand the concept and significance of Inclusive growth.
 Acquire skills for removing the constraints of Inclusive Growth which Indian
economy is facing.
 Enhance their knowledge about role of Banks in emerging economies.
Course Outline
Non-Government Organizations Management
Preamble:The course would help students understand various development issues and how
the knowledge related to NGO management would help in resolving these issues. It would also
helpin formulating strategies in various social contexts, in order to empower the
underprivileged sections of the society.
 To introduce the students to NGO Sector and familiarize students with concept of NGOs and civil
society
 To provide sound understanding of the issues faced by NGOs.
 To reflect on the impact and implication of the management and organizational challenges faced
by NGOs.
 To equip students to manage all aspects of NGO Manpower, Finance, Marketing and Project
Management.
Introduction, Evolution, Concept, Function and types of NGOs.
UNIT – I Registration method of NGOs: As a Charitable Trust, Registered (5 Sessions)
Society and Company.
Memorandum Of Association, NGO’s activities in modern
world, Strengths of NGO, Staffing and Funding of NGOs
UNIT –II Economic, Investment and Political Activities of NGOs, (6 Sessions)
Dissolution of NGOs.
Tax laws for NGOs, General Scheme, Corpus donations,
Business income, Disqualification from Exemption, Tax
UNIT – III deduction for Donors, Reporting foreign Contributions, and (4 Sessions)
Customs Duties.
The Indian Rural/Urban Development Strategy, CAPART, NGO
UNIT – IV and Civil societies. Main potential Contributions of NGOs to (5 Sessions)
society, current barriers to NGOs
Marketing of Non-profit organizations:- Concept, Characteristic
of NPO, Marketing procedure of NPO, Models of social
UNIT – V marketing, NGO Accountability & Global Governance, Internal (5 Sessions)
control and management practices
International Agencies supporting NGOs: UN Agencies, donor
Agencies, Asian Development Bank, World Bank. Premier NGO
UNIT – VI of India: PRADHAN, RAMKRISHAN MISSION, DISHA, (5 Sessions)
SEVA MANDIR.
Text Books:
 Ovasdi, J. M. (2009). Management of NGOs. 3rd Edition. New Delhi: Macmillan Publication.
Reference Books:
 Mahajan, S. (2008). NGO Management. 1st Edition. New Delhi: Pearls Books Publication.
 Jordan, L. & Tuijl, P. V. (2007). NGO Accountability Politics, principles and Management. 4th
Edition. Earthscan Publication. London.
Learning Outcomes
 Develop understanding how NGO’s can help in enhancing the economy as well as
their role in present scenario.
 To acquire skills for sound development of NGO and enhance their knowledge base
about all aspects of NGO Manpower, Finance, Marketing and Project Management.
 Understand the challenges faced by NGO’s and design processes for removing them
with their root cause.
Course Outline
Management of Innovation and Research and Development
Preamble:Common approaches for this class include lecture, written assignments, presentations, and small
group & team exercises. The success of the course will depend upon student’s understanding of concepts and
the way they relate these with real life corporate. A proper methodology will be followed to make the students
aware about the emerging Innovation practices and research and development techniques.
 To enable students understand the managerial aspects of innovation.

 To develop skills for framing innovation strategies in organizations.
 To develop understanding about how people and technology integrate in organization.
 To understand the significance of research and development in the current scenario.
Introduction & Managerial aspects of Innovation function

Introduction, Components of Innovation, Types of Innovations,
Models of Innovation Processes, Evolution and characteristics of (5 Sessions)
UNIT – I
Innovation Management, Key drivers of Innovation, Factors
influencing Innovation.
Organizing for Innovation : Introduction, Factors influencing
organizational design, Developing Innovation Strategy,
Characteristics of creative organization, Framework for
innovation and creativity in the organization.
Technological Innovation: Competitive advantages through new
technologies: product development – from scientific breakthrough
to marketable product – Role of Government in Technology
Development. Linkage between technology, development and
competition, Managing Intellectual Property.
Human Aspects in Technology Management: Integration of
People and Technology, Organizational and Psychological
Factors. Social Issues in Technology Management:
Technological Change and Industrial Relations, Technology
Assessment and Environmental Impact Analysis.
Research and Development Management

Introduction, Meaning, Objectives, Significance, Classification
of R&D according to R&D type, process phase, measurement
level, purpose of measurement and measurement perspective.
Technology development approaches, Performance of R&D
management in Indian scenario.
Financial Evaluation of R&D Projects

Introduction, Cost effectiveness of R&D,R&D financial
forecasts, Project selection,Evaluating R&D ventures,
UNIT – VI Conflicting views of managers, Allocation of resources, R&D (5 Sessions)
programme planning and control, Project management, Project
Planning and Control techniques.

Reference Books:
 Managing Technological Innovation – Twiss, B. -. Pitman.
 Strategic Management of Technology & Innovation – Burgelman, R.A., M.A. Madique,
and S.C. Wheelwright -. Irwin.
 Strategic Management of Technological Innovation – Schilling – McGraw-Hill, 2nd ed.
 Managing Technology and Innovation for Competitive Advantage – V K Narayanan -
Pearson Education Asia
 Handbook Of Technology Management – Gaynor – Mcgraw Hill
Learning Outcomes
On successful completion of this course, students will be able to able to demonstrate
understanding, and make Critical assessments of the following:
 Innovations and its related attributes which indirectly can be consider as core
Competency for Competitive Advantage in dynamic era of corporate world .
 Develop and formulate managerial strategies to shape innovative performance
 Utilize tools of innovation management to map and measure innovative activities
 Diagnose different innovation challenges and make recommendations for resolving them
by proper coordination between research , innovation and development in organizational
context.
Course Outline
Technology Policy
Preamble: The future depends on our ability to resist the imposition of technology which is
obsolete or unrelated to our specific requirements and of policies which tie us to systems which
serve the purposes of others rather than our own, and on our success in dealing with vested
interests in our organizations: governmental, economic, social and even intellectual, which
bind us to outmoded systems and institutions. This course will helps to understand the various
issues related to technology policy framing & its successful application in development of
sound technology and making the people’s life better.

This course is designed to enable students to:
 Understand the concept and need of technology policy in developing country like
India.
 Identify the various important issues related to policy formulation, implementation,
evaluation and control.
 Appreciate the role of technology policy in development of best and cost effective
manufacturing methods.
 Identify and evaluate the effectiveness of technology policy.
Introduction to Technology Policy
Understanding of the links between science, innovation and

technological change ,basic science policy, Need of a technology
policy, various components of technology policy, role of
UNIT – I innovation and technology progress in globalised economy,
(5 Sessions)
developing research and development programs in crafting a
sound technology policy, role of policy makers in developing a
technology policy
Technology policy implications in knowledge-based economy
The Essential Features of the New Knowledge-Driven Economy,

UNIT –II Consequences for Innovation & Technology Policy, Policy (5 Sessions)
Priorities for the Knowledge-Driven Economy, Recent Changes
in our understanding of the Innovation Process and the Role of
Knowledge in technology policy making
The technology policy development process
UNIT – III Formulation of technology policy, purpose and scope of (5 Sessions)
formulating a technology policy, precautions taking while
formulating technology policy, stakeholder involvement in

formulating a policy
Policy implementation process
Need of an efficient technology policy implementation, role of

UNIT – IV resources and timelines, Training, communication, proper
(5 Sessions)
documentation in policy implementation, hurdles faced during
implementation process, policy implementation strategies
Technology Policy monitoring, evaluation and review
Identifying policy performance indicators, developing a

UNIT – V monitoring plan, scrutiny of documentation,records and reports,
(5 Sessions)
and action planning and action plans, deciding the responsibility
and authority for monitoring process
New directions in research and technology policy
Modern research in innovation and technological change,

focusing on their implications for technology policy,the changed
policy environment, Conditions for Successful Technology
Policy in Developing Countries, identifying core policy issues,
investment in policy development for developing
competitiveness
Text Books:
 Foray Dominique , 2009, The New Economics of Technology Policy:, Edward

Elgar Publishing.
Reference Books:
 Akhilesh, K.B. (Ed.) 2013, Emerging Dimensions of Technology Management,

Springer-Verlag.
 Meissner, Dirk; Gokhberg, Leonid; Sokolov, Alexander (Eds.) 2013, Science,

technology and Innovation Policy for the Future, Springer-Verlag.
Learning Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to:
 Conceive, design, and execute a technology and policy research project

 Summarize current technology and policy issues related to policy formulation,
implementation, evaluation and control.
 Appreciate the political, social, and institutional context of technological systems
 Formulate, analyze, and evaluate technology and policy options
Course Outline
Business Intelligence
Preamble: This is a course about using data about customers and markets in busine ss
decision-making. This requires gathering, analyzing, and interpreting data about markets and
customers. The course has been designed for managers who will be using market
research, and so is intended for students wanting to go into marketing management,
consulting, and entrepreneurship, real estate, or any job where one must understand,
influence or predict demand .

 To define the decision problem and determine what information is needed
 To acquire trustworthy and relevant data and judge its quality
 To analyze data to make certain classic types of marketing decisions
 Students will learn about the sorts of marketing decision problems in which research
information is most useful, problems of target market selection, new product or
service introduction, customer retention, pricing, etc.
 The focus is on business decisions and the use of data and data analysis to make better
decisions rather than about the details of analysis .
Business Intelligence Introduction, Introduction, Definition,

History and Evolution, Business Intelligence Segments,
Difference between Information and Intelligence, Defining
UNIT – I Business Intelligence Value Chain, Business Intelligence (6 Sessions)
Systems, Factors of Business Intelligence System, Real time
Business Intelligence, Business Intelligence Applications in
Industry
Business Intelligence Essentials, Creating Business Intelligence
Environment, Business Intelligence Landscape, Types of
Business Intelligence, Business Intelligence Platform, Dynamic
UNIT –II roles in Business Intelligence, Roles of Business Intelligence in
(5 Sessions)
Modern Business, Challenges of BI
Architecting the Data, Introduction, Types of Data, Enterprise

Data Model. Enterprise Subject Area Model, Enterprise
UNIT – III Conceptual Model, Enterprise Conceptual Entity Model, (4 Sessions)
Granularity of the Data, Data Reporting and Query Tools, Data
Partitioning. Metadata, Total Data Quality Management (TDQM).
Time Series Modelling, Test for Interdependence, General

Autoregressive Conditional Heteroskedacity (GARCH) Model,
UNIT – IV Autoregressive Moving Average (ARMA), Forecasting Value
(6 Sessions)
and Confidence Limits.
Data Mining, Introduction, Definition of Data Mining, Data
mining parameters, How Data Mining works? Types of
relationships. Architecture of Data Mining, Kinds of Data which
UNIT – V can be mined, Functionalities of Data Mining, Classification on (5 Sessions)
Data Mining system, Various risks in Data Mining, Advantages
and disadvantages of Data Mining, Ethical issues in Data
Mining, Analysis of Ethical issues, Global issues
Data Mining Techniques, Classification and Clustering Analysis,
Decision Tree, Data Mining for Financial Data Analysis, Data
UNIT – VI Mining for the Retail Industry, Data Mining for the
(4 Sessions)
Telecommunication Industry.

Text Books:
 Turban, Efraim, et al. Business intelligence: A managerial approach. Upper Saddle
River, NJ: Pearson Prentice Hall, 2008.
 Shmueli, Galit, Nitin R. Patel, and Peter C. Bruce. Data mining for business
intelligence: concepts, techniques, and applications in Microsoft Office Excel with
XLMiner. John Wiley & Sons, 2008.
 Vercellis, Carlo. Business intelligence: data mining and optimization for decision
making. John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
Learning Outcomes
Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to

 examine the concepts of data management ;
 apply the concepts of BI techniques for clustering, association, and classification;
 understand the operation procedures of BI projects in an organization;
 select appropriate BI tools and methods to manipulate and achieve data;
 apply BI concepts for formulating business strategies and programs to enhance business
intelligence.
Course Outline
Advance Project Management

Preamble: Project consumes resources and project generates revenue. Hence projects are
the back bone of any economy. The range of activities that can be covered under the head
'Project' is so wide that it almost encompasses all economic activities. Project Management
deals with the identification of Project opportunities, formulation of profitable project profiles,
procurement of finance for the project implementation, scheduling of project activities in such
a way to complete the project with minimum cost possible cost/time, monitoring of the project
after its implementation.
Thus Project Management offers an interesting study of the resources utilization and is gaining
importance as a separate field of study, since the future lies in the optimum resource
utilization.

 To develop human resources with the basic competence in and sound understanding of
the theory and practice of Project Management.
 To introduce students to the purpose, principles, problems and challenges, concepts,
techniques and practice of the Project Management and its various facets: impart skills in
Project Planning, execution and control methods, introduce students to Project
Management Software and application
Project Management in Retrospect:-Project Management as a
UNIT – I discipline, Project Management – A vehicle for Value creation, (4 Sessions)
Role of a Project Manager
Linking Strategy to Project Management:- Project Selection
UNIT –II Techniques (Project Feasibility & Detailed Project), Project (4 Sessions)
Financing, Project Cost Management (EVM)
Advanced Concepts, Tools & Techniques: - Project Time
UNIT – III Management Techniques, Project Quality Management, TOC & (7 Sessions)
CCPM
Global Procurement & Managing relationships:- -
Procurement Management (including Global Procurement
UNIT – IV Management), Managing Customers, contractors & sub- (6 Sessions)
contractors
Project Leadership & Managing Human Resource:- The
UNIT – V organizational & managerial control, Building the Project Team, (4 Sessions)
Leading Effective Teams, Motivation – Theories Applications
Risk Management :- Concept of risk & risk management,
UNIT – VI Project risks identification and their impact, probability matrix, (5 Sessions)
analyzing and prioritizing risks, planning of risk management,

risk register, risk responses, monitoring & control
Text Books:
 Chandra, P. (2009). Project Management. New Delhi: New Age International (P) Ltd.
Publishers
 Nagarajan, K. (2010). Project Management. New Delhi: New Age International (P) Ltd.
Publishers
Reference Books:
 Choudhury, S. (2004). Project Management. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publication.
 Cleland, D. & Ireland, L. (2010). Project Management. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill
Publication.
 Heerkens, G. (2010). Project Management. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publication.
 Heerkens, G. (2010). Project Management: 24 Steps to Help You Master Any Project.
New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publication.
 Horine, G. (2009). Absolute Beginner's Guide to Project Management. 2nd Edition. Que
Press
 Newton, R. (2008). Project Management Step by Step: How to Plan and Manage a
Highly Successful Project. 1st Edition. FT Press.
Learning Outcomes
 Understand the concepts, tools and techniques relevant to project management

 Develop an insight into basic project selection and feasibility issues
 Go through the complexities of risk management
 Solve the strategic problems faced by project managers in procurement
 Design strategies for managing human resource in a project
Course Outline
Demand and Business Forecasting
Preamble: This course provides an introduction to the functional area of production and
operations management, with special reference to forecasting. It includes various models for
forecasting models used in real world, which will be discussed with software’s.
Upon successful completion of this course, students would be able to:
 Explain the importance of forecasting.

 Explain the types of forecasting models.
 Solve forecasting problems with software.
Concept, objective and classification of Business forecasting,
Characteristics of Good Forecast, forecasting accuracy,
UNIT – I constrained forecast, Forecast Value Added (FAV) analysis, (7 Sessions)
Design of forecasting system. Concept of Demand forecasting,
Demand Volatility.
Models of Demand Forecasting: Extrapolative, Causal and
UNIT –II Subjective judgmental models. Sources of data for forecasting. (5 Sessions)
Selection of forecasting method: Selection Tree.
Judgmental forecasting Method: Concept and scope. Tools:
UNIT – III Executive opinions Delphi technique, Sales forces polling, (3 Sessions)
Consumer surveys.
Extrapolative forecasting Method: Moving average, Exponential

Smoothing, time series, components extraction. Trend equation
UNIT – IV analysis. ARIMA model and Box-Jenkins approaches of (5 Sessions)
forecasting.
Causal forecasting Method: Multiple regression model for
forecasting, using EXCEL and SPSS soft-wares. Focus
UNIT – V Forecasting technique, Collaborative Planning Forecasting and (6 Sessions)
Replenishment (CPFR) model.
Forecasting errors: Concept of forecasting error, Sources of
UNIT – VI errors, various measurements of forecasting error-RSFE, MFE, (4 Sessions)
MAD, MSE, MAPE, TS.
Text Books:
 Bedi, Kanishka. (2007). Production & Operations Management. Oxford University
Press.
Reference Books:
 Everet, Adam Jr. (2004).Production and Operations Management .Prentice-Hall.
 Ashwathapa, K. & Shridhara, Bhat, K. (2007). Production and Operations Management.
Himalaya Publishing House
 Chunawala & Patel. (2007) Production and Operations Management. Himalaya
Publishing House.
 Mahadevan, B. (2008). Operations Management-Theory and Practice. Pearson Education.
 R, Panneerselvam. (2005). Production and Operations Management. New Delhi: PHI
Case Studies:
 Air Traffic Forecasting by Airbus
 Bedi, Kanishka. (2011). Production & Operations Management (pp 686-692). Oxford
University Press.
Suggested Websites:
 http://www.sciencedirect.com
 http://www.emeraldinsight.com
 http://fisher.osu.edu/jom
 http://www.elsevier.com
 http://www.poms.org.
Learning Outcome
After the successful completion of the course scholars will be able to achieve following learning
outcomes:
 Will be able to understand the basic frame work of forecasting and its significant in achieving
firm’s objectives.
 Will be able to solve real business life issues specifically concern with forecasting of new
and existing products.
 Will be able to simulate real life forecasting related issues with the help of soft-wares (Like
MS-Excel and SPSS).
 Will be able to judge about the quality of forecast and appropriateness of the relevant
forecasting model through the analysis of different forecasting errors.
Course Outline
Operations Strategy
Preamble:This course provides a framework to describe and formulate an operations
strategy , understand and evaluate the key decisions in operations that have a substantial
impact on a firm's competitive position. Thus, the word strategy has two connotations:
formulating an operational strategy (long-term plan) and making strategic (important)
operational decisions.. The course will also examine today's critical strategic issues such as
outsourcing and globalization. Beyond integration of manufacturing decisions with business
strategy, manufacturing and operations strategy emphasizes the concept of operations as a
source of competitive advantage. Using the broad notion of manufacturing, a company's
strength in manufacturing and operations can be the basis of competitive position. A
competitive advantage can accrue through superior product development, cost, quality,
features, etc.
 Develop students' understanding of the strategic impact of operating decisions and the trade-
offs inherent in these choices.
 Introduce students to the basic components of an operating strategy, including architecture,
systems, and process technology.
 Provide analytical tools and conceptual frameworks for both assessing and designing
operating strategies that fit with broader competitive goals of the company.
 Stimulate critical thinking about emerging concepts and ideas in the field of operations
strategy.
OPERATIONS STRATEGY & COMPETITIVENESS:
Operations Management in Modern ERA, operations Strategy-Concept,
UNIT – I The operations strategy matrix, Framework for Operations Strategy in (4 Sessions)
Manufacturing and Services. Operations performance objectives
Measuring Operations Performance,
MANUFACTURING STRATEGY CONCEPTS: Manufacturing
Strategy(lean Manufacturing) , Capacity strategy-overall level of
operations capacity, Capacity change, Supply network strategy-
UNIT –II Traditional market-based supply, Partnership supply, Supply chain (5 Sessions)
instability, Network management-Coordination, matching supply
network strategy to market requirements.
Process’ Technology strategy And Development & Improvement
:Suitable dimensions for characterizing process technology,Evaluating
UNIT – III process technology-Evaluating feasibility,Evaluating (6 Sessions)
acceptability,Evaluating market and resource acceptability,Evaluating
vulnerability. Improvement Strategy– Process Improvement ,

Importance–performance mapping,The sand cone Theory
DEVELOPING OPERATIONS STRATEGY:Deploying
capabilities in the market ,The strategic importance of
product and service development,Product and service
development as a process
Checking markets, Outcome of Market debate –Order Winners,
Order Qualifiers.
SUSTAINABLE ALIGNMENT FOR OPERATIONS
STRATEGY:Sustainable Alignment, Formulation models for
alignment,practical challenges of formulating operations
UNIT – V strategies,‘New’ approaches to operations-Waste elimination, (4 Sessions)
Business process Reengineering
Quality as strategic factor – CAD/CAM/CIM, Delivering Value
to customer.
INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT: operations
implementation,Implementation risk – market and
operations performance becoming out of balance,Forms of
organisation structure
Importance, issues involved – organizational issues operational
approaches to improving delivery system, controlling operations
Text Books:
 Slack and Lewis. (2003). Operations Strategy. Prentice Hall.
 Hill Irwin. (2002) Manufacturing Strategy. McGraw-Hill.
 Miltenburg.(1995). Manufacturing Strategy: How to formulate and implement a winning
plan. Productivity Press.
Reference Books:
 Hayes, Pisano and Upton. (2008)Strategic Operations: competing through capabilities .The
Free Press.
 David Garvin. (2009)Operations Strategy. Prentice Hall.
Learning Outcomes
outcomes:
 Will be able to understand the strategic impact of operating decisions in dynamic

business environment.
 Will be able to understand the basic and applied perspective of key manufacturing
concepts like Lean manufacturing, Capacity planning and so on.
 Will be able to understand the issues and process involved in development and
improvement of process technologies.
 Will be able to learn basic application CAD/CAM in manufacturing.

Corporate Governances and Business Ethics

Course Code : MBAC0032 Year: II Trimester: V Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:Corporate governance is a system ofmaking Management accountable towardsthe
stakeholders for effective managementof the companies. It is also concerned with the morals,
ethics,values, parameters, conduct and behaviourof the company and its management. The
importance of corporate governance lies in its contribution both to business prosperity and to
accountability. Good corporate governance is not just a matter of prescribing particular
corporate structures and complying with a number of hard and fast rules - there is a need for
broad principles, which can be applied to the varying circumstances of individual companies.
Understanding of Business Ethics provides a framework to maintain fair practices, which build
trust in the industry and help in long term growth of a company.

 To provide an overview of current thinking and developments in the field of corporate
governance
 To enable students critically examine the ethical dilemmas and to understand the
importance of ethical principles and governance in globalised economy.
 To develop an understanding of ethics and values in the business community and their
relationship to corporate governance.
Corporate management: Understanding a corporate,

management vs. governance, corporate meetings
Conceptual framework of corporate governance: Concept,
principles & need of Corporate Governance, Benefits of good
Corporate governance.
UNIT – I Theories of Corporate Governance – Agency Theory,
(5 Sessions)
Stewardship Theory, Stakeholder Theory
Models of Corporate governance – the outsider & insider
model, US & UK ,Japanese and Indian model, Mechanism of
Corporate governance
Corporate Governance Committees- Cadbury Committee on
CG1992, Hampel Committee 1995, Confederation of Indian
UNIT –II Industry (CII) 1996, Narayana Murthy Committee Report2003,
(5 Sessions)
Dr. J.J.Irani Report on company Law 2005
Agents & Institutions in Corporate Governance -Role of
UNIT –III Board Of Directors (BOD), Roles, duties & Responsibilities of (5 Sessions)
Auditors, Auditors failures leading to corporate scams- The
Enron Debacle, Corporate governance in Indian banks,

Corporate Reporting, corporate Disclosure & Investors
Protection in India.
Issues & Problems of Corporate Governance in Emerging

Economies:Institutional Framework for effective corporate
governance, Corporate Governance challenges and problems in
UNIT – IV emerging economies, ICRA’s Rating Methodology, Corporate (5 Sessions)
Governance in India with reference to industry specific
examples, Future of corporate Governance in India.
Corporate Social Responsibility-Concept, CSR and corporate

governance, CSR and business ethics, Drivers of CSR,
UNIT – V Environmental aspect of CSR, the Indian scene.
(5 Sessions)
Business Ethics:values and ethics, benchmark of business

ethics, code of ethics for business managers, ethics committee,
benefits from managing business ethics, developing a
comprehensive ethics programme .Indian ethos and management
UNIT – VI learnings from religious scriptures including Ramayan, Bhagwat (5 Sessions)
Geeta and Bible etc.
Application of Ethics in different functional areas:
Marketing, Operation, Finance, Human resource & Information
Technology.
Text Books:
 Fernando, A.C. (2006),Corporate Governance: Principles Policies & Practices, Pearson

Education.
Reference books:
 Mathur,U.C.,(2005),Corporate Governance & Business Ethics, Macmillian.
 Christine,A.Mallin,(2008),Corporate Governance, Oxford.
 Velasquez,(2007 ),Business Ethics: Concept & Cases, Prentice Hall.
 Ferrel, L. and Ferrel, O.C.(2009), Business Ethics: A case perspective, Cengage learning.
Journals :
 The ICFAI University Journal of corporate governance. www.iupindia.org
 “Journal of Human Values” Management centre for Human values, IIM, Calcutta.
Course Outline
Project Management
Course Code: MBAC0033 Year: II Trimester: V Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:Project consumes resources and project generates revenue. Hence projects are
the back bone of any economy. The range of activities that can be covered under the head
'Project' is so wide that it almost encompasses all economic activities. Project Management
deals with the identification of Project opportunities, formulation of profitable project profiles,
procurement of finance for the project implementation, scheduling of project activities in such
a way to complete the project with minimum cost possible cost/time, monitoring of the project
after its implementation.
Thus Project Management offers an interesting study of the resources utilization and is gaining
importance as a separate field of study, since the future lies in the optimum resource
utilization.

 To develop human resources with the basic competence in and sound understanding of
the theory and practice of Project Management.
 To introduce students to the purpose, principles, problems and challenges, concepts,
techniques and practice of the Project Management and its various facets: impart skills in
Project Planning, execution and control methods, introduce students to Project
Management Software and application
Project Management Overview
Project: Concept, Taxonomy, Project Development Cycle
UNIT – I Project Management: Project Management Concept & Phases, (4 Sessions)
Top Deliverables, Tools and Techniques for Project Management,
Role & Responsibility of Project Manager
Project Initiation & Planning
Project Initiation: Project Idea Generation & Screening, Project
Rating Index, Market and Technical Analysis, Project Appraisal,
UNIT –II Cost Estimation, Project Financing
(4 Sessions)
Project Planning: Project Scope Management, Identifying
Project Activities, Work Break Down Structure
Project Analysis:
Situational Analysis and Specification of Objectives
UNIT – III Conduct of Market Survey, Demand Forecasting, Uncertainties in (7 Sessions)
Demand Forecasting, Technical Analysis
Financial Estimates and Projections
Project Selection
Key Considerations in Project Selection
Risk Analysis in Projects: Sources, Measures and Perspectives
on Risk, Decision Tree Analysis, Sensitivity Analysis, Scenario
Analysis, Simulation Analysis, Break-Even Analysis, Hillier
Model,
Social Cost Benefit Analysis: Rationale for SCBA, UNIDO
Approach, Little-Mirrlees Approach
Project Financing
UNIT – V Capital Structure, Sources of Short-term & Long-term Financing (4 Sessions)
Venture Capital, Raising Capital in International Markets
Project Implementation
Project Planning & Control
UNIT – VI Network Techniques for Project Management: CPM, PERT (5 Sessions)
Post Completion Audits & Abandonment Analysis,
Human Aspects of Project Management
Text Books:
 Chandra, P. (2009). Project Management. New Delhi: New Age International (P) Ltd.
Publishers
 Nagarajan, K. (2010). Project Management. New Delhi: New Age International (P) Ltd.
Publishers
Reference Books:
 Choudhury, S. (2004). Project Management. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publication.
 Cleland, D. & Ireland, L. (2010). Project Management. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill
Publication.
 Heerkens, G. (2010). Project Management. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publication.
 Heerkens, G. (2010). Project Management: 24 Steps to Help You Master Any Project.
New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publication.
 Horine, G. (2009). Absolute Beginner's Guide to Project Management. 2nd Edition. Que
Press
 Newton, R. (2008). Project Management Step by Step: How to Plan and Manage a
Highly Successful Project. 1st Edition. FT Press.
Learning Outcomes:
 Acquaintance of Students with contemporary project management tools and exploration
of their application to sharpen their project management skills.
 Understanding of various large projects and attributes of their success and failure.
 Assessment of Risks involved in Modern time projects and developing mitigation
strategies to deal with them.
 Assistance in exploration of financial sources for start-ups.
 Ensuring adherence to Triple Constraints of Time-Cost-Quality in delivering Project
Deliverables.
Course Outline
Marketing Research
Course Code: MBAE0056 Year: II Trimester: V Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:This course addresses the use of research tools as an aid in analysis and making
marketing decisions specifically, how the information used to make marketing decisions is
gathered and analyzed.

 To introduce the student to marketing research.
 To have understanding of the various research designs.
 To be aware of the different sources of marketing data and the process of gathering such
data.
 To prepare the student for conducting marketing research studies.
Introduction: Definition, Objective, Application and Limitation of

Marketing Research, Marketing Information System, Marketing
Research Process. (5 Sessions)
UNIT – I
Research Design: Overview of Research Designs used in
marketing.
Primary and Secondary Data: Advantages & Disadvantages of
Primary Data & Secondary Data, Overview of Secondary Data,
literature review, sources available in India.
Introduction to basic Methods of Collecting Data like
Questionnaire Method and Observation Method, Process and
guidelines for preparation of Questionnaire.
Measurement and Scaling: Types of Scales, Difficulty of
Measurement, Sources of Error, Development of Marketing
UNIT – III Measures. (5 Sessions)
Introduction to selected Attitude Scales, Limitations of Attitude
Measurement.
Sampling: Introduction to Sample and population, Various
Techniques of Sampling, Problems associated with Sampling.
Data Processing and Analysis: Introduction to SPSS, coding and
feeding of data in SPSS.
Research designs- Descriptive, Causal, Exploratory and Data
Analysis through SPSS. Brief overview of multivariate data
UNIT – V analysis techniques and application of common techniques like (5 Sessions)
exploratory factor analysis, correlation and regression through
SPSS.
Report Preparation: Layout of Research Report.
UNIT – VI Introduction to APA format of referencing for Books, Journal (5 Sessions)
papers, Newspaper, Internet Sources and Magazines.
Note:
a. Relevant Case Studies should be discussed and presented in the class.
b. Practical problems should be discussed, analyzed and solved wherever applicable.
c. Students should be exposed to relevant software’s like SPSS.
d. A mini-project after completion of the second unit should be given to students in group of
e. There should be presentation and evaluation of the same in the class.
Text Book:
 Malhotra & Dash. Marketing Research, Pearsons Education, New Delhi.
 William G., Zikmund and Babin Barry J. Essence of Marketing Research, Cengage
Learning.
Reference books:
 Beri, G.C. (2010). Market Research. New Delhi, India: Tata McGraw Hill.
 Cooper, Donald, R., & Schindler, Pamela, S. (2007). Marketing Research: Concept and
Cases. New Delhi, India: Tata McGraw Hill.
 Burns, Alvin, C., & Bush, Ronald, F. (2007). Marketing Research. Delhi, India: Pearson
Education.
Suggested Journals:
 Journal of Marketing Research
 International Journal of Research in Marketing.
Learning Outcomes
 The student should be able to understand the process of marketing research and its
different processes.
 Students have knowledge on various kinds of marketing research questions and research
designs.
 Exhibit an understanding of qualitative and quantitative research methods and their
application to marketing research.
 Demonstrate competency with the SPSS statistical software package and the ability to use
SPSS to enter marketing data, conduct various types of statistical analyses and interpret
their outputs.
Course Outline
Rural Marketing Management

Course Code: MBAO0001 Year: II Trimester: V Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:The objective of the course is to provide conceptual understanding on the Rural
Marketing with special reference to Indian context and develop skills required for planning of
Rural Products. This course give immense opportunities to understand the rural sector
marketing strategies, and marketing of both agricultural and allied sector products in rural
areas.
 To create awareness about the applicability of the concepts, techniques and processes
of marketing in rural context.
 To familiarize with the special problems related to sales in rural markets.
 To help understand the working of rural marketing institutions and agricultural
products.
Introduction to Rural Marketing: Rural Marketing : Definition,

Characteristics and Dimensions of Rural Markets , Image of
Indian Rural Marketing and Approach to Rural Markets of India,
UNIT – I Rural Market Profile, Rural Market in India, Size and Scope (5 Sessions)
,Environment of Rural Markets in India, Constraints in Rural
Marketing and strategy to overcome the constraints.
Rural Consumer Behaviour: Factors affecting Rural Consumer
Behaviour, Socio-cultural, Personal, Psychological Factors,
UNIT –II Buying Decision Process, Buying Behavior Pattern, Buying (3 Sessions)
Evaluation Procedure, Brand Loyalty, Innovation Adoption,
Challenge.
Rural Marketing Strategies: Segmentation, Targeting,
UNIT – III Positioning for rural market, Product strategies, Pricing strategies, (7 Sessions)
Distribution strategies, Promotion strategies.
Rural Market Research: Rural Vs. Urban market research,
Marketing Research Process, Planning the rural research,
UNIT – IV Research tools for rural market, Field procedures and rural (4 Sessions)
realities, Limitations & Challenges in Rural Marketing Research.
Rural Marketing Communication: Importance of Rural
Marketing Communication, Rural Communication Media, Types
UNIT – V of Rural Communication, Challenges of Rural Communication, (4 Sessions)
Ways to Achieve Effective Rural Communication.
Rural Marketing Network: Intermediaries in the Rural
UNIT – VI Distribution Channel, Rural Marketing Institution, Corporate (7 Sessions)
Presence in Rural India, Problems in Agricultural Marketing,

Marketing of Agricultural Input and Non-farm Products, Role of
Government in Rural Marketing
Text Books:
 Pandey, M., and Tewari, D.(2010) The Agribusiness Book: Analysing South Asia.
Lucknow. India: IBDC Publisher.
 Gaikwad, V. R. (1973).’A search for the Rural Consumer’in New Opportunities in Indian
Agriculture. Indian Institute of Management, Ahmedabad: Wheeler Publishing.
 Gopalaswamy, T.S. (2010) Rural Marketing: Enviroment, Problem and Strategies. New
Delhi, India: Vikas Publishing.
 Velayudhan, S.K. (2011). Rural Marketing: Targeting the Non-urban Consumer. New
Delhi, India: Response Books.
Reference Books:
 Philip Kotler: Marketing Management, Analysis, Planning Implementation and Control.
 Barkar, J.W.: Agricultural Marketing, Oxford University Press, New York.
 Jha, S.M. & Singh, L.P.: Marketing Management in Indian Perspective, Himalaya,
Bombay.
 Jonathan Reuvid, Guide to Rural Business (Kogan Page) 2003.
 Brown Ben, Practical Accounting for Farm and Rural Business (Lavoisier) 2003.
Suggested Journals:
 Indian Journal of Marketing- Associated Management Consultants
 Journal of Marketing Management – ICFAI University Press
Learning Outcomes
 The subject helps to create awareness about the applicability of the concepts,
techniques and processes of marketing in rural context.
 Understand the buying behaviour, the consuming pattern, the need and wants of the
rural consumer
 Understand challenges and opportunities that the rural market holds for the
Companies.
Course Outline
Sales and Distribution Management

Preamble:It is a course designed to give marketing students, an overview and understanding
of sales and distribution function in business and other disciplines. It discusses various aspects
of the sales function ranging from various sales organization structures to the role of the sales
manager in improving sales by hiring, training, motivating and leading the sales force. The
second half of the course deals with the distribution function and discusses logistics and
channel management.

 Appreciating the inter-dependence and relationship amongst channels of distribution.
 Understanding how sales and distribution fits into the big picture of marketing and how
these aspects can be combined to achieve organizational goals.
 To analyze decision alternatives and planning and implementation of Sales and marketing
programs
 To analyze selection, motivation of channel members and managing conflict.
Introduction to Sales Management, Difference between sales and

marketing, Styles of selling, Personal Selling and Process of
UNIT – I Personal Selling, Qualities of a Successful Salesman, and Goals (5 Sessions)
in Sales Management.
Analyzing Market Demand and Sales Potential, Preparation of
Sales Budget, Sales Quota and Designing Sales Territories.
Sales Organization, Designing the Structure and Size of Sales
Force, Recruitment and Selection of Sales Force
Motivating, Training and Compensating the Sales Force,
Evaluation and Analysis of sales force.
Distribution Channel: Introduction, importance, types, functions,
and design of Channels.
Overview of Channel Management decisions, Channel conflict
and resolution.
International Channels of Distribution.
Major modes of transportation, Multimodal Transport System-
UNIT – VI Overview, Containerization, Multimodalism in India. (5 Sessions)
Third Party Logistics- Service providers, Risks of Outsourcing
and risk management.

Text Book:
 Jobber, D. & Lancaster, G. (2008). Selling and Sales Management. New Delhi: Pearson
Education.
 Still, Richard R., Cundiff, E. W. & Govoni, N. (2007). Sales Management – Decision,
Strategies and Cases. New Delhi: Pearson Education/Prentice Hall of India.
 Spiro, R., Stanton, W. and Rich, G. (2003). Management of a Sales Force. New Delhi:
McGraw Hill.
Reference Books:
 Kapoor, S. K., & Kansal, P. (2006). Basics of Distribution Management. New Delhi:
Prentice Hall of India.
 Rosenbloom, B. (2008). Marketing Channels: A Management View. New Delhi:
Thomson Learning.
 Dalrymple, D. J., Cron, W. L. & Decarlo, T. (2005). Sales Management. New Delhi:John
Wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd.
Journals:
 Journal of Sales Management and Personal Selling.
 International Journal of Physical Distribution & Logistics Management.
Learning Outcomes
 The subject helps to create awareness about the inter-dependence and relationship
amongst channels of distribution
 Students will familiarize with the concepts, approaches and the practical aspects of
the key decision making variables in sales force and distribution channel
management.
 Understand formalized sales process companies use to manage the decision process
behind a sale.
 Develop conceptual and practical knowledge to manage channels for enhanced
performance.
Course Outline
Industrial Relations and Trade Union
Preamble:Indian Industry is waking up to the challenges thrown in by market economy. To

survive in this highly competitive scenario, managers are being pressurized to improve quality,
to increase productivity , cut down waste and eliminate inefficiency. The collective efforts of
the employer and the employee assumed relevance in this context.
As the expression industrial relation and trade union by itself means relationship that emerges
out of day to day working and association of labor and management. The course aims to fulfill
the need for developing competency to handle IR issues.

 To develop an understanding of the interaction pattern among labor, management and the
state.
 To build awareness of critical issues in industrial relations and impart knowledge of the
contents of the labor laws to the stake holders.
Industrial Relations: Concept, Scope and Objectives,

Significance, Approaches, Principles of good industrial
UNIT – I relations, Role of State, Employers and the Unions in industrial
(5 Sessions)
relation.
Trade Unionism and Industrial Relations: Labor movement,
UNIT –II Concepts ,Trade union movement, Development of trade (5 Sessions)
unionism in India, Functions and Problems of trade unions
The Trade Union Act, 1926
Definition of a trade union, Registration of trade union, rights
UNIT –III and privileges of a registered trade union, Duties and liabilities
(5 Sessions)
of a registered trade union, regulations, penalties.
Industrial Disputes: Meaning, Causes and forms. Industrial

Relations machinery to solve industrial disputes: Works
UNIT – IV Committee, Conciliation-Conciliation Officers--Board of (6 Sessions)
Conciliation – Court of Enquiry, Arbitration, Adjudication-
Labor Court-Industrial Tribunal - National Tribunal.
Worker’s Participation in Management: Evolution of
UNIT – V Concept, Objectives of W.P.M, Forms of Worker’s Participation
(4 Sessions)
in India, Sachar Committee and Varma Committee on Worker’s

Participation. Necessary Conditions for effective working of
WPM,
Industrial relations in Major Industrialize Economies :An

Overview: Comparative study ofIndustrial relations in U.K,
UNIT – VI Industrial relations in European Union, Industrial relations in (5 Sessions)
China, Industrial relations in Australia
Text Books:
 Mamoria, C. B., Gankar, S.V., & Mamoria, S. (2010). 13 th Edition. Dynamics of
Industrial Relations. New Delhi: Himalaya Publishing House..
Reference books:
 Venkata, R. (2010). 13th Edition. Industrial Relations. New Delhi: Oxford University
Press.
 Singh, B.D. (2010). Industrial Relations and Labour Laws. New Delhi: Excel Books.
 Monappa, A. (2006). 1st Edition. Industrial Relations. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Ltd.
 Singh,P.N.,& Kumar,N.(2010).Employee Relations Management. New Delhi: Pearson

Publication
 Srivastava, S. C. (2003). 4th Edition. Industrial Relations and Labour Laws. New Delhi:
Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
Journals :
 Labor Law reporter.
 The Indian Journal of Industrial Relations by Shri Ram Centre (for Industrial relation and
Human Resources), New Delhi Publication.
Learning Outcome:
 Students able to understand Industrial democracy which involves workers making

decisions, sharing responsibility and authority in the workplace, and their relationship
among themselves.
 Understand the multidisciplinary field that studies the employmentrelationship by solving
industrial disputes.
 Get sufficient awareness of International Industrial relations.
 Able to understand the critical issues that arose industrial relations in the context of
labour laws.
Course Outline
Change Management
Course Code: MBAE0006 Year: II Trimester: V Max. Hours:30
Preamble:Change management is a systematic approach to dealing with change, both from the perspective
of an organization and on the individual level. Successful adaptation to change is as crucial within an
organization as it is in the natural world. A proactive approach to dealing with change is at the core of all HR
activities in the contemporary business environment. This course is designed to help students understand the
common approaches to bring about planned changes into the organization and how best implementation can
be done through cultures, structures, leadership and other systems.

 To enable students understand variety of approaches to managing organizational
change.
 To make them acquire knowledge, skills and tools that enable a leader/organization to
facilitate change in a pro-active participative style.
 Identifying the roles of change agent in the process of change within the organization,
examining the barriers to successful implementation, and demonstrate ability to
analyze internal and external threats.
UNDERSTANDING CHANGE
Organizational Change: Introduction, Types of change, Forces of
change: Internal and external, theoretical framework of
organizational change: life cycle theory, teleological theory,
UNIT – I dialectical theory, evolutionary theory. (5 Sessions)
Perspectives on organizational change: Contingency and resource

dependence, population-ecology, institutional, evolutionary.
Strategic change, stakeholder and congruence analysis, PESTLE
UNIT –II analysis (3 Sessions)
Organisation Development- overview, managing the OD process,
Action research, OD interventions – types and expected results.
Recent approaches to OD and change
Models of change: Introduction, Classical and systems paradigm.

Process based change models: lewin’s model of change, planning
UNIT – III model, model of change management process, Integrative model (7 Sessions)
for planned change, Schein’s model of change.
Content Based models: the dissipative equilibrium model, Burke
Litwin model. Integration of change models: Leavitt’s model,
Nadler and Tushman’s model and managing change model.
Punctuated equilibrium model
IMPLEMENTING CHANGE
Resistance to organizational change: Concept, Nature, factors
contributing to resistance, mechanisms underlying resistance, the
UNIT – IV behavioural elements, cognitive and affective processes, (4 Sessions)
suggestions to managing resistance to change.
Role of change agents and leadership: Introduction to change
agents, Role of HRD in managing change, level 5 leadership.
UNIT – V Implementing organizational change: Introduction. Delta (5 Sessions)
technique, Skills for managing change, Strategy for organizing
change.
Organizational culture and change
Culture: Introduction, nature, levels, patterns of work culture.
Formal and informal components of organizational culture,
UNIT – VI functions of organizational culture and change, researches on (6 Sessions)
cultural differences in organizations. Organizational culture
leadership and firm size. Emerging trends in organizational
culture.
END-TERM EXAMINATION
Text Book:
 Change Management, concepts and applications, Radha R. Sharma,TMH
 Managing organizational change, Palmer, Dunford, Akin, Tata Mc-Graw Hill edition
Reference Books:
 Mirza S.Saiyadan, Organisational Behaviour,TMH, 2003, New Delhi.
 Robert A Paton and James McCalman, Change Management: A Guide to Effective
Implementation 2/e.Response Books, New Delhi, 2000.
 Sethi: Orgnisational Transformation Through Business Process Reengineering
Pearson Education.
 Art Horn: Gifts of Leadership: Team Building through Focus and Empathy,
Macmillan India, 1998.
 C.S.Venkataratnam: Negotiated Change -Collective Bargaining, Liberalisation and
Restructuring in India, Response Books, New Delhi, 2003.
Learning Outcome:
 Change is the law of nature where students understood this concept from organization
point of view along with the different approaches to manage change.
 Understand the concept of pro-active participative style that facilitates changes in

dynamic situations.
 Analyze the different roles of changes agent and understand the internal and external
threats.
 Explored the various barriers for successful implementation adapt the external
change.
Course Outline
Managerial Counseling and Stress Management
Preamble:Stress affects just about every person, everyday of their lives. Many things can
cause stress and there are different ways of dealing with stress. The basic purpose of this
course is to assist individuals by providing an overview of the counseling processes and
techniques and create a forum for practicing the basic counseling skills. The course will also
help them to deal with stress and to make their own decision from among the choices available
to them for the purpose of enhancing their personal and professional effectiveness. This course
aims to understand the stress process and its relation to health issues and behavioural
effectiveness in organization.
Objectives of the course:

 It aims to make the students clear about the role of managerial counseling at work place
in improving employee’s relations and their mental & physical health.
 It aims to recognize the relationship of stress with individual performance and also to
study counseling as a therapy for stress free life.
Counseling Concept: Emergence and historical Development of
the Counseling Profession, Factors contributing to the emergence
of counseling, Types of counseling: goals and expectation,
Counseling process, evaluation of counseling and ethical issues. (5 Sessions)
UNIT – I
Counseling and related fields: Psychotherapy, Clinical
Psychology, Hygiology. Modern trends in counseling.
Managerial Counseling at Work Place: Self-Development of

UNIT –II Managers as Counselors, Assertiveness and Interpersonal Skills (4 Sessions)
for Counselors, Counseling Relationship, counseling outcomes.
Development of Counseling Skill: Introduction to the Important
Schools of Counseling, Psychoanalytic Foundations,
UNIT – III Transactional Analysis, Gestalt Therapy, Rational Emotive (6 Sessions)
Therapy, Person-Centred Approach to Counseling, Nonverbal
Clues.
Selection of Counseling Strategies & Interventions in
Organisations: changing behaviour through Counseling,
empathy, Listening and responding, Effective Feedback,
Performance Counseling, Counseling in Problem Situations,
Interpersonal Conflicts, Midlife Blues, Integration and Action
Plan.
UNIT – V Stress: types of stressors, purpose of stressors, long-term effects (5 Sessions)
of stressors: physiological and psychological, specific

applications of stress as it relates to the workplace and different
target groups,Potential Sources of Stress at Work Place,
Relationship between Stress and Job Performance, Stress and
Personality.
Stress Management: Stress Management Model, Stress
UNIT – VI Management Strategies: Individual and Organizational Coping (5 Sessions)
Strategies, Golden Principles to a Stress Free Life.
Text Book:
 T1- Rao, S., & Narayana. (2006). Counseling and Guidance. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-
Hill Publications.
Reference Books:
 R1- Pareekh, U. (2007). Understanding Organization Behaviour. New Delhi: Oxford
Higher Education Publication.
 R2- Singh, K. (2010). Organization Behaviour Text and Cases. New Delhi: Pearson
Publications.
 R3- Decenzo, D. A., & Robbins, S. P. (2004). Personnel / Human Resource
Management. New Delhi: Prentice Hall India.
 R4- Aswathappa, K. (2006). Human Resource Personnel Management. New Delhi: Tata
McGraw Hill.
Journals:
 The IUP Journal of Organization Behaviour
 HRD Review by The Academy of Human Resource Development
Learning Outcome:
 Understand the concept and role of managerial counseling at work place.

 Analyze the importance and various methods to manage the stress at the work place
through which improvement occurs in employee’s relations and their mental &
physical health.
 Able to learn the various ways to improve the relationship by minimize the stress and
ability to improve individual’s performance.
 Studied the various Counseling Strategies & Interventions in Organizations.
 Ability to improve behavior and solve problem of employees through Counseling

sessions.
Course Outline
Financial Derivatives
Preamble:Financial risk management has become one of the most important aspects in
recent times. With the advent of financial derivatives, this has become relatively easy. At the
same time, as financial derivatives work as double edged weapons, a considerable large
number of investors lost their money as they wrongly used them. Hence there is a need to have
a course on financial derivatives to know how best they are used.
 To make the students aware about various financial derivatives available

 To evaluate how these financial derivatives are used to minimize risk
 To learn how to formulate option trading strategies and execute them
 To learn when to use a particular financial derivative
Derivatives:
Definition and Origin of Derivatives
Type of Derivative Contracts: Forwards, Futures, Options &
Swap
UNIT – I Participants in Derivative Market (5 Sessions)
Economic Function of Derivative Market – Risk Management,
Market Efficiency, Price Discovery
Role of Derivatives in Hedging, Speculation & Arbitrage
Option Contracts:
Option Terminology, Comparison between Futures and Options,
Options Payoffs, Application of Payoffs
UNIT –II Exotic Options: (5 Sessions)
Asian, Bermudan, Compound, Binary, Barrier, Look back, Shout,
Chooser
Pricing of Options: Variables affecting Price of Options,
UNIT – III Binomial Model and Black-Scholes Model for Option Pricing (5 Sessions)
Option Greeks: Delta, Gamma, Theta, Vega & Rho
Option Trading Strategies:

Long / Short Call, Long / Short Put, Covered Call / Put, Long /
UNIT – IV Short Strangle, Long / Short Straddle, Collar, Spread, Long / (7 Sessions)
Short Call Butterfly, Long / Short Call Condor
Fundamentals of Futures:
Difference between Forward & Futures, Futures Terminology,
UNIT –V Margins, Daily Mark-to-Market and Final Settlement, Contango (5 Sessions)
and Backwardation
Payoff Matrix from Futures, Hedging with Futures
Swaps: Interest Rate Swaps & Currency Swaps
Credit Derivatives: Credit Risk & Rating, Collateralized Debt
UNIT – VI Obligations (CDO), Credit Default Swaps (CDS) (5 Sessions)
Regulatory Framework of Derivative Markets
Text Books:
 Hull, J.C. (2001). Options, Futures and Other Derivatives. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of
India Limited.
Reference Books:
 Gupta S. L. (2010). Financial Derivatives. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India Limited.
 Arditti, F.D. (1996). Derivatives: A Comprehensive Resource for Options, Futures,
Interest Rate Swaps and Mortgage Securities, Washington, D.C.: Island Press.
 Johnson, P.M. (1999). Derivatives: A Manager's Guide to the World's Most Powerful
Financial Instruments. USA: McGraw-Hill Professional
 Kolb, R.W. & Overdahl, J.A. (2003). Financial Derivatives. New York: Wiley and Sons.
 Miller, M.H. (1997). Merton Miller on Derivatives, New York: Wiley and Sons.
 Somanathan (1998). Derivatives: Markets, Valuation, and Risk Management, New Delhi:
Tata McGraw-Hill
 ISMR 2009, www.nseindia.com
 Fact Book, www.nseindia.com
 Derivatives Market Dealer’s Module, www.nseindia.com
 Capital Market Dealer’s Module, www.nseindia.com
Suggested Journals:
 Review of Finance
 Review of Derivatives Research
Learning Outcomes:
 Awareness of Financial Derivatives and their implications for risk minimization and
trading benefits
 Understanding of mechanism of F&O Segments and it’s implication for retail investors
 Formulation of real time option combinations strategies as a retail trader and assessment
of pay-offs.
 Conditional applications of various financial derivatives in various real-life scenarios.
Course Outline
Microfinance
Preamble:The subject intends to deliver the comprehensive knowledge of Microfinance in
Indian context with a lot of focus on its practical implication. The course intends to provide a
thorough knowledge of the concept of microfinance and how microfinance institutions work,
including the operational aspects of an SHG/ MFI and to build up the financial literacy of the
students aspiring careers in microfinance and SME sector.

 To provide a thorough knowledge of the concept of microfinance and how microfinance
institutions work, including the operational aspects of an SHG/ MFI.
 To build up the financial literacy of the students aspiring careers in microfinance and SME sector.
Perspectives of Microfinance:
Microfinance, Need of Microfinance, Evolution and Character of
Microfinance in India, Microfinance Product Portfolio, Key
UNIT – I Principles of Microfinance (6 Sessions)
Dilemmas in Contemporary Microfinance Functioning
Microfinance as a Tool for Development; India, MDGs and
Microfinance
Microfinance Delivery Methodologies:

Self Help Group Model, Federated Self Help Group Model,
Association Model, Community Banking Model, Grameen Bank
UNIT –II Model, Cooperative / Mutually Aided Cooperative Model,
(5 Sessions)
Rotating Savings and Credit Association (ROSCA), Non
Banking Finance Company (NBFC) Model (BASIX)
Emerging Microfinance Issues:

UNIT – III Legal and Regulatory Framework, Emerging Issues (4 Sessions)
Impact Assessments and Social Assessments of MFIs
SHG-Bank Linkage Programme:
Overview, Evolution, Need, Models of Linkage between Banks

and Self-Help Groups, Impact, Progress, Promotional Initiatives,
Issues in SHG – Bank Linkage Programme, Challenges
Operational aspects of Micro Finance (I)

Accounting and Financial Reporting, Financial Analysis,
UNIT – V Revenue Model, Operating Costs and Efficiency, Products and (6 Sessions)
Services, Risk Management, Credit Bureaus and Credit Scoring
Operational aspects of Micro Finance (II)

Basics of Banking, Priority Sector Norms of Lending,
UNIT – VI Commercial Banks as Micro lenders, The Technological Base: (6 Sessions)
Payment Systems and Banking Software, Building the Market
for Investing in Microfinance

Text Books:
 Indian Institute of Banking and Finance. (2008). Micro-Finance: Perspectives and

Operations; Macmillan India Limited.
 Panda D. K. (2009). Understanding Microfinance.; Wiley India Publication.
Reference Book:
 Rhyne, E. (2009). Edition I. Microfinance for Bankers and Investors: Understanding the
Opportunities and Challenges of the Market at the Bottom of the Pyramid. Tata McGraw
Hill Publication, New Delhi.
Learning Outcomes
 Students completing this course will be able to:
 Understand the concept of microfinance and operational aspects of an SHG/MFI.
 Develop their awareness regarding careers related opportunities associated with

microfinance and SME sector.
Course Outline
Management of Financial Services and Institutions
Preamble:Finance is at the heart of corporate strategy. It provided the tools and language
which inform strategic choice, and prioritise which maximum shareholder value. For emerging
economies, financially educated students can help ensure that the financial sector marks an
effective contribution to real economic growth and poverty reduction.
This course will provide an insight of Indian Banking System, Mutual Fund Industry,
Insurance Industry and other financial institutions and services.

 To give the students an sight into the principles, operational policies and practices of the
prominent Financial Markets and Institutions, their structure and functioning in the
changing economic scenario, and to make critical appraisal of the working of the specific
financial institutions of India.
Management of Commercial Banking Institutions (I):

Banking industry in India and its constituents, RBI – introduction
UNIT – I & major functions, commercial banks in the Emerging (5 Sessions)
Environment of Privatization and Globalization, Internet banking
and mobile banking.
Management of Commercial Banking Institutions (II):
Management of deposits of commercial banks, management of
UNIT –II loans in commercial banks, Asset liability management, (5 Sessions)
Management of NPAs, Interest rate structure
Management of Financial Services:
Mutual Fund – origin and growth of mutual fund, Constituents
UNIT – III and management of Mutual Fund – sponsors, trustees, AMCs and (5 Sessions)
custodian, Type of mutual fund schemes, benefits of mutual fund
as an investment option.
Management of development Financial Institutions:

UNIT – IV Meaning and importance of development financial institutions.
(5 Sessions)
IDBI, ICICI, IFCI, NABARD and SFCs – introduction and
major objectives.
Microfinance: Need, Evolution, Initiatives, Challenges, SHG –

Bank Linkage Programme, Financial Inclusion
Micro Finance Institutions – concept and services.
Merchant Banking and Venture Capital:
Merchant banking – origin and development of merchant
banking in India. Importance of merchant bankers, guidelines of
UNIT – V SEBI towards merchant banking. (6 Sessions)
Venture Capital – concept and importance of venture capital,
venture capital in India, guidelines for venture capital.
Management of NBFCs :
Non Banking Financial Institutions – Activities and Role of
UNIT – VI NBFC; Regulatory Framework of NBFC; Recent Development. (4 Sessions)
Leasing & Hire Purchase – concept of lease & hire purchase,
lease vs. hire purchase, benefits to lesser and lessee.
Text Books:
 Frank J. Fabozzi, F. Modigiliani, Foundation of Financial Markets & Institutions (Third
Edition), Pearson Education.
 Meir Kohn, Financial Institutions & Markets, TATA McGraw Hill.
 M Y Khan. Indian Financial System (Fourth Edition), TATA McGraw Hill.
Reference Books:
 Bharti V Pathak. (2010). Indian Financial System. Pearson Publication
Learning Outcomes
 To understand basics of banking and regulatory framework in India
 Understanding concepts and relevance of NPA and its management
 Evaluating the source of finance SFCs,merchant banking and NBFCS
 Conceptual knowledge regarding investment products and their regulatory

framework.
Tax Planning
Preamble:The subject intends to deliver the comprehensive knowledge of corporate taxation
in Indian context with a lot of focus on its practical implication. The tax system works as an
important mechanism for revenue generation of any economy. On the other hand, for
companies it is essential to explore the various taxation provisions to make the compliance of
norms along with minimizing the tax liability for the company as it forms an integral part of
the cost of deliverables. This course content comprises of corporate taxation system, taxonomy
and procedures in India. A global comparison of the taxation systems across the globe is also
included. Finally, outlook to Central Excise Duty, Customs Duty, Capital Gains Tax, Sales Tax
or Value Added Tax are also included to make it more relevant.
 To provide students a comprehensive overview of the taxation system, procedures,

structures and their implications in terms of tax planning for individuals as well as
corporate
 To develop analytical skills of students to acquaintance of the practical functioning of
taxation in corporate spectrum by extending the maximum practical exposure to students
Introduction to Taxation Basics

Introduction to Basic Tax Concepts, Evolution of Taxation
UNIT – I System, Tax Planning, Tax Avoidance, and Tax Evasion,
(4 Sessions)
Residential Status of Assessee and its impact on Tax Liability
Taxation for Individual (I)
Income from Salary: Allowances, Perquisites, Retirement
UNIT –II Benefits, Income from House Property: Computation of GAV, (7 Sessions)
NAV, Deductions u/s 24, Income from Business or Profession:
Allowed Deductions, Disallowed Expenditures, Depreciation
Taxation for Individual (II)
Income from Capital Gains: Computation of Short Term & Long
UNIT – III Term Capital Gains, Deductions u/s 54 (4 Sessions)
Income from Other Sources: Scope and Deductions
Corporate Taxation: Minimum Alternate Tax, Tax on

UNIT – IV Distributed Profits, Tax Rates (4 Sessions)
Computation of Tax Liability: Deductions from Gross Total

Income, Computation of Tax Liability, Marginal Relief,
Deduction u/s 87
Taxation Procedure:
Permanent Account Number, Clubbing of Income, Set off and
UNIT – V Carry forward of Losses, Advance Payment of Tax (5 Sessions)
Filing of Return, e-filing of return, Assessment, Appeals,
Revision and Rectification, TDS Rates and Rules
An Overview of Goods and Service Tax:
UNIT – VI Introduction, Brief comparison with previous taxation structure, (6 Sessions)
GST: Scope, Functioning & Procedural Norms
Text Books:
 Singhania, V. K. & Singhania, M. (2017). Corporate Tax Planning and Business Tax
Procedures. Taxmann Publication, New Delhi.
 Mehrotra, H. C. (2017). Corporate Tax Planning. Sahitya Bhawan Publication.
Reference Book:
 Bhatia, H. L. (2017). Public Finance. Vikas Publishing House.
Learning Outcomes:
 Comprehensive understanding of Taxation System and Laws and their implications for
Individuals as well as Corporate
 Proper exposure to assessment of Taxable Income and Tax Liability of real-life practical
examples
 Training of filing e-returns to students acquainting them with practical exposure required
to deal with the process
 A deep understanding of corporate tax structure and implications of proposed changes
Course Outline
Global Strategic Management

Preamble:This course is grounded on the fundamental principles of strategic management

and focuses on strategy making in business corporations. Globalization of business has led to
the emergence of global strategic management. A combination of strategic management and
international business will result in strategies for global cooperation. It examines the firm’s
international strategies, the nature and form of international business arrangements, to
determine if they fit within the firm’s overall global strategic position.

 To appreciate the major concerns and strategies of international businesses.
 To understand and reorient the process of strategic management in International context.
 To clarify issues which are of paramount importance for competitiveness in International
business operations
Introduction to Global Strategic Management: benefits and
risks of single country strategy, dimensions of global strategy,
motives and reasons for internationalization of firms, basic
UNIT – I components of global strategy, drivers for global strategic (5 Sessions)
perspectives, competing pressures for Cost Reductions & Local
Responsiveness, value creation in business
Strategic Planning for international business: International
strategic management process; Approaches in formulating and
UNIT –II implementing strategy; developing a strategic planning model for (4 Sessions)
MNCs; Global strategy framework, Sources of competitive
advantage of global companies
Competitive Strategies for International Business: Strategic
roles of subsidiaries – types of subsidiary level strategies, and
UNIT – III roles of corporate parent; Entry Decisions for International (6 Sessions)
Business; Timing of Entry, Mode of entry in Foreign Market-
advantages and disadvantages and, risks vs control,
Strategic Alliances: Motives for strategic global alliances;
strategic value of an alliance; partner analysis; Selection &
UNIT – IV Structure of Strategic Alliance; criteria for successful alliances;, (5 Sessions)
Advantages of Strategic Alliances, Disadvantages of Strategic
Alliances.
UNIT – V International strategies-Implementation: selection of foreign (5 Sessions)
market, implementation through structure culture and leadership,

global strategy structure relationship
International strategies-Control : Control Systems and
Incentives-Type of Control Systems, Incentive Systems for
UNIT – VI control; Role of legal structure in controlling; designing an (5 Sessions)
effective monitoring and control system, ethical management in
MNCs
Text Books:
 Deresky, H., (2007), International Management-Managing across borders and cultures,
PHI New Delhi.
 Lasserre, P., (2007), Global Strategic Management, Palgrave MacMillan, Hampshire
Reference Books:
 Cullen J. B., Multinational Management – A Strategic Approach, South-Western, Ohio.
 Sindhwani T. N., The Global Business Game – A Strategic Perspective , MacMillan,
New Delhi
 Daniels J. D., International Business – Environment and Operations, Pearson
Education, New Delhi.
 Sanyali, R.N., International Management- A Strategic Perspective, PHI, New Delhi
 Clegg, S.R. (2006), Global Management Solutions, Sage Publications
Suggested Journals:
 Global Business Review; International Management Institute
 Journal of World Economic Review; Serial Publications, India.
 IUP journal of Intellectual property rights; IUP, India
 Foreign Trade Review, IIFT
 Harvard Business Review.
Learning Outcomes
 Students will be able to understand various typologies for strategies to be used in
international business.
 Students will be able to gain insights regarding the strategic management process to be
applied at the international level.
 Students will understand the basis for gaining competitive advantage at international
level for organizations.
Course Outline
Export-Import Procedures and Documentation
Preamble:To make the student aware regarding the need, requirement and importance of
the export-import procedure and documentation to make them equip with the need and
requirement of industry.
 The main objectives of this learning unit are to learn about different types of documents
used in international trade (import and export), which documents are usually required
by customs, the requirements for various documents and how to fill in these documents
correctly.
 Analyzing the various classifications and requirements of export documents.
 Learning what functions export documents perform.
 Learning the different types of documents of origin that evidence the origin of goods.
 Analyzing the various commercial and administrative documents.
Export Management- An Overview:
 Introduction to Export management
 Definition of Export, needs and benefits arising from
Export
 Importance of Exports to India
UNIT – I  Selecting of export market and product for export.
(6 Sessions)
 Direction of Exports from India
 Trend in India’s Export.
 Types of exporters
 Reasons for India’s poor share in world trade
Institutional Infrastructure for Export promotion:
 Institutions for financing exports- EXIM Bank. ECGC.
 Commodity Boards. Export Promotion Councils.
 IIFT, Federation of Indian Export Organisation.
UNIT –II  Indian Council of Arbitration. Export Development (4 Sessions)
Authority.
 Agricultural and Processed Foods Export Development
Authority
 SIDBI
Export Procedures
 Introduction , Stages in Export Procedure
Excise clearance procedure

Role of custom House Agents
Shipping and custom formalities
Marine Insurance
Negotiation of Export Documents
Realization of export proceeds
ISO 9000 certification
Export Documentation :
 Defining Export Documentation :- Main Commercial
Documents and Additional Commercial Documents (5
UNIT – IV
 Means of export (sea, air, post, courier, ICD, etc) and Sessions)
documentation required.
 Instruments of payment and various Incoterms
Export Finance :
 Pre-shipment Finance and Post-shipment Finance
 Special Financial Facilities
 Export Pricing, Mechanism of Price Fixation
Import Management in a Developing Economy:
 Import procurement, methods, and Import financing
UNIT – V  Purchase contract, Import Canalization, (7 Sessions)
 Import under counter-trade,
 Monitoring and follow up of import contracts.
Text Books:-
 Export Management (2010) by Khurana P.K., Galgotia Publications, New Delhi
Reference Books:-
 Export Management (2010) By T.A.S. Balagopal, Himalaya Publications, New Delhi
 International Trade and Export Management (2010) By Dr.Francis Cherunilam,
Himalaya Publication, New Delhi.
 Export Import Procedures & Documentation (2011) By By Jain Khushpat S.
 Import/Export: How to Get Started in International Trade (2010) by Nelson C, Tata Mc
Grawhill, New Delhi.
 EXPORT IMPORT MANAGEMENT(2010) By Paul Justin and Aserkar Rajiv, Oxford
Press, New Delhi.
Learning Outcomes
 Be aware regarding the need, requirement and importance of the export-import procedure
and documentation to make them equip with the need and requirement of industry.

 Have a brief idea about the different types of documents used in international trade
(import and export), which documents are usually required by customs, the requirements
for various documents and how to fill in these documents correctly.
 Get an idea about the institutional infrastructure for export promotion in our country.
 Learn the importance of import management for a developing nation like India.
Course Outline
International Logistics
Preamble:The Primary objective of the course is the presentation of international logistics
and its meaning for the transport. Students will learn about international supply chain
management, international logistics centers and the management of material.

 New approaches for coordinating and working with suppliers and strategic partners in the
company’s global supply chain
 Aligning the incentives of the different players throughout the supply chain to develop
successful collaboration relationships
 The scope of the procurement function: purchasing, supplier selection, evaluation and
management, and supply chain coordination
 The role of logistics operators and 3PLs in the business and supply chain management:
justification of outsourcing projects in logistics, advantages and risks involved, required
steps for a successful transition to a logistics operator
 Financial evaluation and supply chain metrics for management of the overall supply
chain.
Introduction to International Logistics:
 Concepts, objectives and scope of logistics
 Elements and importance of logistics
 Relevance of logistics in international marketing
 Concept of International supply chain and logistics
 Forms of Logistics management
 Importance of Customer service in logistics
 Types of Logistics :- Land, Sea and Air
Shipping Transportation structure and world sea trade
scenario:
 Types of ships, shipping routes and Ship-liner and tramp
 Organization of shipping company
UNIT –II  Terminologies used in shipping industry. (6 Sessions)
 Classification & characteristics of shipping company
 Volume and value of trade
 Flags of convenience
 Conference systems
Freight structure and practices :
 Terminologies used in different freight structure
 Factors involved in ratemaking
 Basis of freight rate structure
 Various cost concepts involved in freight rates
 Contracts of Affreightments
 Types of sea freight rates: Linear and Tramp

Indian Shipping :
 Shipping agents, freight forwarders and stevedore
 Introduction, ports in India & Development in Indian
UNIT- IV
Shipping.
(4 Sessions)
 Port Infrastructure development (PTI)
 Shipping Association
Containerization :
 Introduction to containerization
 Concepts and types of container
 Inland Container Depot (ICD)
 Indian container scenario
 Problems and prospects of containerization
International Air Transport and Information and
Technology role in International Logistics:
 Concept and importance
 Air cargo and tariff structure
UNIT – VI  International Air Transport Association (IATA). (7 Sessions)
 Information and communication
 Principles of Logistics Information
 Logistics Information System Architecture
 Logistics Information System Flow.
Text Books:
 International Supply Chain Management (2010) by David A. Pierre, Cengage Learning,
New Delhi.
Reference Books:
 International Logistics: Global Supply Chain Management (2010) By Long, Douglas,
Springer Publications, USA.
 International Logistics Management (2010) By Misra Anuranjan and Tayal Anusha, AB
Publications, New Delhi.
 A Logistics Approach to Supply Chain Managemen (1st Ed.) 2010, By Coyle J. John,
Langley John C., Gibson J. Brian, Novack A. Robert, Bardi J. Edward, Cengage
Publications, New Delhi
Suggested Journals :
 Taylor And Francis :-International Journal of Logistics Research and Applications
 Emerald :- International Journal of Logistics Management
Learning Outcomes
 Assess the role logistics plays in global business.

 Recognize the importance of culturally appropriate behaviour when dealing with
international customers, projects and transport
 Compare and contrast the economic and service characteristics of international
transportation providers
 Evaluate the impact that key trade agreements, such as NAFTA and the WTO have on
Canada Customs.
 Research regulatory requirements and current legislation that affects the movement of
products or services across international borders.
MBAE0068: E-BUSINESS
(MBA)
Prerequisite:This course will provide the students with an analytical and technical framework to
understand the emerging world of e-Business. E-Business poses both a challenge and an
opportunity for managers. As a matter of competitive necessity, savvy managers must gain an
understanding of the rapidly changing technology and business models. They need to develop a
basic understanding of how electronic business differs from “real” business setting. They also
need to acquire a hands-on knowledge of the underlying technological infrastructure in order to
have a clear idea of the business and organizations possibilities inherent in these developments.
This course will attempt to fill this need.

 Evaluating the opportunities and risk factors involved in conducting e-Business.
 Identify organizations processes and relationship that may have value added through the
application of an e-Business strategy.
 Assisting in the incorporate of an e-business strategy into the organization’s goal and
objectives.
 Understanding the current state of e-business and the possible advantages and
disadvantages of an e-business strategy.
 Aiding in the development of managerial e-business tactics and objectives for the
organization’s supply chain management functions.
 Exploring and explaining the legal and international implications of conducting e-
Business.
 Analyzing and evaluating how the internet, e-business technologies, and e-business
concepts can assist an organize its goal and objectives.

Credits: 04 TrimesterV L–T–P: 4–0–0
Module Teaching
Content
No. Hours
Introduction, Background and Current Status, E-Business 6
UNIT I.
Architecture Sessions
Enabling Technologies, E-Business Infrastructure, e-Business 4
UNIT II.
Design, Capacity Planning, Performance Modeling Sessions
5
UNIT III. e-Business Models, e-Marketing, e-CRM,
Sessions
5
UNIT IV e-Business Security / Payment Services, e-SCM, e-Procurement.
Sessions
5
UNIT V Knowledge Management, ERP, e-BusinessBackbone
Sessions
e-Business Strategy into action, Challenges, e-Transition and
5
UNIT VI Summary, Business Plan Presentation and Demonstration
Sessions
“Materialising e-Business: From idea to Realisation”.
Text Books
 Dave Chaffey (2007). E-Business and E-Commerce Management Strategy,
Implementation and Practice . 4th Edition, Prentice Hall.
 Daniel A. Menascé, Virgilio A. F. Almeida (2000). "Scaling for E-business:
Technologies, Models, Performance, and Capacity Planning" , Prentice Hall.
 Reference Books:
 Ravi Kalakota (2004) , "E-Business 2.0: Roadmap For Success" , 2nd Edition, Pearson
Education India.
 Jawedkar, S. (2007). Management Information System. 3rd Edition. Tata McGraw-Hill
Publication.
Learning Outcomes:
 Integrate the waterfall model in the development of e-commerce applications.

 Integrate user-centered design guidelines in developing user-friendly websites.
 Evaluate the bullwhip effect in a supply chain, analyze the causes, and recommend
possible solutions.
 Analyze different types of portal technologies and deployment methodologies
commonly used in the industry.
 Analyze real business cases regarding their e-business strategies and transformation
processes and choices.
 Integrate theoretical frameworks with business strategies.
MBAE0021: STRATEGIC INFORMATION SYSTEM PLANNING

(MBA)
Prerequisite:Strategic information systems planning (SISP) has been defined as the process of
identifying a portfolio of computer-based applications that will assist an organization in
executing its business plans and realizing its business goals. As a strategic plan, it includes
overarching vision, mission, and values statements for the department. SISP is an important
activity for helping information executives and top management identify strategic applications
and align IT with business needs.

 To promote new and improved ways to solve technology problems without sacrificing
other guiding principles.
 Helps students to implement new information services that represent value to customers.
 Helps to incorporate metrics to measure performance and verify effectiveness of
information resources..

Module Teaching
Content
No. Hours
Key Issues in Information Systems Management and the role of
5
UNIT I CIO, Analytical Framework for strategic IT initiatives, Value
Sessions
chain analysis
Sustaining competitive advantage by use of IT, Creativity, 4
UNIT II
Learning organizations, Managing in the Market Space Sessions
National Information Infrastructure and IT Policy at the national
6
UNIT II. level, planning for strategic IT resources, IS governance, assessing
Sessions
ICT investments, development of information systems.
Role of Information Technology in business transformation
5
UNIT IV information partnerships. Managing the IT function, Outsourcing
Sessions
IT function and Off-shoring.
Knowledge Management Strategies, Evaluation and Risk
4
UNIT V Management for Information Systems, Evaluating Business
Sessions
Strategies and the use of Information Systems.
Enhancing decision making, The future of systems development,
6
UNIT VI Security and ethics: Protecting against intrusion and ensuring
Sessions
system availability: Privacy issues; Legal and ethical issues.
Text Books
 McNurlin, Barbara and Sprague, Ralph. (1998). Information Systems Management in Practice.
Upper Saddle River, NJ. Prentice Hall.
 Strategic Information Management - Challenges and Strategies in Managing Information
System.
 Reference Books:
 Strategic Information Systems - Competition through Information Technologies.
 Strategic Planning for Information Systems (Wiley Series in Information Systems).
 Strategic Management and Information Systems: An Integrated Approach by Wendy Robson.
Learning Outcomes:
On completion the participant will understand:
 The concepts of information systems strategy and how to it is aligned with business strategy.
 The processes and key issues involved in the evaluation, planning and implementation of
strategic information systems across an organization’s various functions
 The role of future trends in technology and their impact in defining/redefining strategies in an
organization to attain and maintain competitive advantage.
 How to measure the return on investment in information systems.
MBAE0022: SYSTEM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

(MBA)
Prerequisite:This course provides an overview of various systems concepts, such as

characteristics and elements, in an organization. It also describes the various phases involved in
developing a new system and the role of the system analyst. Its discusses various steps and tools
used for gathering information that will be required for preliminary investigation. The course
identifies the types of feasibility analysis and the method to analyze the cost and benefit of a
project. Further, the course introduces the concept of system design and the documentation tool
required for the structured design of a system. Finally, the course discusses the need and methods
for system testing, quality assurance, project maintenance, and software maintenance.

 To promote the conceptual and skill based learning needed to understand the process of
analysing and designing information systems.
 Understand the impact of information systems solutions in an organisation, both in terms
of the business and resources required to create them.

Module Teaching
Content
No. Hours
Systems Concept; Characteristics of a System; Elements of
UNIT I. System; Types of Systems; Decision Support, System; System 6
Development Life Cycle, Waterfall model, Iterative model, Sessions
Prototype model, Spiral model.
UNIT II. Phases of System development: Investigation, Analysis, Design, 4
Implementation, Post Implementation Review and Maintenance Sessions
Systems Planning and Investigation: Basis for Planning in Systems
UNIT III. Analysis - Dimensions of Planning, Initial Investigation, Needs 5
Identification, Determining the User's Information Requirements, Sessions
Feasibility Study, Feasibility Considerations
Steps in Feasibility Analysis - Feasibility Report, Tools of
5
UNIT IV Structured Analysis : Data Flow Diagram (DFD), Entity
Sessions
Relationship Diagrams, Data Dictionary
Process Modeling : Structured English, Decision Tree & Decision
5
UNIT V Table, Basics of Information Security, Types of Attacks, Viruses,
Sessions
Virus Control, Hackers
Overview of Risks associated with Internet, Risk Management,
5
UNIT VI Disaster Recovery Plan, Managing Risk, Information Security
Sessions
Policy, Creating a secure environment, Internet Security Standards
Text Books
 Elias, M.A. System Analysis and Design. Greater Noida: Galgotia Publication
 Kenneth, E. K. & Kendall, J.K. System Analysis and Design. New Delhi: Prentice hall of
India
Reference Books:
 Grienstein & Feinman. E-commerce –Security, Risk Management and Control. New
Delhi: Tata Mc Graw Hill
 Singh, B. Network Security. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India
Learning Outcomes:
• Upon successful completion of this course, the student will be able to:
• Define and describe the five phases of the system development life cycle.
• Explain the way in which information systems support business requirements.
• Develop data flow diagrams and decision tables.
• Perform a feasibility study.
• Evaluate systems development alternatives.
• Solve realistic systems analysis problems.
• Determine methods for evaluating the effectiveness and efficiency of a system.
Course Outline
Legal Issues in Retails
Course Code: MBAE0025 Year: II Trimester: V Max. Hours:

30Preamble:The Primary objective of this course is to acquaint the students with the legal
requirements to be fulfilled in retail sector business. This course introduces students to various local
laws.

 To make pupils aware of laws of land in retail sector so as to make them strong while
carrying out any responsibility in retail domain.
Definition of Retail,Importance of Law in Retail, Impact of non

compliance of law in retail on internal and external factors,
UNIT – I Overview of The shops and establishments act, 1953, Standards (5 Sessions)
of Weight and Measures Act, 1976.
The Essential commodity act 1955, Agricultural produce market
UNIT –II committee, Main features of The Payment of wages act 1936 (5 Sessions)
Main features of The provident fund act 1952
UNIT – III Payment of Bonus Act, 1965, Minimum wages act (5 Sessions)
Overview of Equal Remuneration act 1976, Overview of
UNIT – IV Contract Labor Act, (4 Sessions)
FDI Policy in India: Entry Options For Foreign Players prior to
FDI Policy, Franchise Agreements, Cash And Carry Wholesale
Trading, Strategic Licensing Agreements, Manufacturing and
UNIT – V Wholly Owned Subsidiaries, Foreign Investor’s Concern (6 Sessions)
Regarding FDI Policy in India, Concerns for the Government for
only Partially Allowing FDI in Retail Sector ,
Overview of The Gratuity act 1972, Maternity act 1976,
UNIT – VI Employees State Insurance Act, 1948 (5 Sessions)
Text Books:
 Mamoria C.B., (2009). Dynamics of Industrial Relations. New Delhi Himalaya

Publishing House.
Reference Books:
 Venkata Ratnam,C.S., (2010). Industrial Relation. 13th Edition. New Delhi: Oxford
University Press.
 Srivastava,S,C., (2009). Industrial Relation and Labor Laws. 5th Edition. New Delhi:
Vikas Publication.
Suggested Journals:
 Labor law reporter
Suggested websites:
www.indialawjournal.com
Learning Outcomes
 After taking this course, students are expected to be more aware of laws of land in retail
sector and their features.
 It will enable him/her to know his rights as well as responsibilities prescribed in law. At the
same time, he/she will be more acquainted with the kind of benefits/rewards law provides in
case of some ordinary and emergent situations as well as the penalties one is subjected to, in
case of violation of these laws.
Course Outline
Retail Store Operation
Preamble:The retail operation is one of the most eminent tools aspiring the customers to
purchase the products offered by the retailers, influencing the perception formed by the
customer regarding the store, the products, services and staff. Consequently, the store itself
becomes an initial asset of the retail business and it plays a vital role in imbibing customer
satisfaction.
The subject aims to train student with practical retail skills and to motivate & foster
entrepreneurial spirit in them. By this subject students will have an understanding of the
mechanics of operating a retail store, sales and customer service and security, store
operations, handling cash, maintaining the store, and establishing policies and its procedures.

 To develop the skill to manage store operations & make the store a profit centre.
 To analyze the importance of customer service & practice it in real world.
Store basics: Store Operations: Nature, scope and significance of

store operations, Importance of store operations; Responsibilities
of store operations, Store maintenance, Grooming ,Cleanliness &
UNIT – I Hygiene,Instore Returns for Online Purchases, Space Selling, (5 Sessions)
Offer Updation,In Store Training, Trolley & Basket Management,
Fun Zone, Customer Entry Measurement, SM DM Briefing, Store
Notice Board
Customer Services and Importance: Types of customer
services -Primary vs. complimentary services, Pre-transaction,
transaction and post-transaction, Services, Assessing customer
service expectations; customer life cycle analysis, Customer
UNIT –II Acquisition and Retention, Add on selling strategies, customer (6 Sessions)
loyalty and profitability of customer, Gift Wrapping, Baggage
Counter, In Store Communication, Free Gifts ,Gift Vouchers,
Customer Care Helpline, Home delivery system and its
management
Store Operations: Deciding about store opening hour and day’s
policy, Parking and rest room services; Crèche and cafeteria
Services, Shopping carts, trolley and elevator facilities, Consumer
UNIT – III counseling and education, Trial facilities, Alteration, repair and (4 Sessions)
return services; Handling customer complaints and returns,
Statutory Record Maintenance, Unclaimed Baggage, Lost &
Found, Returnable Gate Pass.
Cash management: Cash Management: Billing/invoicing,

Cashiering Process, Cashiering Troubleshooting, Handling I-Doc
UNIT – IV & Barcode Issue, Store Managers Discount payment and (6 Sessions)
checkout services, RFID, Customer credit services, Expense
control; Asset protection - Mechanism and control, Retail Audit
Damages, Theft and Security: SIS concept and its
implementation, retail store Housekeeping & Security, Stock
UNIT – V Take Process, Shoplifting, Tagging Standards, Damage and (5 Sessions)
defective stock handling, Packaging and delivery services,
Mechanism for in store control and control of chain stores
Trash Management: Trash management – Handling of scraps,
rejects, Perishables etc.Shrinkage, How to prevent shrinkage,
UNIT – VI Avoiding Stock Damages, Stock in warding / Out warding,
(4 Sessions)
Signage.
Text Books:
 Das, Abhijit.(2006). Mall Management with Case Studies. New Delhi:Taxmann.
Reference Book:
 Berman, Barry & R, Joel. Evans. Retail Management; A Strategic Approach. New Delhi:
 Pradhan, Swapan. Retailing Management- Text & Cases. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill
 Bajaj, Chetan, Tuli, Rajnish & Srivastava, V. Nidhi. Retail Management. New Delhi:Oxford
University Press.
 Lusch,F.Robert & Griffith, A.David. Retailing. New Delhi:Thomson Learning.
Learning Outcomes
 After taking this course, one may better know about the fundamentals of stores, their
operations.
 This course will equip with the potential to analyze the customer service, its various
dimensions, current trends and practices in real business world.
Course Outline
Store Design Layout and Visual Merchandising

Preamble: SDLVM has been conceptualized to study retail management, particularly store
designing, visual merchandising. This course provide understanding about the basic issues and
challenges of creating effective layouts, visual merchandise, store ambience to attract new set
of consumers and maximize the ROI.

 To discuss the prevailing VM practices and training the students for more effective VM styles.
 To provide an insight of store layouts, merchandising and display basics
 To understand store planning.
Selection of Site for a Retail store: Store Location - Importance

of Location Decision, Selecting the Store Location, Evaluating
UNIT – I Specific Areas for Locations, evaluating a site for a Retail store,
(4 Sessions)
Site Characteristics Site Evaluation & Site Selection.
Trading Area Analysis: Trading Area Analysis (Catchment
Study), Trade Area Characteristics, Estimating Potential sales for
a store site – Huff’s Gravity model, Regression Analysis &
UNIT –II Analog approach, Negotiating a Lease – Types & Terms of (5 Sessions)
Lease, Category of Merchandise to be sold in stores, Key
considerations in arranging merchandise for better movement &
Display in the store.
Store Layout & Design: Objectives of a Good Store Design,
Types of Design (Circulation Patterns – Grid, Loop, Racetrack,
Spine, Herringbone). Angles & Sightlines, Store Map, Store
UNIT – III Exteriors (Marquee, Entrances, Door types, Walk Ways etc), (6 Sessions)
Store Interiors & Atmospherics (Lighting, Colors, Music &
Fragrance) Feature Areas, Space Planning.
Understanding Visual Merchandising & Display Basics: The
world of VM - History, Definition & Function, Image Mix, 10
Ways a Store can turn off its customers, Elements of Display,
UNIT – IV Model-AIDCS-(All I Do Can Sell)-Is my display good, Display
(5 Sessions)
& Design Basics, Principles of Design, Color Blocking,
Signages.
Store Planning & Fixtures: Store Planning & Fixtures-What is
UNIT – V store planning? Purpose of Planning Fixtures & Types of
(5 Sessions)
Fixtures, Tips for Selecting & Planning Fixtures, Planograms-

Meaning & Purpose, Benefits, Implementation of a Planogram.
Merchandise Presentation- Meaning, Principles, Placement of
Merchandise & general Guidelines, Categories in Merchandise
presentation (Books, Stationery, Gift items, Shoes, Toys etc.),
Dominance Factor in Merchandise presentation, Cross
Merchandising, Presentation Techniques.
Window Displays, VM-Hands On & Experiential Retail :

Window Display(WD)-Meaning, Scope & Designing process,
WD vis-à-vis Merchandise, WD-Types of Settings, Promotional
Vs Institutional display, WD-Elements of Construction , Styling
& it’s importance, Display Calendar, Handling the Mannequin,
UNIT – VI Props, Lighting the Windows, Organizing an In-store event, VM (5 Sessions)
Tool Kit, Quality & Process in VM, SOPs.
Experiential Retail - Brand Experience(Brand Centric to
Customer Centric), Experience Design – Beyond VM.
Text Books:
 Anuraag S. & Bhalla Swati, Visual Merchandising, New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill, 2010 .
Reference Book:
 Levy Michael, & Weitz A Barton , Pandit A., Retailing Management, New Delhi: Tata
McGraw Hill, 5th reprint 2010.
 Berman Barry & Evans Joel R., Retail Management; A Strategic Approach, New Delhi:
Prentice Hall of India, 2007
 Martin M. Pegler; Visual Merchandising and Display, Fairchild Publications, 2006.
Learning Outcomes
At the end of this course students will be able to:
 Understand the concept of VM practices.

 Incorporate the mechanism of setting up a store layout, merchandising and display basics
in real time situation.
 Implement store planning effectively.
Course Outline
Developmental Projects and Impact assessment

Preamble:Developmental Projects and Impact assessment is an often under-recognized

component of our Environment System, which should consist a project which is developed
which an objective of long term sustainability and hence it impact assessment is a crucial
activity.

 To know the process of developing a sustainable project.
 To understand various financial issues relevant to development project.
 To know various techniques of impact assessment of project.
The role of project formulation and appraisal in the Planning process- Methodology
for project identification and formulation: Preparation of Preliminary-studies, (5
UNI Feasibility Reports and Detailed Project Reports. Appraisal of Project, Monitoring Sessions
T–I of Projects- Reports: Review of project appraisal techniques adopted by financing )
agencies
Financial cost-benefit analysis: cash flow techniques, Net present value, internal
rate of return. Benefit-cost ratio, etc., Exercises and case studies-• Social cost- (5
UNI benefit analysis: Tradeoff between efficiency and equity goals in project-appraisal, Sessions
T –II measurement of direct and indirect costs and benefits in different sectors of-urban )
and rural development
UNI Risk and uncertainty in the project environment; sensitivity and profitability (5
analysis in the Indian context-Emerging trends in the decision making process with
T– respect to project appraisal and resource allocation at various levels of government- Sessions
III Logical framework analysis )
UNI Role of EIA in the Planning and decision making process- Definition and need, (5
evolution and objectives, tasks and scope- Methods of EIA; advantages and
T– limitations- Assessment of impacts on resources (Including air, water, flora and Sessions
IV fauna) )
Assessment of impacts on Land use- Assessment of social and health impacts- (5
UNI Public Participation in EIA; definition and concepts, objectives, techniques, Sessions
T–V advantages and limitation, PRA techniques.
)
UNI Environmental policies and legislation: Legislative and environmental clearanc (5
T– e procedures in India and other countries, sitting criteria Sessions
public participation, resettlement and rehabilitation.
VI )
Text Book:
 Environmental Impact Assessment for Developing Countries: Asit K. Biswas.
Reference Book:
 Environmental Impact Analysis Handbook: G.J. Rau and C.D. Wooten

 Environmental Impact Assessment : L. Canter
 Air Pollution: J.H. Seinfield
 Principles of Surface Water Quality Modelling and Control : R.V. Thomann and J. A. M
uller
 Projects-Prasanna Chandra, Tata McGrahill Publication
Learning Outcomes
 Develop sound understanding of sustainable development
 Develop sustainable projects by using theoretical base and practical exposure.
 Plan for financial as well as other relevant issues which come across while developing
sustainable projects.
 Acquire knowledge about various environmental policies and legislation.
Course Outline
Knowledge Management Techniques for Technology Management
Preamble:This course aims to enable students to develop an appreciation and

understanding how such a technology can be put into practice on a significant commercial
scale. From an entrepreneurial perspective, the objective is for students to become effective in
managing all aspects of innovation and problem solving of the actual technology, and the
managing of people to elicit the best from the technology.

 Appreciate the role of technology in the modern capitalist market economy
 Understand the key aspects of intellectual property, complementary assets and
Commercialization strategies
 Assess and develop the necessary critical factors in the introduction and management
of new technologies
 Identify and evaluate opportunities for new technologies
Technology management –concepts – main technologies and their

characteristics. Technology and strategy, Distinctive
UNIT – I technological competencies, Technology capability assessment, (5 Sessions)
Technology Management framework, Managerial functions of
TM.
Essentials of Knowledge Management, Learning organization:
components of learning organization, knowledge sources, and
documentation. Critical aspects of KM program, Strategic levers.
UNIT –II Knowledge creation process and practices, knowledge (5 Sessions)
management tools and techniques- Infrastructure, Thinking,
Discovering, Organizing, Storing, Knowledge worker support.
Knowledge mismanagement.
Technology development and acquisition, forecasting, generation
and development.
Technology absorption and diffusion, absorption, assessment,
UNIT – III evaluation, diffusion. Disruptive technologies. (5 Sessions)
System requirement and analysis. Technology Life Cycle,
Capability maturity model, Hype cycle.
Meeting technology needs for meeting competitiveness,

Application of knowledge for Technology strategy, road
UNIT – IV mapping and technology portfolio.
(5 Sessions)
Building the knowledge corporation and implementing
knowledge management in organization, Knowledge based

techniques for TM- role of artificial intelligence techniques.
Technology and integrated KM, Factors Influencing Knowledge-

Based Technology Management, knowledge maps – locating and
UNIT – V acquiring expert advice, technologies for knowledge sharing. (5 Sessions)
Integrated systems and technologies, combining technology and
social aspects. Technology management in India.
Managing new generation technologies – commercializing new
and innovative technologies – invention – innovation –
intellectual property rights.
UNIT – VI Competitive advantages through new technologies – product (5 Sessions)
development – from scientific breakthrough to marketable
product. Technology leadership and followership, competing in
technology intensive industries- role of KM.
Text Books:
 Knowledge Management- Elias M. Awad Hasan M. Ghazri, 2003, Pearson Education.
 Handbook of Technology Management – Gaynor, 1996, Tata Mcgraw Hill.
Reference Books:
 Knowledge Management – a resource book – A Thohothathri Raman, 2004, Excel.
 Knowledge Management – Sudhir Warier, 2003, Vikas publications.
 Leading with Knowledge, Madanmohan Rao, 2003, Tata Mc-Graw Hill.
 Management of New Technologies for Global Competitiveness –Christian N Madu,
1995, Jaico Publishing House.
Learning Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to:
 Learn the evolution and role of Knowledge management in contemporary business

environment.
 Articulate key facets of technology enabled knowledge management mechanisms.
 Be exposed to Applications.
 Evaluate the existing opportunities for new technologies
Course Outline
Management of Intellectual Property Rights
Course Code: MBAE0076 Year: II Trimester: V Max. Hours:

30Preamble:While running a business we usually come across with several inventions, innovations
and different news concept or business ideas. We also develop many models and frameworks which we
want to use for exclusive purpose. Sometimes it is observed that people invent new things and ideas but
due to lack of knowledge of the concept of intellectual property they do not understand its intellectual
value and later some other company acquire the exclusive rights to use it.
The Primary objective of this course is to acquaint the students to various intellectual property rights.
So when they will be in corporate they will be the key person to develop and manage intellectual
property.

 To achieve a understanding of the complexities, opportunities in the field of intellectual
property
 To learn how to register and acquire various IPs.
 To develop the scientific temper and the spirit of inquiry and reform in students
Overview of Intellectual property rights: Concepts and Forms,

General Overview of Intellectual Property, Emerging Issues in
UNIT – I Intellectual Property, Role of Intellectual Property in Growth and (4 Sessions)
Development, Intellectual Property Rights – The Indian Scenario
Patents Law: Role of Patents in Promoting Invention, Innovation
and Technology, Paris Convention, Procedure for obtaining a
Patent, Patent Rights and Infringement
UNIT –II Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) and Patent law Treaty (PLT) (6 Sessions)
Overview of Licensing and Assignment of Patents
Software Licensing, General public Licensing , Compulsory
Licensing
Trademark: Introduction to Trademarks, Trademark Assignment
and Licensing, International Treaties Affecting Trademarks, The
Madrid System.
UNIT – III The Agreement on Trade Related Aspects of Intellectual Property (5 Sessions)
Rights, Importance of brands and the generation of “goodwill”
Trademark: A marketing tool , Trademark registration procedure,
Infringement of trademarks and Remedies available
Design Act And Geographical Act: Industrial Designs

Intellectual Property Rights for Layout Designs of Integrated
Circuits , Concept of Industrial Designs
UNIT – IV Registration of Designs
(6 Sessions)
Piracy of registered designs and remedies
Geographical Indications,
IP in Cyber World, Impact of New Technology, Internet and
Domain Names, Domain Name Dispute Resolution, Use of
Marks on the Internet, Technology Advances and IPR, IP and
Biotechnology, Protection of Genetic Resources
UNIT – V Protection of Databases, Protection of Computer Software (5 Sessions)
IP Issues in Developing Countries, Protection of Traditional
Knowledge, Challenges and Opportunities for Developing
Countries, Economic Issues in IPR, Economic Benefits of IP
Protection
IP Management
Concept of IP Management
Valuation of Intellectual Property
UNIT – VI Intellectual Property and Marketing (5 Sessions)
WIPO Copyright Treaty (WCT)
WIPO Performances and Phonograms Treaty (WPPT)

Text Books:
 Satarkar,S.V, (2006) Intellectual Property Rights & Copyright.Delhi:Ess Ess Publications (ISBN:
8170003504
 Sreedharan, Sunita K. (2008) An Introduction To Intellectual Asset Management.. New Delhi:
Wadhwa book company.
Reference Books:
 Catherine Holland, Vito Canuso III (2010). Intellectual Property: Patents, Trademarks,
Copyrights and Trade Secrets. New Delhi: Mc Graw Hill
 GANGULI, PRABUDDHA (2008) INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. New Delhi: Mc
Graw Hill Aswattapa, K. (2003). International Business. 3rd Edition. New Delhi: Tata McGraw
Hill.
Suggested Journals:
 Journal of Intellectual Property Law & Practice; Oxford University Press
 International Journal of Intellectual Property Rights (IJIPR) (ISSN 0976-6529)
Learning Outcomes
 Understand the principles, function and basic legal rules of IP Law.

 Recognize the relevant criteria for generating and protecting intellectual works.
 Understand the relevance and impact of IP Law on academic/scientific works/studies.
 Recognize the intellectual property likely to be produced in the academic and
professional environment.
 Understand the different forms of infringement of intellectual property rights.
 Demonstrate appreciation and critical awareness of pertinent IP issues in the academic
and professional lives.
Course Outline
Advanced Inventory Control
Preamble:This course provides an insight to the functional area of inventory management,
as practiced in organizations. It includes various sophisticated tools and techniques for
managing the inventory. Students are required to make a review of fundamentals of inventory
management, supply chain management and business statistics.
Inventory Management: Inventory concept; need for inventory;

types of inventory, functions, use; Dependent and Independent
Demand
UNIT – I Strategic Inventory Management: Objectives and Importance of (5 Sessions)
the inventory management function in reference to Profitability,
Strategy, customer satisfaction and Competitive Advantage
Two bin inventory system, Production planning and inventory
management, Planning and control in multiechelon inventory
UNIT –II management. Material management, Material planning and (5 Sessions)
handling, Purchasing function, Material Requirement Planning
Assumptions of Basic EOQ model, sensitivity analysis ,Economic
production quantity(EPQ), selection of carrying charges, fixed
UNIT – III cost per replenishment, the exchange curve, Wagner-Whitin (5 Sessions)
method,Heurisitic approach for a variable demand pattern
Inventory Control Techniques: Inventory classification and its

use in controlling inventory, Setup time and inventory control,
UNIT – IV safety stock determination, Strategies to: Reduce throughput (5 Sessions)
time, Reduce WIP, eliminate waste, and reduce inventory level
in service and manufacturing organizations
Management of special class items: Guidelines for control of A
items, determination of order point , order quantity , Coping with
nonstationarity.Control of C items with steady demand and with
UNIT – V declining demand.Style goods problem:Single item news vendor
(5 Sessions)
problem, multiperiod news vendor problem
Coordinated replenishment : Single stoking location,selection of

UNIT – VI replenishment quantities: Family of items ,probabilistic demand
(5 Sessions)
:with and without quantity discount, Concept of Shipping

Consolidation
Text Books:
 Inventory management and production planning and scheduling-Edward A. Silver, David

F. Pyke and Rein Peterson,Third edition John Wiley & Sons.
Reference Books:
 Production Planning And Inventory Control - Seetharama L Narsimhan, Dennis W
McLeavy, Peter J Billington, Prentice Hall Of India Pvt Ltd,
 Introduction To Materials Management, - J. R. Tony Arnold, Stephen N. Chapman -
Prentice Hall
 Principles of Inventory and Materials Management - Richard J. Tersine, Prentice Hall
PTR
 Essentials of Inventory Management - Max Muller, AMACOM/American Management
Association
 Production And Inventory Control - J H Greene,Homewood III: Richard D Irwin
 Materials Management – A.R.Palit
Learning Outcome
After the completion of the course the students will be able to
 Will be able to understand the importance of inventory in strategic decision making and
achieving customer satisfaction.
 Will be able to understand the system of multiechelon inventory management.
 Will be able to understand the categorization and storage policy of stocked materials. Will be
able to learn different models of determining best order size in deterministic as well as
probabilistic situations.
Course Outline
Manufacturing System
Preamble: The Course of manufacturing system aims to familiarize students with various
methods and models applied by experts in the industry. This Course will develop a skill in the
students with the help of which they can easily make their decisions taking into account the
availability of limited resources in the organization, for effective and efficient manufacturing.

Upon successful completion of this course, students would be able to:
 Explain the importance of facility layouts.
 Explain the production planning and control.
 Understand computer aided process planning
INTRODUCTION TO MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS
Fundamentals of Manufacturing Systems Management , Different
UNIT – I types, Introduction to Cellular Manufacturing , Applications, (5 Sessions)
Unidirectional flow, Production Flow Analysis Capacity Planning,
Layout Management , ,Rank Order Clustering,.
Introduction to Just-in-time manufacturing, Cell control and JIT Basic
UNIT –II elements of JIT, Kanban systems,Critical success factors, Models in JIT (5 Sessions)
CONWIP.
Introduction to synchronous manufacturing, principles of SM
UNIT – III Scheduling in SM ,Drum Buffer Rope system, Product mix problem, (5 Sessions)
Statistical Fluctuations. Flexible Manufacturing System
Inspection - Cent percent Inspection, Sample Inspection, Operation
Characteristics Curves, Statistical Quality Control – Construction &
UNIT – IV Interpretation of Control Charts – (X-R, n, p, c, np) Introduction to Six (5 Sessions)
Sigma, (Numericals expected for Control Charts). Gap analysis for
service quality assessment
MATERIAL FLOW PATH ANALYSIS IN MANUFACTURING
Material handling function-Types of equipment used-conveyor
UNIT – V systems-Automated guided vehicle systems- Guiding and routing-
Traffic control and safety-Interfacing handling and storage with (5 Sessions)
manufacturing-design factors in material handling systems
COMPUTER AIDED PROCESS PLANNING SYSTEMS
UNIT – VI Logical Design of Process Planning – Implementation considerations (5 Sessions)
– Manufacturing system components, production volume, No. of
production families – CAM-I, CAPP, MIPLAN, APPAS,

AUTOPLAN and PRO, CPPP
Reference Books:
 G.Halevi And R.D.Weill, “Principles of Process Planning”, Chapman and Hall, Madras 1995.
 M.P.Groover, “Automatic Production System and Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Prentice
Hall, 1990.
 Bary Hawkes, “CAD/CAM Processes”, 1990.
 Evert E. Adams Jr and Donold J. Ebert, “Production and Operation Management”, Prentice Hall
of India, 1994
 N.Chary, “Production and Operations Management”, 3rd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi,1991
Learning Outcome
outcomes:
 Will be able to understand about internal configuration of production facilities and

different production flows required in manufacturing.
 Will be able to understand the fundamental and applied views of JIT philosophy and
working of Kanban system.
 Will be able to design and develop different quality control charts in order to controlling
the products quality.
 Will be able to learn basic application computers in managing the production process.
Course Outline
Total Quality Management
Preamble:"Use of various methods and recent developments of quality control (such as
QA/QC, Deming and TQM) are covered in detail. Quality in design and planning is stressed as
equally important to quality in the constructed project and quality in production of goods and
services" ...source: 2006-2007 Saint Martin’s catalog. This course familiarizes students with
quality control techniques, quality assurance issues and quality management methods.
 To understand the Total Quality Management concept and principles and the various tools
available to achieve Total Quality Management.
 To understand the statistical approach for quality control.
 To create an awareness about the ISO and QS certification process and its need for the
industries.
INTRODUCTION:Definition of Quality, Types of quality, Relation

b/w quality &cost, Productivity. Quality Leadership and business
UNIT – I strategy, Dimensions of quality, Basic concept of TQM , Principles of (5 Sessions)
TQM, Quality Council ,Quality Costs – Analysis& techniques for Cost
control of Quality, Barriers of TQM Implementation .
TQM PRINCIPLES: Deming Philosophy on quality ,JURAN
Trilogy,PDCA cycle ,Control of quality, control of Quality, quality
planning and sales income , Strategic Quality Management ,Designing
UNIT –II for quality--- Opportunity for improvement in product Design, , (5 Sessions)
Improving effectiveness of Product Development Quality aspect for
manufacturing
ORGANISATION FOR QUALITY: Quality function , Coordination
of quality activities for cross Functional Aspects ,Developing a quality
culture , Standardization of Corporate wide Method for Cutting cost,
UNIT – III Role of Upper, Middle management and workforce & Quality Director (5 Sessions)
,Quality Circles , Employees and operators attitude for Quality
Improvement , Causes of operators errors and corrective methods .
STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL (SPC) : The seven tools of
quality, Statistical Fundamentals – Measures of central Tendency and
UNIT – IV Dispersion, Population and Sample, Normal Curve, Control Charts for (5 Sessions)
variables and attributes, Process capability, Concept of six sigma, New
seven Management tools.
TQM TOOLS:, PER Technique, PPA Analysis ,Taguchi Methods,
UNIT – V Quality Function Deployment (QFD) – House of Quality, QFD (5 Sessions)
Process, Benefits, Taguchi Quality Loss Function, Total Productive

Maintenance (TPM) – Concept, Improvement Needs, FMEA – Stages
of FMEA.
QUALITY SYSTEMS: Need for ISO 9000 and Other Quality
Systems, ISO 9000:2000 Quality System – Elements, Implementation
UNIT – VI of Quality System, Documentation, Quality Auditing, TS 16949, ISO (5 Sessions)
14000 – Concept, Requirements and Benefits.
Text Books:
 Dale H.Besterfiled, et al., “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education, Inc. 2003.
(Indian reprint 2004). ISBN 81-297-0260-6.
Reference Books:
 James R.Evans & William M.Lidsay, “The Management and Control of Quality”, (5th
Edition), South-Western (Thomson Learning), 2002 (ISBN 0-324-06680-5).
 Feigenbaum.A.V. “Total Quality Management”, McGraw-Hill, 1991.
Oakland.J.S. “Total Quality Management”, Butterworth Hcinemann Ltd., Oxford, 1989.
 Narayana V. and Sreenivasan, N.S. “Quality Management – Concepts and Tasks”, New Age
International 1996.
 Zeiri. “Total Quality Management for Engineers”, Wood Head Publishers, 1991.
 Lt. Gen. H.LaI, "Total Quality management", Wiley Eastern Limited, 1990. .
 Greg Bounds. “Beyond Total Quality Management”. McGraw Hill, 1994. 3. Menon, H.G,
"TQM in New Product manufacturing", McGraw Hill 1992
Learning Outcome
On successful completion of the course students will be able to:
 Understand the fundamental principles of Total Quality Management;

 Choose appropriate statistical techniques for improving processes;
 Write reports to management describing processes and recommending ways to improve
them;
 Develop research skills that will allow them to keep abreast of changes in the field of
Total Quality Management;
 Emphasise the process of learning and discovery rather than the presentation of fact.
Course Outline
Entrepreneurship Management
Course Code: MBAC0035 Year: II Trimester: VI Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:The objectives of achieving sustained industrial development, regional growth,

and employment generation have always depended on entrepreneurial development. This
course would make students aware about the various aspects of entrepreneurship and instigate
them to become the budding entrepreneurs by analyzing how creative thinking and knowledge
could help them to become the master of their own. This course aims at instilling and
stimulating human urge for excellence by realizing individual potential for generating and
putting to use the inputs relevant to entrepreneurship. It will help to enrich the entrepreneurial
concepts that are linked with real life situations with the help of various practical examples.

 To provide the basics conceptual framework on entrepreneurship development and
management of business enterprise.
 To understanding the contribution of Small Scale Industries in the growth and
development of individual and the nation.
 To acquaint students with the emerging challenges and concepts in the field of
entrepreneurship.
Introduction to Entrepreneurship: Definition of entrepreneur,
Schumpeter’s views, characteristics and types, functions,
difference between manager and entrepreneur, functions of an
UNIT – I entrepreneur, entrepreneurial process, Entrepreneurial motivation, (5 Sessions)
Internal and External Factors affecting entrepreneurship, Barriers
to entrepreneurship, Intrapreneurship.
Entrepreneurship Development; EDP, objectives,
entrepreneurship development cycle, entrepreneurial development
UNIT –II model, phases of training. (5 Sessions)
Institutes engaged in EDPs – NIESBUD, SIDO, SSIDCs etc.
Small and Medium enterprises: definitions, types,
UNIT – III characteristics and problems, growth and role of SMEs in India, (5 Sessions)
incentives and subsidies by government for MSME.
Project: definition, types and importance, phases of project,

project identification, sources of idea generation, selection,
UNIT – IV feasibility studies, formulation and project report, appraisal,
(5 Sessions)
implementation, evaluation and control.
Setting up a small business enterprise: identifying the business

opportunity- importance of creativity, opportunities in various
sectors, stages for setting up of a small enterprise
Business plan: meaning, Objectives, preparation.
Project financing: Capital structure, sources of funds, Venture
UNIT – V capital, financial institutions – SIDBI, IFCI (5 Sessions)
Family entrepreneurship, Women entrepreneurship, International
UNIT – VI entrepreneurship, Social entrepreneurship, Agripreneurship (5 Sessions)
Text Books:
 Desai.Vasant (2008), Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development and Management,
Mumbai: Himalaya Publishing House.
Reference Books:
 Holt. (1998), Entrepreneurship: New Venture Creation, Prentice-Hall, New Delhi.
 Charantimath,P.(2009),Entrepreneurship Development Small Business Enterprises,
Pearson Education, New Delhi.
 Sahai,S.and Lall,M., (2008),Entrepreneurship, Excel Books, New Delhi.
 Drucker,Peter F.(2009), Innovation & Entrepreneurship,Elsevier IndiaPvt Ltd.
Learning Outcomes
 Students will be able to have basics conceptual framework on entrepreneurship
development and management of business enterprise.
 Understanding about the contribution of Small Scale Industries in the growth and
development of individual and the nation will be developed.
 Students will be acquainted with the emerging challenges and concepts in the field of
entrepreneurship
 Able to make blue print for starting business activity.
Innovating for Sustainability

Course Code: MBAC0036 Year: II Trimester: VI Max. Hours: 30
Course Code: MBA 7602 Year: II Trimester: VI Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:This course is designed to help students develop a rigorous understanding of corporate
sustainability and the role innovation plays in achieving it.Sustainability is a topic of growing interest to
corporations and investors all over the world. Every major company is grappling with the meaning and
application of sustainability in relation to its industry and business model.Similarly, more and more
institutional investors are incorporating sustainability into their resource allocation decision making
process. As a result we are seeing the emergence of a new view of the role of the corporation in society,
one that simultaneously meets shareholders and other stakeholders' objectives.Achieving sustainability-for
corporations, investors, analysts, information intermediaries and other forms of organizations-often
requires innovations, both major and minor, in products, processes, and business models in order to
optimize both financial and nonfinancial (e.g., environmental, social, and governance [ESG]) outcomes.
Because the course is focused on sustainability, there is very little overlap with courses targeted on the
environment or corporate social responsibility specifically.
COURSE OBJECTIVES:
 To develop an understanding of how sustainability can create value for a corporation by
addressing social challenges and opportunities, both for the corporation itself and its
customers. This can be through a lower cost structure, higher pricing and margins, greater
market share, faster growth, better risk management, and brand enhancement.
 To explore how innovation in products, processes, and business models can improve both
financial and nonfinancial performance.
 To understand the role various information intermediaries play in helping and
challenging companies to become more sustainable through innovation, and how
companies can effectively engage with them.
History
Defining sustainable development – concept and evolution.
Environmental issues – the growing awareness and need for
regulation. The paradigm shift in doing business – the triple
bottom line approach to business sustainability.
Corporate social and environmental responsibility
Sustainability Innovation in Business
Environmental challenges and business management issues.
Limits to conventional growth model. Concept of efficiency and
eco-efficiency. Defining sustainability innovation. Basic corporate
environmental strategies. Sustainable product development.
Managing creativity & innovation for business.
Sustainable Marketing:
UNIT – III Concept and definition, Framework of sustainable marketing.
(5 Sessions)
Creating and implementing a sustainable marketing strategy.

Consumer behavior and sustainable marketing.
Entrepreneurship and Sustainability Innovation Analysis

Entrepreneurial process
Linear thinking, systems thinking and molecular thinking
Weak ties, Strong Ties and Adaptive collaboration through value
added networks.
Social entrepreneurship and Innovation.
Analysis of how corporate leaders/businesses are approaching
sustainability innovation and sustainability strategy.
Energy and Climate
The industrial revolution and the role of human induced global
warming.
The energy scenario and the linkages to environmental
sustainability and climate change.
Global climate negotiations framework- UNFCCC
The issues plaguing the current talks between developed and
developing nations.
Going Green
What is Green and Green Washing.
UNIT – VI The pitfalls to avoid green washing and Sins of Green Washing. (5 Sessions)
Sustainability in the Value Chain; Developing sustainable channel
operations.

Text Books:
 Andrea Larson (2010), Sustainability, Innovation, and Entrepreneurship ,Flat World
Knowledge
 Tracey Strange, Anne Bayley (2010), Sustainable Development, Organization for
economic cooperation and development.
Diane Martin, John Schouten (2015), Sustainable Marketing , Pearson
Advertising Management
Course Code: MBAE0057 Year: II Trimester: VI Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:This course designed to give marketing students an overview and understanding
of the important role of advertising in organizational success. In addition this subject will try
to make the student familiar with the promotional tools in detail. The subject will emphasize
the advertising in the promotion mix specially the creation of the advertising message.
 To provide an appreciation of the range of the tools available for marketing

communication
 To familiarize the student with the practice of promoting market for products through
advertisements and sales promotion
 To develop managerial perspective and an informed decision-making ability for effective
and efficient tackling of advertising situation and creativity.
Steps in Communication process, Factors in deciding Promotion

Mix. Promotion Mix Tools
UNIT – I Sales Promotion: Role and process of Sales Promotion, (4 Sessions)
Techniques of Sales Promotion- Consumer and Trade Oriented.
Direct Marketing: Objectives, Strategies and Media, Public
UNIT –II Relations and Publicity, Internet / Interactive Marketing (4 Sessions)
Personal Selling: Scope, Role and Process
Advertising Management: Meaning, Evaluation of Advertising,
Objectives, Importance, Classification of Advertisement,
UNIT – III Economic and Social Effects of Advertising, Organization of (7 Sessions)
Advertising Department, Department, Advertising Agency
Management, Campaign Planning.
Advertising media management: Print, Radio, TV, Cinema
UNIT – IV outdoor and other forms- Advantages, Limitations, Availability, (5 Sessions)
Media Rates, Media Planning and Scheduling.
Advertising creativity: Advertising Copywriting for print and
UNIT – V Broadcast Media-Principles, Styles, Advertising visualization (4 Sessions)
and Design production of Print, Broad and other advertisements.
Media strategy: setting and allocating media budget, media
scheduling, testing advertising effectiveness – pre-testing and
UNIT – VI post testing (6 Sessions)
Advertising agencies: Organization and functioning, global
advertising, Advertising and society, advertising regulations.
Text Book:
 Belch, G. E., & Belch, M. A. (2005). Advertising and Promotion. Delhi: Tata McGraw-
Hill Publication.
Reference books:
 Batra, R. & Myers, J. G. (2006). Advertising Management. Delhi: Prentice Hall of India.
 Jethwaney, J., & Jain, S. (2006). Advertising Management. New Delhi: Oxford
University Press.
 Wells, W., Burnett, J., & Moriarty, S. (2002). Advertising Principles and Practice. Delhi:
Learning Outcomes
 Understand the concepts, tools and techniques relevant to advertisement management

 Develop an insight into basic promotion mix issues
 Go through the complexities of advertisement creativity
 Solve the strategic communication mix problems faced by media managers
 Design advertisement strategies
Course Outline
International Marketing
Preamble:Analysis of opportunities, distinctive characteristics, and emerging trends in
foreign markets, including exploration of alternative methods and strategies for entering
foreign markets; organizational planning and control; impact of social, cultural, economic,
and political differences; and competitive market development strategy. This is accomplished
through real life planning and implementation of an international marketing plan designed to
market a product or service in a foreign country or countries by the various reputed
international companies established in India.

 To achieve an understanding of the complexities, opportunities & creative challenges of
marketing across time, space & cultures.
 Recognize those factors which distinguish the marketing mix for overseas markets as
opposed to domestic markets.
 To learn how to track & evaluate changes in world markets that affects the consumer
demand & shape of marketers’ strategies.
 To develop expertise in assessing of marketing opportunities for all sizes & types of
companies.
 To learn how to develop successful marketing strategies targeted at specific global
market segments.
 To identify & analyze ethical issues in international marketing affecting sustainable
development (“green-marketing”) & social justice in business.
Global Marketing: An Overview: Definition of International

Marketing, International Dimensions of Marketing, Scope and
challenges of International marketing:- EPRG Framework,
UNIT – I Domestic v/s International, Marketing, Process of
(4 Sessions)
Internationalization, Benefits of International Marketing, Driving
& restraining forces.
Political, Legal & Cultural Environment: Political

Environment: Political Systems, Political Risks, Indicators of
Political Risk, Analysis and Measures to minimize Political Risk,
UNIT –II Legal Systems, Legal Form of Organization, Multiplicity of Legal (6 Sessions)
Environment, Bribery, Branch v/s Subsidiary, Counterfeiting,
Gray Market
Culture and its Characteristics, Influence of Culture on
Consumption, Thinking, Communication Process; Cultural

Universals.
International Marketing Planning: Marketing Research, Global

Marketing Information Sources, Marketing Information System,
Market Analysis, Marketing Strategies of US, EU & Japanese
UNIT – III MNC’s, Foreign Market Entry Strategies – (Exporting, Licensing, (5 Sessions)
Joint Ventures, Strategic Alliances, Acquisitions Franchising,
Assembly Operations, Management Contracts, Turnkey
Operations, Free Trade Zones.
Product Policy and Planning: Product Design and

Standardization, Developing an International Product Line,
UNIT – IV Foreign Product Diversification, International Branding (4 Sessions)
Decisions, International Packaging, International Warranties and
Services.
International Pricing Strategy: Role of Pricing, Price

Standardization, Pricing Decisions, Price Distortion, Transfer
Pricing, Counter Trade, INCO terms, Terms of Sale, Methods of
UNIT – V Financing and Means of Payment (5 Sessions)
International Channels of Distribution: Channel Members,
Channel Management, Retailing in International Scenario,
International Physical Distribution.
International Promotion Strategies: Promotion Mix,
Promotion and Communication, Personal Selling,
International Sales Negotiations
International Advertising: Patterns of Global Advertising,
Global Advertising Regulations, Advertising Media,
Standardized International Advertising, Global e-marketing.
Text Books:
 Warren, J. K. (2002). 7th Edition. Global Marketing Management. USA: Prentice Hall.
 Cateora, P., & Graham, J. (2003). 11th Edition. International Marketing. USA: McGraw
Hill.
 Varshney & Bhattacharya. (2005). 18th Edition. International Marketing. S Chand Publications.
Reference Books:
 Ronkainen, Czinkota, & Michahel, R. (2002). Best Practices in International Marketing.
Fort Worth. Harcourt College.
 Bradely, F. (2004). 2nd Edition. International Marketing, Strategy. Hemal Hempstead,
Prentice Hall.
 Kotler, P. (2002). 2nd Edition. A Framework for Marketing Management. USA: Prentice
Hall.
 Kotler, P., & Armstrong, G. (2008). 10th Edition. Principles of Marketing. Pearson
education.
 Derskey, H. (2007). 4th Edition. International Management. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of
India.
 Aswatthapa, K. (2006). 3rd Edition. International Business. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-
Hill.
Suggested Journals:
 Journal of International Marketing- American Marketing Association
 International Marketing Review - Emerald
 Journal of Global Marketing- Haworth Press, Inc.
 Journal of International Marketing:- Institute of International Marketing
 Journal of Global Marketing:- Routledge Imprint
Learning Outcomes
 Understand and assess the challenges of turbulent business environments

 Evaluate and design sustainable strategies in such environments either in marketing,
international business and/or technology management fields and in their intersection
 Apply relevant business skills
 Acquire and develop relevant additional knowledge and skills to support subject-based
expertise and international readiness and personal development
 Conduct and report on an independent scientific research project
 Utilize strong analytical skills and apply tools required for professional practices
 Show a market‐oriented, global, entrepreneurial and sustainable mindset
Course Outline
Marketing of Service
Preamble:This course provides an understanding of how marketing is practiced in service

organizations. The course examines the marketing in industries that deals basically in services,
along with the perspective of all organizations, recognition of the fact that service is an
integral part of the offerings of any organization, irrespective of the sector in which it
operates.

 To understand what quality means in service delivery and how perceptions of service
quality are developed by customers
 To appreciate the differences between services and physical goods and to understand how
these differences translate into strategic direction and explore the global perspective of
service marketing.
Introduction: Difference between Product and Services
UNIT – I Marketing, Augmented Marketing Mix, Characteristics of (4 Sessions)
Services, Classification of Services.
Service Marketing System: Service Quality, Understanding
UNIT –II Customer Expectations and Zone of Tolerance, Segmenting, (6 Sessions)
Targeting and Positioning of Services. Managing Perishability.
Services Marketing Mix:, Developing the Service Product/
UNIT – III Intangible Product, Service Product Planning, Service Pricing (5 Sessions)
Strategy, Services Promotions, Services Distributions
Delivering service: Role of Communication in Service

Marketing, People and Internal Communication, Process of
UNIT – IV Operations and Delivery of Services, Service Recovery, Role of
(5 Sessions)
Technology in Services Marketing.
CRM IN services: Relationship marketing, Customer
profitability segment, Relationship- tools and strategies, Use of
information technology for CRM
UNIT – V Marketing of Financial Services: Marketing Mix Strategies
(5 Sessions)
with Special Reference to Credit Cards, Home Loans, Insurance
and Banking, Insurance Services.
Services in Global Perspective: International Marketing of
UNIT – VI Services Recent Trends, Principal Driving Force in Global (5 Sessions)
Marketing of Services, Key Decisions in Global Marketing,
Services Strategy and Organizing for Global Marketing.

Text Books:
 Zeithaml, A., Valarie. & Bitner, Mary, Jo.(2008).Services Marketing.New Delhi, India
:Tata Mc Graw Hill.
Reference Books:
 Rao, K. Ramamohan. (2006). Services Marketing. New Delhi India: Pearson Education.
 Bhattacharjee, C. (2008). Services Marketing: Concepts, Planning & Implementation.
New Delhi India: Excel Books.
 Lovelock, Christopher. & Wirtz, Jochen.(2007). Services Marketing: People,
Technology, Strategy. New Delhi India: Pearson Education.
 Nargundkar, Rajendra. (2008). Services Marketing: Text & Cases. New Delhi, India:
TMH.
Journals:
 Indian Journal of Marketing
 Paradigm: Journal of Institute of mgmt.
 International Journal of Internet Marketing
 Journal of interactive marketing
Learning Outcomes
 Understand the concepts, tools and techniques relevant to service marketing

 Develop an insight into basic marketing mix issues in services
 Go through the complexities of buying Behavior in context of service as a product
 Solve the strategic marketing problems faced by marketing managers
 Design service selling strategies
Course Outline
Conflict Management and Negotiation
Preamble:Conflict is ubiquitous, and it is essential for the manager to know how to manage
and resolve conflict effectively. Effective conflict management involves analyzing a conflict,
understanding the dynamics between the parties, considering the alternatives ways of
approaching it, and determining which approach is likely to be best.
Through the course readings, discussions and simulations, students will develop an
understanding of conflict dynamics and the art and science of negotiation. The course will be
an amalgam of the theoretical and the practical learning’s, and will support student’s
understanding of his/her own relationship to conflict and negotiation and the ways she/he
typically deals with them.

 To help the students in understanding the conflict dynamics in organizations,
 To enable students to understand themselves and their reaction to conflict and to learn
techniques to manage conflict in their personal and professional lives.
 To develop their negotiation skills to handle conflicting situations in life more
constructively.
Understanding conflict: Introduction and concept of conflict,
features, types, functional and dysfunctional aspects of conflict,
Perception of conflict: traditional, human relations and
interaction’s views of conflict, Sources of conflicts in
UNIT – I organization and industry.
(6 Sessions)
Processes and Dynamics of conflict, levels of conflict, conflict
Continuum, effect of conflicts on individual and group
performance.
Conflict resolution: concept, methods: negotiation, mediation,
community building, advocacy, diplomacy and counseling,
UNIT –II managerial skills and competencies for effective conflict (4 Sessions)
resolution.
Strategy and management of conflict: Strategies for

interpersonal conflict resolutions, management of conflict, styles
UNIT – III of conflict management -competing, accommodating and (5 Sessions)
avoiding, compromising and collaborating, self awareness for
conflict management.
Managing Negotiation: Understanding negotiation, strategies

and Tactics of negotiation, negotiation process, approaches to
UNIT – IV negotiation: the advocate’s approach, the “win-win” negotiators (5 Sessions)
approach & the new creative approach, common negotiation
mistakes, team negotiation, third party intervention.
Planning for negotiation: preparing a game plan, BATNA ,
Role of communication, emotions, perception and creativity in
negotiation ,
Cross-cultural dimension of negotiation: The Hosted model
UNIT – V for understanding cultural differences in business management, (6 Sessions)
Understanding various Stakeholders & constituents involved in
negotiation process, interest map study: interest and position,
types of negotiators interest.
Managing negotiation in following contexts: cross functional
coordination, marketing relations-key strategies to manage
UNIT – VI customer’s mindset, international business, labor-management (4 Sessions)
relations, business-social relations, Ethics and negotiation.
Text Books:
 Singh, B.D. (2008). Managing Conflicts and Negotiation. New Delhi: Excel book
Publication.
Reference Books:
 Corvette, B. A. B. (2009). Conflict Management: A Practical Guide to Developing
Negotiation Strategies. Pearson Education.
 Steven, C. (2002). Negotiating Skills for Managers. Tata McGraw-Hill Publication.
 Hill trop Jean-M, Udall Sheila. (2002). The Essence of Negotiation. Prentice Hall of India
Publication.
 Stephen, R. P. (2000). Organizational Behavior. Prentice Hall of India Publication.
 Luthans, F. (2005). Organizational Behavior. Tata McGraw-Hill Publication.
 Stephen, R. P., & Sanghi S. (2007). Organizational Behavior. Pearson Prentice Hall of India
Publication.
Journals:
 International Journal of Conflict Management, Published/Hosted by Emerald Insight. ISSN:
1044-4068.( www.journalseek.net, www.emeraldinsight.com) Friedman Raymond, Tidd
Simon, Vanderbilt University
 The International Journal of Conflict Management 2000, Vol.11, No.1, pp. 32-55 1/23
 The journal of conflict resolution, journal of the peace science society (international),
volume-54,number-2,april-2010 (http://jcr.sagepub.com)
 The journal of conflict and security law, volume-15, issue-2, summer2010
(jcsl.oxfordjournals.org)
Learning Outcomes
 After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
 Understand the conflict dynamics in organizations.

 Understand themselves and their reaction to conflict and will learn techniques to manage
conflict in their personal and professional lives.
 Develop negotiation skills to handle conflicting situations in life more constructively.
 Understand the cultural differences in business management which would help them in
better negotiation.
Course Outline
Organizational Development
Preamble:This course is designed to provide in depth understanding of behavioral
interventions and enable the students to apply these interventions for building individual, team,
system, systems and process related competencies and helping organization to achieve peak
performance and become self sustaining.

 Gain expertise, knowledge and skills in a growing field.
 Learn how to apply processes and tools in your organization or practice.
 Improve your career opportunities and competitive advantage.
 Support an organization's success as a business partner and leader.
An introduction to organization Development:
UNIT – I Overview of organizational development: definitions, Field of (4 Sessions)

organizational development, Characteristics, change agent,
Assumptions And Values Underlying OD, Relevance of OD.
Foundations of OD:
Models and theories of planned change - Lewin’s change model,

Burke Litwin model, General model of planned change, Systems
UNIT –II theory, Participation and Empowerment, Teams and Team work,
(6 Sessions)
Parallel learning structures, Applied behavioral Science - Action
Research as a process and an approach.
Managing the OD Process:
Diagnosis - The six-box model – The action component , OD

UNIT – III interventions and their nature, Classification of OD interventions , (5 Sessions)
Planning choosing and implementing of an intervention strategy,
Evaluating and institutionalizing OD interventions
Human Process approaches: T-Groups, Process-consultation,

UNIT – IV Third party intervention, Team interventions, Techniques used in (5 Sessions)
team interventions: Role Analysis Technique, Role Negotiation
Technique, Responsibility Charting.
Organizational process approaches: Organization

confrontation, Inter-group Relations interventions, Grid OD.
Techno-structural interventions: Socio-technical System,

Quality Circles, Total Quality Management, Work Redesign.
UNIT – V Strategic Interventions: Organizational Transformation (5 Sessions)

through Business Process Reengineering, The Self-Design
Strategy, Organizational learning, Knowledge Management.
The future and OD:
Changing environment and fundamental strengths of OD,

UNIT – VI implications of OD for the client, issues in consultant- client
(5 Sessions)
relationship, ethical standards in OD.

Text Books:
 Kavita Singh, 2005, Organization Change & Development:, Excel Books
Reference Books:
 Wendell French, Cicil, H.Bell,Jr, Veena Vohra, 2006, Organization Development,
Pearson Education.
 Wendell French, Cicil, H.Bell,Jr.(6e)2005, Organization Development – Prentice Hall
of India.
 Thomas G.Cummings, Christopher G Worley, 2007, Organization Development and
Change, 8th edition, Thomson.
Learning Outcomes:
After the completion of the course the student will be able to:
 Have expert knowledge and skills in a growing field.

 Learn the application of various processes and tools of Organizational Development
which they can successfully use in their organization.
 Improve their career opportunities and gain competitive advantage.
 Develop themselves as a business partner and leader to Support an organization's success.
Course Outline
International and Strategic Dimensions of Human Resource
Course Code: MBAO0003 Year: II Trimester: VI Max. Hours: 30

Preamble: The objectives of this course are to explore the challenges posed by rapid
globalization of business, understand and analyze human resource issues for making effective
decisions in the contemporary business environment. The course will review the theories,
models and concepts developed in the areas of international management, Strategic HRM,
international & strategic organizational behavior, cross-cultural management, and study their
implications on international HRM practices.
.
 Understand and apply the core aspects of human resource management in an

international context.
 Enhance the ability to think strategically and understand the essentials of business and
organizations in order to manage change more effectively in the global business
environment.
 Frame solutions to complex business problems
 Improve skills of self-discipline, reflection, analysis, communication, and leadership.
Strategic HRM: An Introduction

Defining SHRM, development of concept, strategy and strategic
management, linking HR strategy with business strategy, need
UNIT – I and importance of SHRM, foundations and theories of SHRM, (5 Sessions)
the concept of competitive advantage & human resources as a
source of sustainable competitive advantage, various dimensions
of Strategic HRM,
Strategic HRM implications
Strategizing the HR Process: Recruitment and retention strategies:
outsourcing recruitment, headhunting, assessment centers and
work life balances.
Reward and compensation strategies: skill based pay, broad
UNIT –II banding, variable pay profit sharing and stock option plan, (5 Sessions)
executive compensation.
Training and developing strategies: cross-cultural training, multi
skilling, succession planning, Creating a learning organization,
performance management strategies.
Human aspects of strategic implementation
UNIT – III Organization culture, human side of mergers and acquisitions, (5 Sessions)
organization power and politics, Managing ageing work force,
developing HR strategies for older workers , the changing role of

HR, future challenges of HR,
Strategic HRM in India: Emerging Dimensions
International HRM
Introduction & Overview; Approaches to IHRM; Differences

UNIT – IV between Domestic & IHRM ,The emergence of International (5 Sessions)
Human Resource Management (IHRM),cultural differences and
HRM, Need for cultural training, Managing Human Resources in
an International Business.
International staffing policies
International Recruitment policy, international selection criteria,

UNIT – V factors influencing international recruitment and selection,
(5 Sessions)
international training and development, , international
compensation and performance appraisal, Repatriation
International labor relations and challenges
UNIT – VI International labor characteristics, labor relations, international (5 Sessions)

labor organization, challenges of international organizational
behavior, ethics in International HRM.
Text Books:
 Dhar, R.L.(2008),Strategic Human resource management, excel book publication, new
Delhi.
 Peter J. Dowling, Denice E. Welch & Randall S. Schuler: International Human Resource
Management. Managing People in a Multinational Context, South-Western College
Publications, 3.ed, 1999
Reference Books:
 Sharma, A. & Khandekar, A.(2010), Strategic human resource management, Response
books, New Delhi.
 Rao, V.S.P. (2010), Human resource management,Excel books, New Delhi.
 Mark Mendenhall & Gary Oddou: Readings and Cases in International Human Resource
Management, South-Western College Publications, 3.ed, 1999.
Learning Outcomes
 Understand and analyze human resource issues for making effective decisions in
the contemporary business environment.
 Be able to think strategically and understand the essentials of business and
organizations in order to manage change more effectively in the global business
environment.
 Develop an ability to frame solutions to complex business problems.
 Be able to apply the core aspects of human resource management in an
international context.
Course Outline
Labour and Social Security Legislations
Preamble:“For running any enterprise there is a need of efficient handling of workforce.
While making policies, procedure one must keep in mind that what is the legal environment
accompanied with societal factors. This course will definitely help the budding managers in
their professional life.
 To make aspirants understand the ground rules relating to labor laws

 To equip the students with the working knowledge of various labor laws
Labour Welfare: Philosophy of Labour Welfare; Historical

Development of Labour welfare legislation; Health, Safety and
welfare measures under Factories Act, 1948;
Industrial Disputes Act 1947: Objectives, Authorities for
investigation and settlement of industrial dispute, illegal strike
and lock-out.
Law relating to wages and Bonus: Concepts of wages:
minimum wage, fair wage, living wage.
Payment of Wages Act, 1936: Regulation of payment of
UNIT –II wages; Authorized Deductions, (5 Sessions)
Minimum Wages Act, 1948: Objectives and constitutional
validity of the Act; procedure for fixation and revision of
minimum rates of wages – exemptions and exceptions;
Payment of Bonus Act, 1965; Bonus - Its historical
background, present position and exemptions.
UNIT –III Legislation related to Social security: Protective provisions
(5 Sessions)
under Equal Remuneration Act 1976 & Maternity Benefit Act
1961.
Social security against employment injury and other

contingencies : Concept and development of social security
measures; Employers liability to pay compensation for
UNIT – IV employment injury; Legal protection: (4 Sessions)
Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923 - Concept of ‘accident

arising out of’ and ‘in the course of the employment’; Doctrine
of notional extension and doctrine of added peril; Total and

partial disablement; Quantum and method of distribution of
compensation.
Employees State Insurance Act, 1948: Benefits provided
under the Act; Employees State Insurance Fund and
UNIT – V Contributions; Machinery for the implementation of the Act;
(6 Sessions)
ESI court and appeal to High Court.
Law relating to retirement benefits:
Employees Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions

Act, 1952; Family Pension Scheme 1971 and Employees
UNIT – VI Pension Scheme 1995; (5 Sessions)
Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972 – Concept of gratuity;

Eligibility for payment of gratuity; Determination of gratuity;
Forfeiture of gratuity.
Text Books:
 Kapoor, N. D. (2009). 30th Edition. Elements of Merchantile Law. New Delhi: Sultan
Chand & Sons.
 Mamoria, C. B., Gankar, S.V., & Mamoria, S. (2010). 13 th Edition. Dynamics of
Industrial Relations. New Delhi: Himalaya Publishing House..
Reference books:
 Sinha, N. (2004). 1st Edition. Industrial Relations, Trade Unions and Labour Legislation.
New Delhi: Pearson Education.
 Singh, B.D. (2010). Industrial Relations and Labour Laws. New Delhi: Excel Books.
 Kumar, H. L. (2006). 3rd Edition. Labour Laws. New Delhi: Universal. Pvt. Ltd.
 Srivastava, S.C.(2003). 4th Edition. Industrial Relations and Labour Laws. New Delhi:
Vikas Publishing House Pvt .Ltd
 Singh,P.N.,& Kumar,N.(2010).Employee Relations Management. New Delhi: Pearson
Publication
Journals :
 Labor Law reporter.
Learning Outcomes
 By the end of the course, students will be able:
 To distinguish an employment relationship from other work relationships used by
companies.
 To decide on what kind of services best fit the company's needs: external services or
internal (employment) work?
 To be aware of the importance of legal institutions and collective bargaining.
 To identify the collective agreement applicable in the workplace.
 To master the types of employment contracts (open-ended, fixed-term, part-time, etc.).
Course Outline
International Financial Management
Preamble:This course is designed to develop an understanding of the foreign exchange

market and it’s working. It will help in understand the meaning and importance of hedging,
speculations, options, futures, financial swaps and forward transactions. Besides this it would
also facilitate short term and long term borrowing decisions.

 To make the students understand financial management in global context.
 To explain the foreign exchange market-major players, basic concepts, international
monetary system and contemporary practices.
 To develop an insight into the meaning and increasing role of derivatives in the
international financial market and help students to make the short term and long term
financial decisions in the global market.
International Enterprise & Multinational Financial Management:

The rise of Multinational Corporation, The Internationalization
of Business and Finance, The Scope of International Finance,
Distinguishing Features of International Finance
International Monetary System:
The Gold Standard, The Inter-war Years, The Bretton Woods
System, The Smithsonian Agreement, The Flexible Exchange
Rate Regime, Alternate Exchange Rate Systems
The Foreign Exchange Market:
Foreign Exchange Market and its Functions, Foreign Exchange
Rates, Arbitrage, The Spot Market, Cross Rates of Exchange,
UNIT –II Bid - Ask Spreads, The Forward Market, Interest Arbitrage (4 Sessions)
Theories of Foreign Exchange Rate Movement:
Purchasing Power Parity, International Fisher Effect, Interest
Rate Parity
Management of Foreign Exchange Risk:
Foreign Exchange Risk, Management of Translation,
Transaction, and Economic Exposures
UNIT – III Country Risk Analysis: (7 Sessions)
Measuring Political Risk, Economic and Political Factors
underlying Country Risk, Country Risk Analysis in International
Banking
Financial Management of the Multinational Firm:
Cost of Capital and Capital Structure of the Multinational Firm,
UNIT – IV Multinational Capital Budgeting – Application and (6 Sessions)
Interpretation, Multinational Cash Management, International
Taxation
Foreign Investment Analysis
International Portfolio Investment, Optimal International Asset
UNIT –V Allocation, Measuring Total Return from Portfolio Investing, (4 Sessions)
The International Capital Asset Pricing Model
Corporate Strategy and Foreign Direct Investment
Balance of Payments:
The International Flow of Goods, Services and Capital; Balance
of Payments Accounting, Balance of Payment Statements,
Coping with the Current Account Deficit
Eurocurrency Market:
Domestic Issues vs. Euro Issues, International Bonds Market,
External Commercial Borrowings, Euro Debt, Foreign Currency
Convertible Bonds
Text Books:
 Apte, P.G. (2006). International Financial Management. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill
Company Limited.
Reference Books:
 Eun C.S. & Resnick, B.G. (2007). International Financial Management, USA: McGraw-
Hill.
 Stonehill, A.I., Michael, H. & Moffet (1993). International Financial Management,
United Nations: United Nations Library on Transnational Corporations.
 Madura, J. (2008). International Financial Management. USA: Cengage Learning,
 Sharan, V. (2008). International Financial Management. New Delhi: PHI Learning Pvt.
Ltd.
 Siddaiah, T. (2009). International Financial Management. Noida: Pearson Education
India.
 Kevin (2009). Fundamentals of International Financial Management. New Delhi: PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd.
 Srinivasan, S.P. (2005). International Financial Management. Delhi: Dreamtech Press,
 Eun, C. S. & Resnick, B.G. (2008). International Financial Management. New Delhi:
Tata McGraw-Hill.
Suggested Journals:
 International Review of Finance
 Portfolio Organizer, ICFAI
 The Chartered Financial Analyst, ICFAI
Learning Outcomes
 Students will be able to understanding finance in global context.
 Able to evaluate special decision variables underlying the discharge of finance function
in a multinational corporation
 Understanding the international financial environment and its implications in a globalised

world will be developed.
 Able to understand & analyze the recent developments and trends in global financial
markets and global foreign exchange Marking
 Able to grasp and evaluate the international momentary system especially the IMF
 Able to know the foreign exchange rate mechanism.

Course Outline
Risk and Insurance Management
evidence related to risk management and insurance. Major topics include risk identification,
risk assessment, risk measurement and risk management and various dimensions of insurance
contracts.Emphasis will be put on practical cases of corporate risk management and
exploration of the relevance of insurance in risk management. The paper will also enable
learner to acquaint with working knowledge of insurance.

 To develop an understanding of risk management framework of a company.
 To enable the students to explore the various techniques and methods for risk mitigation
 To instill in them the ability to explore various dimensions of insurance as a risk management
tool.
An Overview of Risk and Risk Assessment

 Risk and Uncertainty, Risk Management, Rationale for Risk
Management in Organizations, Risk Identification and
Measurement, Pooling Arrangements and Diversification of
UNIT – I Risk
(4 Sessions)
 Risk Assessment & Management; Risk analysis: Exposure of
physical assets, financial assets, and Human assets, Exposure
to legal liability
Risk Measurement Methods
 Risk Control, Risk Management Decision Methods: Data
Organization and Analysis, Analysis Tools used in Corporate
Risk Management, Corporate Risk Management and
Shareholder Wealth, Value at Risk (VAR)-Measure, Historical
Simulation, Model Building Approach, Linear Approach,
Quadratic Model, Monte Carlo Simulation, Stress Testing and
Back Testing
Risk Management Framework:
 Enterprise Risk Management: A Case Study, Risk
Retention/Reduction Decisions, Alternative Risk Transfer,
UNIT – III  Tax, Regulatory, and Accounting Factors Affecting Corporate (7 Sessions)
Risk Management
 Hedging Risk with Derivative Contracts: Options, Futures,
Forwards, Swaps
Insurance Contracts
 An Introduction to the Insurance Industry, Pricing of
Insurance, Insurance Regulation and Financial Assessment,
Legal Aspects of Insurance Contracts, Insurability of Risk,
Contractual Provisions, and Legal Doctrines, Insurance
Contract Analysis, Risk Pooling and Insurance including
Review of Probability Concepts, Corporate Risk Management
and Insurance
Life Insurance
 Life Insurance: Principles of Life Insurance, Financial
Planning and Insurance, Life Insurance Products, Pensions and
Annuities, Risk Assessment & Underwriting, Premium
Setting, Product Development, Design and Evaluation,
Reinsurance, Claims Management, Legal Framework
General Insurance
 General Insurance: Principles of General Insurance, General
UNIT – VI Insurance Products (Fire, Motor & Health), Commercial (4 Sessions)
Insurance: Transport, Marine, Catastrophe, Liability, Product
Design, Development and evaluation
TEXT BOOKS:
 Scott Harrington, Gregory Niehaus. 2004. Risk Management & Insurance. Tata McGraw-Hill
Publications.
 Rejda. 2003. Principles of Risk Mgmt. & Insurance. Pearson Education/PHI. 8/e.
REFERENCE BOOKS:
 C. Arthur Williams, Jr., Peter Young, Michael Smith. 1998. Risk Management & Insurance. Tata
McGraw-Hill Publications.
 Manish Bansal,Navneet Bansal. 2006. Derivatives & Financial Innovations. Tata McGraw-Hill
Publications.
 John C. Hull. 2011. Options Futures & Other Derivatives. Pearson Education, 8/e.
 Vohra, N.D. and Bagri, B.R. 2003. Options & Futures. Tata McGraw-Hill Publications. 2/e.
 Dubofsky & Miller. 2005. Derivatives- Valuation & Risk Management. Oxford University Press.
 Shulz – Thomson. 2006. Risk Management & Derivative. Cengage Learning.
 Chance. 2004. Introduction to Derivatives and Risk Management. Thomson Learning, 6/e.
 Dorfman. 2004. Introduction to Risk Management & Insurance. Pearson/PHI.
 Franklin Edwards. 1998. Options & Futures. Tata McGraw-Hill Publications, 1/e.
 Robert W Kolb. 2007. Futures, Options and Swaps. Blackwell Publishing, 5/e.
 Treishumann. 2007. Risk Management and Insurance. Thomson, 12 Ed.
Learning Outcomes
 An insight to the core services sector and how it works.
 Developing understanding for life insurance and general insurance products.
 To examine the issues related to risk management in view of insurance
 Understanding the risk management process and framework used in companies.
Course Outline
Wealth Management and Personal Financial Planning
Preamble:With the advent of so many financial products in the market, wealth management
has become a separate profession. To meet various investable financial objectives, one has to
have his personal financial planning ready. The main objective of this course is to enable the
students to formulate various strategies in managing wealth.

 To enable in understanding the role and relevance of wealth management.
 To enable them to use these techniques optimizing the profitability and attaining the
financial objectives of Individuals.
Financial Planning& Wealth Management:

Financial Planning: Financial Planning Process, Need for Financial
Advisory Services, Scope of Financial Advisory Services
Wealth Management:Financial Planning to Wealth Management, Life
UNIT I Cycle, Wealth Cycle, Economic Cycles and Indicators (Lag, Co- (5 Sessions)
incident, Lead Indicators).
Investment Products and Services:Venture Capital / Private Equity
Funds, Hedge Funds, Structured Products, Portfolio Management
Services, Alternate Assets (Gold & Real Estate).
Personal Financial Planning:
Financial Plan: Goal-based Financial Plan, Comprehensive Financial
Plan, Contingency Planning
Estimating Financial Goals, Concept of Compounding
UNIT II (5Sessions)
Systematic Approach in Investing: Systematic Investment Plan,
Systematic Withdrawal Plan, Systematic Transfer Plan
Operational Aspects of Financial Transactions: PAN & KYC
Process, e-KYC, Power of Attorney, Online Investments
Debt Counseling:
Computation of EMI, Loan Amortization Schedule, Tax and Time
Value of Money Implications on Loan Evaluation
Risk Profiling & Asset Allocation:
UNIT III Risk Profiling of Investors, Managing Investment Risk, Measuring (5 Sessions)
Investment Returns (Tax Adjusted and Risk Adjusted Returns)
Asset Allocation: Strategic and Tactical Asset Allocation, Fixed
Asset Allocation with Annual Re-balancing, Flexible Asset
Allocation
Insurance Planning:
Need for Insurance, Requirements of an Insurable risk, Role of
Insurance in Personal Finance, Steps in Insurance Planning,
Insurance Products, Life Insurance Need Analysis
Retirement Planning:
Introduction to Retirement Planning Process, Estimating Retirement
Corpus, Determining the Retirement Corpus, Investment Planning to
meet Retirement Goals, Retirement Products
Tax & Estate Planning:
Tax Planning: Understanding Income Tax Principles, Tax Aspects of
UNIT V Investment Products, Advance Tax, Filing of Return (6 Sessions)
Estate Planning: Background, Assets & Liabilities, Nomination,
Inheritance Law, Will, Trust
Regulatory and Compliance Aspects:
SEBI (Investment Advisers) Regulations 2013, Ethical Issues in
UNIT VI providing financial advice, Redressal in Capital Market, Redressal in (3 Sessions)
Banking, Regulations relating to Insurance, Pension Funds, Alternate
Investment Schemes, Investment Grievance Redressal Mechanism
Text Books:
1. Gitman et al., Personal Financial Planning, 11th e, South-Western College Pub, 2007
2. Keown, Arthur J., Personal Finance, Pearson Education
Reference Books:
 NISM. (2017). Investment Adviser Level - 1 (NISM Series X-A)
 NISM. (2017). Investment Adviser Level - 2 (NISM Series X-B)
 The Citibank Guide to Building Personal Wealth, John Wiley and Sons
Learning Outcomes:
 Exploration of personal financial planning and wealth management tenets in context of
Investment Planning of individuals with exposure to real life problems
 Acquaintance of Insurance Planning and selecting the suitable insurance plans for
individuals
 Assessment of requisite retirement corpus and corresponding plan to achieve the targets
 A better understanding of Tax Planning to minimize tax liabilities following all legitimate
and practical methods.
Course Outline
Cross Cultural issues in International Management
Course Code: MBAE0066 Year: II Trimester: VI Max. Hours:30
Preamble:Cross Cultural issues have become subject matter of serious issues in managing
Organizations when they are going global. This is evident in the case of many failed Joint
Ventures of International giants from different cultures. The main objective of this subject is to
make the scholars to acquire the knowledge on issues related to Sources and troubleshooting
strategies in dealing with Cross Culture Management.

 Provide the fundamentals associated with the comparative international management
 Provides an understanding of the various strategies of comparative international
management.
Introduction to Cross-cultural Management: Meaning of Cross
UNIT I Culture Management, Importance of Cross Cultural Management, Cross (4 Sessions)
Cultural issues in International Management, The Dimensions of Culture
Communication across Cultures: Importance of Communication in
Culture, Cultural Communication Mediums, Effective Communication
styles in Cultures, Culture and Marketing: Role of Culture in
Marketing, Strategies in dealing with Culture in Marketing
National Cultures and Management: Introduction, Methodological
UNIT III Dilemmas, The Ethic Approach, Cultural Clusters, The Emic Approach, (5 Sessions)
National Cultures and Cross-cultural Negotiations.
Motivation across Cultures: Equity in motivation, Influence of Culture
in Motivation, Strategies in Motivating Employees from Different Cultures
Leadership and Culture: Dealing with Culture Shock, Role of Leader in
Leading Groups from Different Cultures.
Cultural Dimensions of HRM: Recruitment process and Culture, Group
UNIT V Dynamics and Culture, Cross Culture Building, Managing Resistance to (5 Sessions)
New Culture, Importance of Cultural Diversity in HRM.
Managing Global Teams: Cultural Problems in Global Teams,
UNIT VI Strategies in Leading Global Teams, International Assignments and (4 Sessions)
Expatriate Management, The Global Manager.
Text Book:
 Shobhana.M, (2011). Cross Cultural Management, Oxford University Press
 Carla I. Koen. (2007). Comparative International Management. 8th Edition; Tata
Reference Books:
1. Ralph Johann, (2011). Cross Cultural Management, Grin Verlag Publication
Learning Outcomes
- Students will be able to understand the basics of cross cultures in international

management.
- Students will be able to identify, describe and explain key models used for comparing
MBAE0069: DATA COMMUNICATION NETWORKS

(MBA)
Prerequisite:This course will allow students to develop background knowledge as well as core
expertise in data communication and networking (DCN) technologies, which one of the fastest
growing industries in today’s world. It forms an integral part of the modern Information and
Communications Technology (ICT) in any organizations. Starting from intranet/extranet in small
offices to the World Wide Web, principles of DCN plays an important role in designing any
modern telecom infrastructure.

 To provide hands on experience to students in using computers networks for data
organization and addressing business needs with the help of communication.
 To make students aware about networking devices used in organizations.
 To familiarize students with data communication principles such as the OSI and TCP/IP
reference models and associated protocols, analogue and digital data transmission,
transmission media, signal encoding and digital data communications techniques, data
link flow and error control, multiplexing, circuit and packet switching.

Credits: 04 TrimesterVI L–T–P: 4–0–0

Module Teaching
Content
No. Hours
Introduction to Data Communications, Components of Data
4
UNIT I Communications, Digital Data Rates; Asynchronous and
Sessions
Synchronous Data, Computer Network, Network Applications
Types of signals: Amplitude Modulation; Frequency Modulation;
Phase Modulation; Pulse Code Modulation; PDM; Time Division 6
UNIT II
Multiple Access; Frequency Division Multiple Access; Code Sessions
Division Multiple Access
Networking: Network Layer Local Area Network (LAN): LAN
5
UNIT III Components, Ethernet (IEEE 802.3), Token Ring (IEEE 802.5),
Sessions
Selecting a LAN, Improving LAN Performance
Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) & Wide Area Network
5
UNIT IV (WAN): Circuit-switched and Packet-switched Services,
Sessions
Improving MAN & WAN Performance
OSI Model; Broadcasting; Multicasting; Point-to-point
4
UNIT V communication; IP Addressing, Concepts of Port; Socket; ATM;
Sessions
Tunneling; Virtual Private Network
Mobile Communication: Applications of Mobile
Communication; Wireless Communication: Bandwidth, 6
UNIT VI
Transmission Impairment, Interference, Terrestrial Microwave, Sessions
Broadcast Radio, Infrared & Light Waves.
Text Books
 Widjaja, L. G. (2000). Communication Networks. Tata McGraw Hill.

Reference Books:
 Stallings, W. (2003). Data Computer Communication (7th ed.). Delhi: Pearson
Education.
Learning Outcomes:
 Understand and be able to explain the principles of layered protocol architecture;
 Understand, explain and calculate digital transmission over different types of communication
media.
 Understand, explain and solve mathematical problems for data-link and network protocols.
 Describe the principles of access control to shared media and perform performance calculations.
 Understand and explain reliable transmission and calculate the performance of TCP connections.
\
MBAO0008: SOFTWARE MANAGEMENT

(MBA)
Prerequisite:A software development process is concerned primarily with the production aspect
of software development, as opposed to the technical aspect, such as software tools. These
processes exist primarily for supporting the management of software development, and are
generally skewed toward addressing business concerns. Many software development processes
can be run in a similar way to general project management processes..

 Define and highlight importance of software project management.
 Describe the software project management activities
 Train software project managers and other individuals involved in software project
 Planning and tracking and oversight in the implementation of the software project
management process.

Credits: 04 TrimesterVI L–T–P: 4–0–0
Module Teaching
Content
No. Hours
Fundamentals of Software Project Management (SPM), Need
Identification, Vision and Scope document, Project Management
5
UNIT I Cycle, SPM Objectives, Management Spectrum, SPM Framework,
Sessions
Software Project Planning, Planning Objectives, Project Plan,
Types of project plan
Structure of a Software Project Management Plan, Software
project estimation, Estimation methods, Estimation models, 4
UNIT II
Decision process, Project Elements, Work Breakdown Structure Sessions
(WBS), Types of WBS, Functions, Activities and Tasks
Project Life Cycle and Product Life Cycle, Ways to Organize
6
UNIT III Personnel, Project schedule, Scheduling Objectives, Building the
Sessions
project schedule, Network Diagrams: PERT, CPM, Bar Charts
Dimensions of Project Monitoring & Control, Budgeted Cost for
Work Scheduled (BCWS), Cost Performance Index (CPI), 5
UNIT IV
Schedule Performance Index (SPI), Types of Review: Inspections, Sessions
Walkthroughs, Code Reviews
Testing Objectives, Testing Principles, Test Plans, Test Cases,
Types of Testing, Test Strategies, Testing Automation & Testing 5
UNIT V
Tools, Concept of Software Quality, Software Quality Attributes, Sessions
Software Quality Metrics and Indicators
Software Configuration Management: Software Configuration
Items and tasks, Plan for Change, Change Control, Change 5
UNIT VI
Requests Management, Version Control, Risk Management, Risk Sessions
Breakdown Structure (RBS)
Text Books
 Kelkar, S. A. Software Project Management. New Delhi: Prentice Hall India
Publications.
 Cotterell, M. Software Project Management. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill Publication
Reference Books:
 Royce. Software Project Management. New Delhi: Pearson Education
 Conway, K. Software Project Management. New Dehi: Dreamtech Press
Learning Outcomes:
Upon successful completion of this module, the student will be able to:
 understand and practice the process of project management and its application in delivering
successful IT projects.
 evaluate a project to develop the scope of work, provide accurate cost estimates and to plan
the various activities.
 understand and use risk management analysis techniques that identify the factors that put a
project at risk and to quantify the likely effect of risk on project timescales.
 identify the resources required for a project and to produce a work plan and resource
schedule.
Course Outline
Retail Information Systems
Course Code: MBAO0009 Year: II Trimester: VI Max. Hours:

30Preamble:These are the exciting days for the retail industry in India. Over the past decade,
organized retail has dramatically increased its share in total retail business. Large store
formats have altered the shopping experience for consumers and ushered in a new era in
retailing. While business houses rush in to capitalize on this burgeoning opportunity, young
professional too can gain from the new career opportunities in this sector. There are some
considerable differences between organized and unorganized retail like superior supply chain,
inventory management, people management, money management etc. However, at the heart of
all these differences lies Information Technology.Today, Information Technology has become
so pervasive that all professionals need to acquaint themselves with its advances. There was a
time one would immediately think of engineers when one mentioned technology. That is no
longer the case. Every retail professional needs to understand the role played by technology in
the work place.

 To develop an understanding of technology being used in various functions of retail

industry.
 To develop an understanding of Managerial Implications of that technology.
 To understanding how technology can increase the efficiency & effectiveness of different
functions of retail.
Management Information Systems: Introduction, From data to
information, Functions of MIS, Old and New MIS,
(3 Sessions)
UNIT – I Characteristics of a good MIS, Marketing Support System, Retail
Information System, Benefits of MIS to an Organization
IT at POS:
Hardware – Cash Register, Computer based POS system, System
UNIT –II requirement to perform operations. (6 Sessions)
Software – Introduction, Understanding EPoS Software,
Choosing between Bob & FIS, Functions of EPoS Software
Credit Cards: Introduction & History. Benefits and Shortcomings
with credit cards, Payment Mechanism, Other new age payment
mechanisms.
Automatic Identification & Data Capture: Introduction,
Objectives of Auto ID & Data Capture, Bar Codes(UPC), RFID –
Working & Usage
ERP: Introduction, Purpose, Benefits and Disadvantages to a

retailer, True Cost of Retail ERP, The ERP Paradox,
Customization of ERP to a specific retailer, system requirement
UNIT – IV for a successful ERP implementation. (6 Sessions)
CRM: Introduction, Purpose & Reasons for CRM, IT as a
facilitator in adopting CRM, CRM as a tool to gain competitive
advantage.
Data Mining: What is data mining? Reasons for its significance,
Working mechanism, Applications of data mining in Retail
management, Errors & Limitations and Privacy Concerns in data
mining, Technology needed for Data Mining.
SCM: Introduction, Managing all components of Supply Chain,
Components of a Supply chain, Span of SCM and Control,
Objectives of IT in SCM, Reverse Logistics: A special case of
SCM.
E-Tailing: Introduction, The World of Electronic Retail,
Advantages & Shortcomings of e-tailing, Parties involved in e-
tailing, Attributes of an e-tail website, Issues influencing growth
of e-tailing in India,The Current Trends e-Retailing Statistics
Text Books:
 Ajeet Khurana (2010). Information Technology for Retailing (Tata McGraw Hill
Education Private Limited, 1st Edition)
Reference Books:
 O’Brien (2007). Management Information Systems (Tata Mc Graw Hill Education
Private Limited, 7th Edition).
 Laudon & Laudon (2004). Management Information Systems (Pearson Education Private
Limited, 8th Edition).
Learning Outcomes
 Recognize the importance of technology in various functions of retail industry

 Develop managerial implications of technology as and when required
 Create efficient and effective use of technology in different functions of retail.

Course Outline
Retail Merchandising
Course Code: MBAO0010 Year: II Trimester: VI Max. Hours:
30
Preamble:Merchandising has evolved to become so much more than the buying & selling of
products. Today, no product should be purchased without a good idea to whom it will be sold,
when it will be sold, at which price it will be sold and at what location? Therefore, the role of
merchandisers in particular retail scenario is of prime importance as the merchandise has to
be made available as per the requirements of the customers. The course focuses to broaden
students’ practical & theoretical understanding in relation to retail buying, management &
merchandising.
 To develop the appropriate retail competencies to handle Buying & Merchandising

function.
 To impart insights of category management & merchandise knowledge.
Fundamentals of Merchandising : Concept of Merchandising,

Principles of Merchandising, Five “Rights” of Merchandising, Retail
store organization, Relationship of Merchandising to other functions,
UNIT – I Importance of Mathematics to buying & merchandising, Factors
(5 Sessions)
Affecting Function of Buying, Merchandising Philosophy, Methods of
Buying
Merchandise Planning: Merchandising Policies, Internal sources of
Buyer’s information, Merchandising Strategy, Process of Merchandise
Planning, Key concepts in Merchandising
Merchandise planning process – top down & bottom up, its steps, The
Range Plan, Six-month merchandise plan, Model stock plan, and the
buying plan
Developing Assortment plan &Sourcing: The Merchandise
Assortment, Assortment Planning, Increasing & Figuring Open-to-buy,
Determining Sales Curves for categories, Micro Merchandising,
Technology Tools and Merchandise Planning
The Concept of Sourcing, Selecting the Best Merchandising Resources,
Sources of Supply, The Resident buying office, The Phases in Sourcing,
Global Sourcing, Establishing vendor Relationships, Classification of
Resources.
Pricing of Merchandise: The Concept of Price, Retail Objectives &
UNIT – IV pricing, Components of Retail Price, factors affecting price, Price
(5 Sessions)
Consciousness, Price Lines & price Zones, Concept of MAP, Retail

Pricing Policies/Strategies, Adjustments to retail price, Comparison of
Markups & Markdowns, Evaluating Merchandise Performance,
Concept of GMROI
Private Labels & Category Management: The Private Label,
The Market for private labels, Process of Private Label creation, The
UNIT – V buyer’s role in private label development. (5 Sessions)
Concept of Category Management, Key Components of Category
management Framework, the Category Captain
Industry Insights in Merchandising: The Indian retail spectrum,
UNIT – VI Merchandising of categories like Consumer Durables, Food & Grocery (5 Sessions)
Products, Books and Apparels etc.
Text Books:
 Pradhan, Swapana. Retailing Merchandising; New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill, 2010.
Reference Book:
 Diamond Jay & Pintel Gerald. Retail Buying; New Delhi: Pearson Education, 2008
 Esaterling, Flottman, Jernigan & Wuest. Merchandising Mathematics for retailing; New Delhi:
Pearson Education, 2008
 Levy Michael, & Weitz A Barton , Pandit A., Retailing Management, New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill,
5th reprint 2010.
 Berman Barry & Evans Joel R., Retail Management; A Strategic Approach, New Delhi: Prentice Hall
of India, 2007
Learning Outcomes
After completing this course students will be able to:
 Learn appropriate retail competencies to handle buying & merchandising function

 Understand the concept of category management & merchandise knowledge
Course Outline
Retail Supply Chain Management and Vendor Development
Preamble: Supply chain is an integral part of any organization. The role of Supply chain is
not only restricted within the distribution of goods but it is also playing a significant role in
service delivery. Therefore in today’s highly competitive environment SC works as skeleton to
deliver the value to the ultimate users. This course puts emphasis on the fact that how SC can
be a key to success for a retail business and therefore the concepts of SC are analyzed from the
perspective of retail business.

 To bring understanding among students regarding nature of Supply Chain in Retail
Business
 To make aware regarding the various modes of transportation which can be used by a
retailer
 To impart the understanding of the new development in retailing.
Introduction to retail Supply Chain Management: Introduction

to Retail Supply Chains, Participants in Retail Supply Chains,
UNIT – I Aligning the Supply Chain with Business Strategy, Strategic and
(5 Sessions)
functional view of Retail supply chain. Supply chain metrics.
Role of Pricing and Distribution in retail supply chain: Retail
Distribution and Replenishment mechanism, retail pricing and
UNIT –II impact of SC in pricing decisions. Green retailing and its impact
(4 Sessions)
on retail supply chain management.
Retail Transportation: Retail Transportation System:
Multimodal transportation, Modal Interfaces –Inter-modal
UNIT – III Systems – Road/Rail/Sea ; Sea/Air; Road/Air ; Road/Rail ; (6 Sessions)
Sea/Road –Inland Container Depot (ICD) & Container Freight
Station (CFS) Terminals, Reverse logistics.
Issues with Current retail Supply chain formats:

Structure of supply chain-Perishable items retailing,
UNIT – IV Structure of supply chain- consumer durables retailing, (5 Sessions)
Structure of supply chain- apparel retailing,
Introduction of Contemporary issue in SCM RFID, ERP.
Vendor Development and Strategic Sourcing: Concept of
UNIT – V Vendor Management, Procurement, and strategic sourcing, The (5 Sessions)
process of procurement, Negotiation and Principal of
Negotiation, Retail sourcing trends and managing the

relationship with suppliers, Issues involved in global sourcing,
Role of IT in sourcing (3PL and 4PL)
Vendor Selection: Factors associated with Vendor’s selection,
Process of Vendors Selection. Models for vendor selection:
UNIT – VI Categorical Plan method, cost ration method, weighted point (5 Sessions)
method. Advantages and disadvantages of single and multiple
vendor System.
Text Books:
 Ray, Rajesh.(2010).Supply Chain Management for Retailing. New Delhi.TMH.
Reference Book:
 Chunawalla S.A.(2009).Production and Operations management. Himalya Publishing house.

 Levy Michael , Weitz Barton A. ()Retailing Management. McGrawHill Publicaton
 Bajaj, Chetan,.() Retail Managemen: Oxford University Press.
 Christopher.(2006). Logistics Management.PHI.
Learning Outcomes:
At the end of this course students will be able to:
 Develop understanding regarding nature of supply chain in retail.

 Understand the various modes of transportation available for the retailer.
 Know the recent development in retailing.
Course Outline
Livelihood System and Promotion
Preamble:The course aims to provide a theoretical, empirical and methodological
understanding of livelihood system and promotion development processes in India, with
emphasis on development of appropriate strategies for integrating livelihood concerns with
sustainable management of natural resources such as forest and water resources.

 Concept of livelihoods and livelihood frameworks, livelihood assets, vulnerability context and
poverty
 Livelihood interventions through policies, institutions and processes;
 Applying the livelihood framework in natural resource management; and comparison and critique
of the frameworks.
An Introduction to Livelihood:
Livelihood, Need of Livelihood Promotion, Sustainable
Livelihood, The Challenge of Understanding Livelihood
Systems-A Historical Reference.
UNIT – I Traditional & Modern, Rural & Urban Livelihood Systems, (5 Sessions)
Study of livelihood systems, The basis of the livelihood systems,
Livelihood orientation in response to changing poverty
paradigms.
Understanding Livelihoods in Rural India: Diversity,
Change and Exclusion.
Causes of Livelihood Change: Shocks, Trends and Cycles,
Short term Fluctuations in Livelihoods: Preparing for Shocks
UNIT –II and Opportunities, Coping with Shocks (6 Sessions)
Long-term Trajectories: Accumulation or Impoverishment.
Household Trajectories: Virtuous and Vicious Circles.
Explaining Different Patterns of Household Change
An Introduction to Livelihood Interventions:
Livelihood Intervention, Evolution of Livelihood Intervention of
India Introduction
UNIT – III Various Types of Livelihood Intervention: Spatial Interventions, (4 Sessions)
Segmental Interventions, Sectoral Interventions, and Holistic
Approaches to Livelihood Promotion
Understanding Income Of The Household:

UNIT – IV Enhancing Income from the Main Livelihood Activity, (4 Sessions)
Increasing Income in Diversified Portfolio of Subsistence

Livelihoods, Reducing Avoidable Expenditure
Framework for Analyzing Livelihood Intervention Choices:
Introduction, Elements of Design of Livelihood Intervention
Understanding the Internal Context of Intervention: Factor
UNIT – V Conditions, Demand conditions, Industry Conditions, (6 Sessions)
Institutional conditions, Making Livelihood Intervention Design
Choices, Framing for Objectives, Nature of Intervention, Design
of Livelihood Activity.
Designing a Livelihood Intervention:
Looking for livelihood opportunities, Observing and
UNIT – VI understanding the local economy, Selecting livelihood activities (5 Sessions)
suitable for the poor in the area, Deciding on Intervention
Text Books:
 Mahajan, V., Datta S., & Thakur, G. (2001). A Resource Book for Livelihood Promotion.
BASIX
 Phansalkar. (2003). Livelihood: Promoting Livelihood Enhancement. Sir Dorabji Tata
Trust, Mumbai
Reference Books:
 ICRA Learning Resources. (1999). Livelihood – Key Concepts.

 DFID. (2001). Livelihood Framework – Sustainable Livelihood guidance Sheets
Learning Outcomes
After completing this course, students will be able to:
 Differentiate among livelihoods and livelihood frameworks, livelihood assets,

vulnerability context and poverty.
 Know the Livelihood interventions through policies, institutions and processes;
 Implement Livelihood framework in natural resource management; and comparison
and critique of the frameworks.
Course Outline
Participatory Research Methods
Preamble:The Participatory research works as an important mechanism for understanding

and identifying social phenomena of any community. This course content comprises of various
aspects of social research like introduction to social research methods, triangulation,
developing social imagination and various social research designs. A comparison of the
various systems across the globe evolved is also included.

 To provide a guided tour of Social Research and To inculcate and improve skills in exploring
social dynamics related to various contemporary researchable issues
 To explore the various participatory research designs, methodologies and various operational
tools.
Introduction to Participatory Research Basics:
Social Research: Introduction, Evolution, Need and Prospects
Foundations for Social Research Methods: Sociological
Positivism, Rules for Social Research, Triangulation;
UNIT – I Developing a Sociological Imagination, Challenges to (5 Sessions)
Traditional Ways of Doing Social Science; Locating the Self in
Social Research
Ethical Concerns in Qualitative Research
Participatory / Social Research Designs (I)
UNIT –II Quantitative Design: Survey Research, Statistical Surveys, (4 Sessions)
Reliability and Validity Analysis, Cluster Analysis
Participatory / Social Research Designs (II)
Qualitative Designs: Analytic Induction, Archival Research,
Content Analysis, Textual Analysis, Focus Group, Ethnography,
UNIT – III Historical Method, Life History, Longitudinal Study, (6 Sessions)
Morphological Analysis, Semi-Structured Interview, Structured
Interview, Unstructured Interview
Participatory Research Methodologies (I)
Participant Observation and Individual Interviews;
Rapid Rural Appraisal (RRA): Principles, Techniques, Quick-
UNIT – IV and-dirty methods (5 Sessions)
Participatory Rural Appraisal (PRA): Concept of Empowerment,
Respect, Localization, Enjoyment, Inclusiveness
Participatory Research Methodologies (II)
UNIT – V Participatory Assessment, Participatory Baseline, Participatory (5 Sessions)
Monitoring, Participatory Evaluation (PAME)
Appreciative Inquiry: Approach, Process, Principles

Process Documentation: Purpose, Process, Techniques and Best
Practices
An Insight of Operational Tools of Participatory / Social
Research
Group Meetings; Murals and Posters; Flannel Boards, Open-
ended Stories; Unserialized Posters; Community Case Studies;
UNIT – VI Historical Mapping, Community Environmental Assessment; (5 Sessions)
Survival Surveys; Participatory Action Research; Maps and
Mapping, Community Financial Accounts; SWOT Analysis;
Popular & Puppet Theatre; Community Directed Visual Images /
Tape Recordings / Videos
Text Books:
 McIntyre, L. (2005). 10th Edition. Need to Know: Social Science Research Methods.
Tata McGraw Hill Publication.
 Kristin, G. E. (2010). 2nd Edition. Qualitative Methods in Social Research. Tata McGraw
Hill Publication
 Corby, B. (2010). Applying Research in Social Work Practices. Tata McGraw Hill
Publication
Reference Books:
 Denscombe, M. (2004). Ground Rules for Social Research. Tata McGraw Hill
Publication
 Newman, W. Social Research Methods: Qualitative and Quantitative. Pearson Education

India.
Learning outcomes:
 Development of awareness of Social Research and inculcate and improve skills in

exploring social dynamics related to various contemporary researchable issues
 Understanding of various participatory research designs, methodologies and various
operational tools.
Course Outline
Public Policy and Health
Preamble:Public health is an often under-recognized component of our health system, yet
most improvements in life expectancy and other key markers of healthy populations which are
the result of effective public health programs. It is concerned with threats to the overall health
of a community based on population health analysis. This course will provide a framework for
developing and analyzing a range of health policy issues.

 To develop an understanding of the public health policy.
 To enable the students to interpret and apply health concept in day to day functioning.
 To build awareness of certain important and critical issues in public health policy
Understanding the Concepts of Health

Community Health, Community Health Centre, Community
Mental Health Services, Urban Health Resource Centre, Online
UNIT – I Health Communities (5 Sessions)
Public Health: Objectives, Public Health Programs, Public
Health System in India: Rural Health Care System in India,
Health Education, Role of Public Policy in Health
Health Care in India:
A Brief Overview, Health Care Infrastructure, Primary Services,
Central Government's Role, Issues: Disease-national centre of
Disease control, Global malaria Action Plan, The Global Fund to
UNIT –II Fight AIDS. (6 Sessions)
Gender Ratio: Concept, Gender Imbalance, Fisher's Principle,
Types of Gender Ratio, Examples in Non human Species,
Factors affecting Gender Ratios
Major Determinants of Health:
The Changing Nature of Infectious Disease, Food, Trade and
UNIT – III Health, Drains, Dustbins and Disease. Other Issues- Pollution- (4 Sessions)
Malnutrition, Water and Sanitation
Tobacco: A Public Health Emergency
Population Health: The Role of Economic Inequality, The

Importance of Family Planning Programs, Population Health
UNIT – IV Management, IT Challenges in enabling Population health (4 Sessions)
management.
Principles of the Ethical Practice of Public health.

Correspondence of the ethical principles with the essential public
health services.
Health Planning in India:
National Cancer Control Program, National Aids Control
Program, Universal Immunization Program (UIP), National
UNIT – V Health Policy, State Health Policy, Ministry of Health and (6 Sessions)
Family Welfare; National Urban Health Mission , National Rural
Health Mission
Role of International Agencies in Public Health
WHO (World Health Organization), UNICEF (United Nations
UNIT – VI International Children's Emergency Fund), CRY (Child Rights (5 Sessions)
and You), CARE, RED Cross Society
Text Book:
 Pomerleau, J., & McKee, M. (2006). Issues in Public Health. New Delhi: Tata McGraw
Hill.
Reference Book:
 Michael, B. (2008). International Public Health Policy and Ethics. Series: International
Library of Ethics, Law, and the New Medicine, Vol. 42
 Goodwin, N., Gruen, R., & Iles, V. (2006). Managing Health Services. New Delhi: Tata
McGraw Hill.
 Buse, K., Mays, N., & Walt, G. (2006). Making Health Policy. New Delhi: Tata McGraw
Hill.
 Macdowall, W., Bonell, C., & Davies, M. (2006). Health Promotion Practice. New
Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.
Learning outcomes
 Development of an understanding of the public health policy.
 To enable the students to interpret and apply health concept in day to day functioning.
 To build awareness of certain important and critical issues in public health policy
Course Outline
Strategy Implementation and Control

Preamble:Strategic management is the core element of any business course as it acts like
glue that holds other business subjects together. It is the field of management designed to help
general managers improve the long-term competitive position of their organization.
Apart from planning, which in itself is a challenging and comprehensive task, implementation
creates greater challenges, as a number of unfavorable forces may have to be managed. This
course aims to familiarize students with the enormous uncertainties and challenges of
executing strategies at various levels in the organization.

 To understand the nature of strategy execution and its competitive and institutional
context
 To know the challenges and risks associated with successful implementation of strategies.
 To acquaint students with a range of methods of strategy execution, evalution and
controls.
The nature of strategy implementation
Concept Of Strategy Implementation, Strategy Implementation
And The Strategic Management Process, Mintzberg's Model, The
UNIT – I Relation Between Strategy Formulation And Strategy (5 Sessions)
Implemenation, A General Framework For Strategy
Implementation
Implementation approaches
The Concept Fit, The 7-s's Framework, Relationship Of
UNIT –II Implementation To Life Cycle, Selecting An Implementation (5 Sessions)
Approach, Strategy Implementation And Stakeholders, general
problems in implementation
Implementation in action
Developing programmes, budgets, and procedures, achieving
UNIT – III synergy, designing jobs, resource allocation, managing conflict, (5 Sessions)
managing resistance to change, creating a strategy-supportive
structure, culture and leadership.
Implementation at Corporate and Business level
The Concept Of The Center Of Gravity, Strategies Changes -
Integration, Diversification, Mergers, acquisitions and joint
UNIT – IV ventures. (5 Sessions)
Implementing Porter's Generic Strategies, Differentiation Versus
Low-cost Strategies
Strategy Implementation
Implementing Strategies: Production/Operations Concerns, HR
concerns, Marketing, Finance/Accounting, R&D, and MIS
Issues
UNIT – V Restructuring and Reengineering, execution in turbulent (5 Sessions)
environment – concept of strategy incoherence, dissonance,
agility and resilience
Execution in international context
Strategy Evaluation and Control
Strategy Evaluation, Framework, Characteristics of an Effective
Evaluation System, Contingency Planning, Auditing, enterprise
UNIT – VI risk management, Activity based costing. (5 Sessions)
Measuring Performance at corporate and functional level,
Strategic Incentive Management
Control –importance and types
Text Books:
 Thompson, Strickland, Gamble & Jain. (2005). Crafting and Executing Strategy. 14th
Edition. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill Publication.
Hill Publication.
 Galbraith, J.R. (2006). Strategy Implementation: The Role of Structure and Process. West
Publishing Company.
Reference Books:
 Hamel, G. & Prahalad, C. K. (2003). Competing for the Future. Harvard Business
School.
 Johnson, & Scholes. (2006). Exploring Corporate Strategy. Prentice Hall India.
 Hunger and Wheelen, (2004). Strategic Management. New Delhi: Pearson Education.
 Macmillan, H. & Tampoe, M. (2005). Strategic Management. Oxford University Press.
 Pearce II, Robinson Jr., & Mittal. (1999). Strategic Management: Formulation, Implementation
and Control. Tata McGraw Hill
Learning Outcomes
 Explain the importance of evaluation and control to the strategic management process
 Compare and contrast different control techniques in terms of their advantages and
disadvantages
 Decide which control technique (or combination of techniques) would be most suitable for
a given context
 Describe a practical framework for evaluating strategies
 Identify and explain the characteristics of an effective control system;
 Explain the reasons for strategic failure
Course Outline
Technology Forecasting
Preamble:In order to effectively prepare business strategies in the technologically fast-paced worlds of
e-commerce, information technology, and the global economy, it has become important for companies
and policy makers to look into the future with sophisticated models and techniques to determine the
course of technological change. The field of technological forecasting, more commonly referred to as
foresight studies, has emerged as an energetic and vibrant area of study and practice. This course will
provide an insight of technological forecasting with the implementation of some sophisticated statistical
tools. For bringing an adequate understanding of the subject students are required to make review of
regression and time series analysis
This course is designed to enable students:

 To understand the key concepts and options in technology forecasting.
 To understand models of technology forecasting.
 To understand the assessment of technological forecasting.
Purpose and meaning of technology forecasting, characteristics of

a good forecast, methodological foundations, Method Selection ,
UNIT – I common errors, Developing technological competencies and (5 Sessions)
creation of sustainable comparative advantages through
technology forecasting, benefits for technology transfer
Planning the Technology Forecast, forecasting project needs,
Organizing and Managing the Technology Forecast, Project
UNIT –II Scheduling through PERT, PAC. (5 Sessions)
Technology Delivery System, stakeholder, societal and
institutional context, monitoring process and strategy
Sources of quantitative/qualitative data on technologies:Forecasts
based on human judgments and estimates, Historical
UNIT – III analogies,Technology database:Patent searching, Bibliometric (5 Sessions)
analysis,
Forecasting the Market - Qualitative Techniques for Appraising

Market
Potential, A Quantitative Approach—Adoption and
UNIT – IV Substitution., Macroeconomic Forecasting, General Equilibrium
(5 Sessions)
Models, Institutional Arrangements and the Market, Linear
regression, Fitting time series data to general trend
models,growth and substitution curve models,Systems models

Critical success factors in technology forecasting, Impact
Assessment in Technology Forecasting – concept and
UNIT – V techniques, analysis of technological. Polical, social, economic (5 Sessions)
impact, Impact Evaluation,Cost-Benefit Analysis within and
outside the Organization – methods, forecasting accuracy
Combining forecasts, Accounting for Risk and Uncertainty –
within organization and outside,Technology Roadmapping,
UNIT – VI StrategicPlanning for Technology Implementation, uses in (5 Sessions)
manufacturing, Learning from Past Forecasts and Assessments
Reference Books:
 Strategic Technology Management - Betz. F. - McGraw-Hill.
 Management of Technology - Tarek Khalli -, McGraw-Hill.
 Strategic Management of Technological Innovation - Schilling - McGraw-Hill, 2nd ed.
 Handbook of Technology Management – Gaynor, 1996, Tata McGraw Hill.
 Forecasting and Management of technology - Alan Thomas
 Management of New Technologies for Global Competitiveness –Christian N Madu,
1995, Jaico Publishing House.
Learning Outcomes
The learning objectives of the course are to:
 Stimulate and inform a strategic perspective on the role of innovation, and in particular to
increase understanding of:
o The characteristics of innovation processes and the factors that shape and drive
innovation;
o The potential roles of incremental and disruptive innovation in creating and
sustaining firm competitiveness
 Understand the sources of innovation competence in firms and how these competences
are developed, and in particular to increase understanding of:
o Why some firms are more successfully innovative than others;
o The many different sources of knowledge and capability used for innovation and
the strategies for accessing them.
Course Outline
Management of Technology Transfer and Adoption

Preamble:This course examines the processes involved in transferring technologies from one
organization or culture to another. First, the broad concept of technology will be examined from
several viewpoints. These include the philosophy of technology, its conceptual organization, and the
technological method. Special emphasis will be placed on the change process and its relationship to the
diffusion of technology. Models that describe technology transfer and the vehicles that facilitate
technology transfer will then be considered. Special emphasis will be placed on the means used to
transfer technologies and the social, cultural, and technological problems that often result. The course
will conclude with the identification of strategies that can be used to facilitate successful technology
transfer and adoption.

This course is designed to enable students:
1. To understand the key concepts and options in technology commercialization.
2. To understand how to assess technologies for their commercialization potential.
3. To understand the steps that a technology goes through in the journey from the laboratory
to the marketplace.
4. To explore the roles that intellectual property protection and licensing play in the
commercialization process.
Purpose and meaning of technology transfer, Ways of technology

transfer, technology transfer process, technology transfer agents,
UNIT – I constituents of technology transfer, factors affecting technology , (5 Sessions)
technology transfer checklist, benefits for technology transfer
Technology transfer team and their responsibility, Seven “C”s for
the Successful Transfer - Context , Challenges : Shortfalls in
Technology Creation, Choice: Technology Needs Assessment,
UNIT –II Existence of Viable Technology Alternatives, Functions of (5 Sessions)
Technology Assessment, Certainty - Ensuring Effective Use of
Analytical, Assessment and Other Decision Support Tools
Communication, Capacity : Fostering Innovation, Applied
Research and Development, Developing and Enhancing Human
UNIT – III Capabilities, Commitment - Sustainable Markets for (5 Sessions)
Environmentally Sound Technologies
Ensuring Macroeconomic Policy Frameworks Minimize

uncertainties, Policy dimension and regulatory frameworks,
UNIT – IV From technology transfer to technological learning capabilities, (5 Sessions)
Networking for Technology Acquisition and Transfer, Financial
aspects, structuring agreements
Impact of adoption of new technologies, Alternate models for
technology transfer, Techonology transfer : problems and
UNIT – V prospects, Knowledge and technology transfer grid (5 Sessions)
Technology transfer as collaborative learning, Technology
diffusion and organizational learning
Patterns and Criticisms of TT, India and Technology Transfer:
Positions, Barriers and Options, Technology transfer
UNIT – VI Agreements in India, international technology transfer process, (5 Sessions)
Legal issues in technology transfer, Cross cultural issues

Text Books:
 Technology Transfer: Strategic Management in Developing Countries-Goel Cohen, 2004,
Sage Publications Ltd.
 Handbook of Technology Management – Gaynor, 1996, Tata Mcgraw Hill.
Reference Books:
 A Macro Perspective on Technology Transfer -Allan C. Reddy, 1996, Greenwood
Publishing Group
 Global Perspectives on Technology Transfer and Commercialization- John Sibley Butler,
2011, Edward Elgar Publishing
 Theory of Science and Technology Transfer and Applications- Siegeng Liu, 2009, Taylor
& Francis
Learning Outcomes
 Apply appropriate mechanisms of technology transfer and commercialization
 Understand and assess customer-needs driven technology specifications,

technology alignment, and technology transfer process
 Assess technology licensing agreement and to evaluate start-up and spin-off

companies
 Recognize the importance and role of intellectual property rights, government,

research institutes and commercial institutions in technology transfer and
commercialization
Course Outline
Service Operations Management
Course Code: MBAE0039 Year: II Trimester: VI Max. Hours:
Preamble:In today’s highly competitive era firms are using service as tool for differetntiation.It has
become very important to understand the nature of services and the ways to manage them effectively
and efficiently. In the same regard this course has been designed, which will cover various aspects of
service operations management. The students are required to review the fundamentals of Service
marketing as well as fundamentals of Operations management, so that they can easily assimilate the
subject matter.

After, completion of the course the students will be able to:
 Understand the key concepts of service operation.

 Analyze the process of service designing.
 Understand various models of service quality
Introduction of service operations management, types of services
UNIT – I and processes,service matrix , retail service layout:-service-scape (5 Sessions)
and ambient conditions , spatial layout and functionality.
New Service Development - Designing of Service delivery
UNIT –II Mechanism: Service Blue-printing – Management of Service (5 Sessions)
Experience - Front-office Back-office Interface .
Service Quality: Concept, Models-GAP, SERVQUAL,
UNIT – III SERVPERF - Gronroos model, Complaint management, Service (5 Sessions)
Encounter, Service Recovery Service Guarantee.
Service designs:-Product line approach , Self service Approach ,
Personal Attention approach, Waiting line management-Queuing
UNIT – IV system ,Waiting line models , Introduction to computer (7 Sessions)
simulation of waiting line.
Service supply chain models, service outsourcing , Inventory
UNIT – V Management in Services, Productivity and Performance measurement, (5 Sessions)
IT enabled Customer Service: Call Centre Operations,
UNIT – VI Web‐enabled Services, ERP enabled Services, Tele marketing. (3 Sessions)
Reference Books:
 Operations management – Richard B. Chase TMH.
 Production and operations management – Kanishka Bedi -, Oxford

 Production and operations management – SN Chary TMH.
 Service Operations Management: Improving Service Delivery – Robert Johnston, Pearson
Learning Outcomes
The objectives of this subject are to provide students with:
 An overview of Service and Operations Management as management function in general.

 An understanding of the impact Operational Capability has on decision making and
options in Business Strategy and the linkage to Operations Strategy.
 An understanding of the different types of operations process types on which operational
capability can be based and the strategic implications of the process choice decision.
 An understanding of the relationship between Business Strategy, Operations Strategy,
Process Type, Organization and Control structures the impacts these have on managerial
decision making and choices.
Course Outline
Total Productivity Management
Preamble:In today’s highly competitive era fitness of firm is very significant as far as
manufacturing is concern. In this regard maintenance plays an important role.This course
provides a framework to understand the fundamentals of TPM. The course will also examine
today's critical strategic issues such as role of IT and HR in TPM.
 To understand the Total Productive Management concept and principles and the various
tools available to achieve Total Productive Management.
 To understand the role of IT in TPM .
Introduction of TPM: Definition and features ,Stages of TPM:

UNIT – I Preparation, Initial implementation stage, Full implementation (3 Sessions)
stage, Interlink-age of TPM with other functional departments.
Equipment effectiveness and types of losses ,suspension loss-
plant maintenance loss, productionadjustment loss , Downtime
loss ,equipment failure loss- process failure loss,Speed
loss,regularproduction loss-irregular production loss- Defect
Loss- Process defect loss,loss which caused byrework,overall
Equipment Effectiveness (OEE),TPM Principles and Zero
failures.
Introduction to jishu hozen (autonomous maintenance) ,steps-

intial cleanup
preventive measures Preparing autonomous standards for TPM
autonomous inspection standardization - autonomous
UNIT – III management,Institutionalize Jishu Hozen - Cause and (5 Sessions)
effectdiagram,ten kinds of human errors different kinds of
defects.
Introduction to Kaizen activities,Mode of failure, collection and
analysis of data, Sporadic and regular failures, causes for machine
UNIT – IV deterioration,design inadequacies, Periodical and predictive (5 Sessions)
maintenance.
UNIT – V Introduction to “Kbestu kaizen”, defining the contributory (5 Sessions)

problem and collection of data, categorise loss plan , “Hinhitsu

Hozen “zero defect quality maintenance ,eight pillars of TPM five
principles of TPM
Human factors in maintenance ,maintenance manuals

,maintenance staffing methods, queuing applications, simulation,
spare parts management, maintenance planning and scheduling
UNIT – VI Condition Monitoring Techniques– Vibration Monitoring, (5 Sessions)
Signature Analysis Wear Debris Monitoring – Maintenance
Management Information System - Expert systems –
Corrosion Monitoring and Control.
Text Books:
 Dale H.Besterfiled, et al., “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education, Inc. 2003.
(Indian reprint 2004). ISBN 81-297-0260-6.
Reference Books:
 James R.Evans & William M.Lidsay, “The Management and Control of Quality”, (5th
Edition), South-Western (Thomson Learning), 2002 (ISBN 0-324-06680-5).
 Feigenbaum.A.V. “Total Quality Management”, McGraw-Hill, 1991.
Oakland.J.S. “Total Quality Management”, Butterworth Hcinemann Ltd., Oxford, 1989.
 Narayana V. and Sreenivasan, N.S. “Quality Management – Concepts and Tasks”, New Age
International 1996.
 Zeiri. “Total Quality Management for Engineers”, Wood Head Publishers, 1991.
 Lt. Gen. H.LaI, "Total Quality management", Wiley Eastern Limited, 1990. .
 Greg Bounds. “Beyond Total Quality Management”. McGraw Hill, 1994. 3. Menon, H.G,
"TQM in New Product manufacturing", McGraw Hill 1992.
Learning Outcome
 Understand the core features of the operations and production management function at the
operational and strategic levels, specifically the relationships between people, process,
technology, productivity and quality and how it contributes to the competitiveness of firms.
 Explain the various parts of the operations and production management processes and their
interaction with other business functions (strategy, engineering, finance, marketing, HRM,
project management and innovation
Course Outline
Purchase Management
Course Code: MBAE0079 Year: II Trimester: VI Max. Hours:
30
Preamble: Purchasing is an integral part of any organization. The role of purchasing is not
only limited to the procurement of materials but now a days it is also considered as a medium
for gaining competitive advantage. This course puts emphasis on the fact that how purchasing
can be a key to success for any organization.
 To explain the social fundamentals of purchasing management.

 To understand policies and procedures of purchasing
 To understand the role of purchasing in strategic decision making
The role of purchasing in business, relationship with other
departments, procedures, forms and records, basic
UNIT – I policies/planning, organization, purchasing control, budgeting, (5 Sessions)
purchasing ethics/ public relations
Sourcing, quality, quality control, quantity determination, right
UNIT –II time, price, surplus materials (5 Sessions)
Purchasing capital equipment, contract buying, retail buying,
engineering and construction contracting, state and institutional
UNIT – III purchasing, international buying, make or buy, negotiations, (5 Sessions)
purchasing research/value analysis, measuring purchasing
performance.
Purchasing Function Objectives, Scope and Importance,
Organisation for Purchasing, Centralisation vs. Decentralisation,
Delegation of Powers, Purchasing Cycle Elements and their
UNIT – IV Importance, Purchase Policies and Procedures, 5Rs of (5 Sessions)
Purchasing and Related issues, Technical, Commercial and
Legal Aspects of Purchasing
Import Policy and Procedures Capital Goods and Project
Imports, Spares, Consumables and Components, Specific
UNIT – V Licensing Provisions, Project Buying and Related Aspects, (5 Sessions)
Vendor Rating and Source Location, Negotiations in
Purchasing, Outsourcing Management
strategic purchasing management, the future of purchasing:
UNIT – VI developing lean supply, partnership sourcing, network souring, (5 Sessions)
benchmarking, buying decision models, purchasing market
research, the role of information technology in purchasing and

the portfolio of purchasing skills..

Reference Books:
 Monczka, Robert, Trent, Robert and Handfield, Robert, Purchasing and Supply Chain
Management, 3rd. Edition,Cincinnati, Ohio: Thomson South-Western College
Publishing, 2005.
Learning Outcomes
 General knowledge about purchasing and supplier management
 General knowledge about logistics management
 Specific knowledge about models and theoretical concepts related to the following
themes: logistics costs and value, logistics strategies, global supply chains, risk in supply
chains, supply chain management, development of the purchasing function, make-or-buy,
purchasing strategies, electronic purchasing, purchasing specifications, supplier
development, supplier relationships, supply networks, strategic alignment of purchasing
and logistics, organization of purchasing and logistics, performance measurement,
supplier selection, cost-benefit analysis, involving suppliers in product development,
sustainable purchasing and logistics, public procurement.
 Analyzing a company’s strategic situation, with a particular emphasis on its purchasing
function, logistics function and supplier network
 Developing suggestions for change and development of a company’s strategies for the
purchasing function, including management of supplier relationships and networks and
the logistics function
Management of Commercial Banks and Retail Banking

Preamble:This course is designed to provide deep understanding of fundamentals of
banking operations and importance of banking system in an economy. While the course
focuses on operational aspects of banks, it also includes the operations of retail banking in
detail as there remains more focus to increase the retail business. The regulatory aspects and
performance evaluation parameters have also been covered. A broad view on corporate
banking operations, prudential norms for banks, ancillary services including Payment services
have also been incorporated in the course. The overall objective is to familiarize the students
with basic concepts of banking services.

 To have comprehensive understanding fundamental aspects of banking operations
 To get familiarize with the operations of retail banking including the project appraisal
 To understand the corporate banking operations
 To understand the parameters effecting banking performance
 To know the regulatory mechanism in the banking sector
Fundamentals of commercial banking :The evolution of

commercial banks in India, phases of growth and their
contribution in the economic growth. Types of banks, functions of
UNIT – I banks, types of services provided by the banks (5 Sessions)
Regulatory Mechanism:Role of the Reserve Bank of India,
Banking Regulations Act , Mandatory Reserves Requirements
(CRR & SLR) and their calculation
The Asset & Liabilities in Banks: Types of deposits and their
features, types of loans & advance s, the concept of asset-liability
management and their management.
UNIT –II Retail Banking:Concept of retail banking, retail assets and retail (4 Sessions)
liabilities, trends in retail banking business, types of services in
retail banking.
Credit appraisal of Retail Loans:

Assessment of technical viability and economic feasibility of
retail loans, risk assessment in retail loans, process of assessment
UNIT – III of retail loans. (6 Sessions)
Pricing of retail loans:
Factors affecting pricing of retail loans, Credit scoring model of
retail loans, CIBIL Score
Marketing of retail loans: Marketing strategies, types of
customers, personal Banking services, CRM Practices
UNIT – IV Payment services management: (5 Sessions)
Payment system, payment infrastructure, Clearing & settlement
mechanism, innovative payment products.
An overview of corporate banking:
UNIT – V Assessment of working capital finance, appraisal of term loans, (5 Sessions)
loan pricing, loan syndication, Innovative financing instruments
Performance Analysis of Banks:
The parameters of banks’ performance appraisal, Prudential
UNIT – VI norms, Capital structure-Basel norms, Management of non- (5 Sessions)
performing assets

Text Books:
 Singh & Dutta (2013), Management of Commercial Banks- Tata McGraw-Hill Company
Limited.
Reference Books:
- Padmalatha Suresh & Justin Paul, (2010) , Mangement of Banking and Financial
Services, Pearson, Delhi
- Arora (2014), Principles of Banking, S chand & sons, Delhi
- Annual Reports of RBI
- “The Banker”, A Journal of Indian Banks Association
Learning Outcomes:
 Basic understanding of banking operations
 Practical aspects of retail banking
 An overview of corporate banking
 Bank performance evaluation
Security Analysis and Portfolio Management

evidence related to investment analysis and portfolio management. An emphasis is placed on
understanding how an investment decision is taken and portfolio management helps in
optimization of risk and return. It also offers an in depth understanding of various fundamental
and technical analysis tools to make an optimum management decision. Emphasis will be put
on development of techniques that should be part of the tool kit of those interested in
becoming professional investors and/or researchers in finance.

 To have comprehensive understanding of investment alternatives, mechanism and process
 To ensure acquaintance of in-depth understanding of fundamental and technical analysis tools to
make optimum investment decision
 To inculcatethe ability to construct and analyze a portfolio of investments.
Investment Environment: Investment Alternatives, , Investment

Approaches, Structure of Investment Market
Equity Trading Procedure: Orders, Matching, Clearing and
Settlement
UNIT – I Regulatory Mechanism: SEBI and its Guidelines; Investor (5 Sessions)
Protection
Market Efficiency:Efficient Market Hypothesis(EMH) & its
implications for investment decision
Concept of Return: Historical and Expected Return, Measures of
Return
Concept of Risk: Historical and Expected Risk, Systematic and
UNIT –II Unsystematic Risk (4 Sessions)
Measures of Risk: Standard Deviation, Variance, Coefficient of
Variance, Beta, Value at Risk
Technical Analysis:
Technical Charts: Line, Bar, Candle, Point and Figure Charts;
Sentiment Indicators & Breadth Indicators
UNIT – III Oscillators: Relative Strength Index, MACD, William % R, ROC, (6 Sessions)
TRIX, Momentum, Stochastic
Fundamental Analysis: Economy, Industry and Company
Analysis, An Illustration of Banking Industry
Valuation of Equity: Nature of equity instruments, Equity

Valuation Models.
UNIT – IV Valuation of Fixed Income Securities: (5 Sessions)
Nature of Bonds, Bond Prices and Yields, Term Structure of
Interest Rates, Bond Theorem
Portfolio Theory & Equilibrium in Capital Markets:
Portfolio Return & Risk, Efficient Frontier, Optimal Portfolio,
UNIT – V Risk-less Lending & Borrowing, Optimal Risky Portfolio, (5 Sessions)
Capital Asset Pricing Model, Single-Index and Multifactor
Models, Arbitrage Pricing Theory,
Portfolio Management: Portfolio Management Process, Banks
as PMS provider
UNIT – VI Portfolio Management and Performance Evaluation: (5 Sessions)
Performance Evaluation of Existing Portfolio: Sharpe, Treynor,
Jenson, Fama Measures
Text Books:
 Chandra, P. (2008). Investment Analysis & Portfolio Management. New Delhi: Tata
McGraw-Hill Company Limited.
Reference Books:
 Bodie, Zvi, K., Alex, Marcus, Alan, J. & Pitabas, M. (2008). Investments. Tata McGraw-
Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi.
 Jones, C. P. (2008). Investment Analysis & Management. New York: John Wiley &
Sons.
 Sharpe, W. (2008). Investments. New Delhi: Prentice Hall India.
 Fischer & Jordan (2008). Security Analysis & Portfolio Management. New Delhi:
Pearson Education.
 Ranganatham & Madhumati (2008). Investment Analysis & Portfolio Management. New Delhi:
Pearson Education.
 Kester, Ruback & Tufano (2007). Case problems in Finance. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-
Hill.
 Indian Securities Market Review (2009), www.nseindia.com.
 The Fact Book (2009). www.nseindia.com.
Learning Outcomes:
 Acquaintance of learners with contemporary investment alternatives and determining
their risk-return propositions
 Assessment of Risks involved in capital market investments and optimizing returns for
the same
 Understanding of fundamental and technical analysis to identify correct ‘entry’ and ‘exit’
time.
 Exposure to real life buzzes of portfolio formation, evaluation and revision.
Investment Banking
Preamble:The course on Investment banking is designed to provide a broad view and
practical understanding about the functioning of capital markets in India. The capital markets
are primarily responsible for raising resources for the corporate sector on one side while on
the other they facilitate value addition to the existing securities through stock exchanges. The
investment banks are involved in public issue management, underwriting, private placements
etc. Therefore, Investment banker has to be equipped with fundamentals of pricing of new
issues, process and procedure of capital issue management. This course is basically framed
keeping all these aspects into consideration.

 To understand in depth the functioning of capital markets in India
 To assess and evaluate the capital issues in terms of pricing, risk factors etc
 To manage the public issues and their monitoring including listing
 To understand the process of private placement
 To analyze the significance of new and innovative capital market instruments
Functions of Investment Banks:History and growth of

Investment banks in India, difference between commercial banks
and Investment banks, functions and role of investment banks
UNIT – I Capital Markets: Types of capital markets, types of securities, (5 Sessions)
various participants in capital markets, regulatory mechanism-role
of Securities & Exchange Board of India (SEBI)
Public Issue Management: IPO and FPO -Process and
procedure of capital Issue Management, Book Building process,
Management of Public Issues-Pre and Post activities. Offer
UNIT –II document, (6 Sessions)
Pricing of the Issue: Basic Pricing Models of public Issues,
equity Valuation, Price band, final pricing, issue size and
allocation for different kinds of Investors
Underwriting:
Concept of underwriting and its significance, Role of
underwriters, Costs in a public issue, ASBA and registration to
UNIT – III the Issue (4 Sessions)
Listing of the Issue
Listing as mandatory requirement, process of listing, SEBI
guidelines for the Listed companies.
Private Placement: The concept of private equity, preferential

Issues, Rights shares, Bonus shares, Qualified Institutional
Placements
Debt Market: Growth of debt markets in India, private
placement of debt, Non convertible Debentures and their listing
Capital Issue of SMEs :

Guidelines for capital Issue management by SMEs, Listing and
Issue without IPO, IPO grading, credit rating of IPOs, IPP and
UNIT – V OFS-SEAS, Fast track issues (5 Sessions)
Other Services of Investment Banks
Advisory services, Portfolio Management, Broking services etc.
An overview of International Capital markets::

International capital market instruments- ADR/GDR, IDRs,
UNIT – VI Integration between Indian capital market and global markets.
(4 Sessions)

Text Books:
 Tapan Jindal(2013). Investment Banking, Bharat Law House
Reference Books/Journals:
 H R Machiraju (2013), Merchant Banking- Principles & Practices WILEY, India
 P.G.Subramanyam (2008), Investment Banking, Tata Mac Graw Hills
 Joseph Wechsberg, (2014), The Merchant Banker, Dover Publivations,INC, MINEOLA,
New York
 SEBI Website & NSE Website
 IBA Journal, Mumbai
Learning Outcomes:
 Students will have detailed knowledge of functions of capital markets
 A practical orientation to public issue management
 Understanding the role and responsibilities of Investment bankers
 An overview of International capital market instruments
 An understanding about contemporary issues in public issue management
Financial Markets and Institutions

Preamble:Finance is at the heart of corporate strategy. It provided the tools and language
which inform strategic choice, and prioritise which maximum shareholder value. For emerging
economies, financially educated students can help ensure that the financial sector marks an
effective contribution to real economic growth and poverty reduction.
This course will provide an insight of Indian Banking System, Mutual Fund Industry,
Insurance Industry and other financial institutions and services.

 To give the students an sight into the principles, operational policies and practices of the
prominent Financial Markets and Institutions, their structure and functioning in the
changing economic scenario, and to make critical appraisal of the working of the specific
financial institutions of India.

Mutual Fund – origin and growth of mutual fund, Constituents
and management of Mutual Fund – sponsors, trustees, AMCs and
UNIT – I custodian, Type of mutual fund schemes, benefits of mutual fund (5 Sessions)
as an investment option, Recent developments in mutual fund
industry
Leasing & Hire Purchase – concept of lease & hire purchase,
UNIT –II lease vs. hire purchase, benefits to lesser and lessee. (5 Sessions)
Factoring Services: concept of factoring, Evaluation of factoring
and In house management of receivables, Forefaiting, Difference
UNIT – III between factoring & Forefaiting (5 Sessions)
Securitization: Concept of Securitization, process of
Securitization, structuring a securitization deal, Securitization and
SARFAISI Act.
Management of development Financial Institutions:
Meaning and importance of development financial institutions.

UNIT – IV IDBI, ICICI, IFCI, NABARD and SFCs, EXIM Bank.National
(5 Sessions)
Housing Bank – introduction, functions and major objectives.
Venture Capital:
Merchant banking – origin and development of merchant
banking in India. Importance of merchant bankers, guidelines of
UNIT – V SEBI towards merchant banking. Credit rating agencies
(6 Sessions)
Venture Capital – concept and importance of venture capital,
venture capital in India, guidelines for venture capital.
Management of NBFCs :
Non Banking Financial Institutions – Activities and Role of
UNIT – VI NBFC; Regulatory Framework of NBFC; Concept of Shadow (4 Sessions)
Banking.

Text Books:
 Frank J. Fabozzi, F. Modigiliani, Foundation of Financial Markets & Institutions (Third
Edition), Pearson Education.
 Meir Kohn, Financial Institutions & Markets, TATA McGraw Hill.
 M Y Khan. Indian Financial System (Fourth Edition), TATA McGraw Hill.
 Madura, Financial Markets & Institutions, Cengage, New Delhi
Reference Books:
 Bharti V Pathak. (2010). Indian Financial System. Pearson Publication
Learning Outcomes
 To understand basics of banking and regulatory framework in India
 Understanding concepts and relevance of NPA and its management
 Evaluating the source of finance SFCs, merchant banking and NBFCS
 Conceptual knowledge regarding investment products and their regulatory

framework.
Risk Management in Banks and Derivatives

Preamble:Risk management has become one of the most important aspects in

recent times in banks. This course offers wide understanding of risk management
in banks and various mechanisms to manage risks. With the advent of financial
derivatives, this has become relatively easy. At the same time, as financial
derivatives work as double edged weapons, a considerable large number of
investors lost their money as they wrongly used them. This course aims to build
awareness of applicability of derivatives for risk management.
 To explore various risk management issues and mechanism to deal with risk
management in banks
 To make the students aware about various financial derivatives available and
evaluate how these financial derivatives are used to minimize risk
 To learn when and how to use a particular financial derivative
Risk Management in Banks: Basel Framework, Customer Risk

UNIT – I Categorization (CRC), NPA Provisioning Norms, SARFAESI (4 Sessions)
Act
Derivatives:Overview, Type of Derivative Contracts: Forwards,
UNIT –II Futures, Options & Swap, Role of Derivatives in Hedging, (4 Sessions)
Speculation & Arbitrage
Option Contracts: Option Terminology, Options Payoffs,
Application of Payoffs
Exotic Options: Asian, Bermudan, Compound, Binary, Barrier,
UNIT – III Look back, Shout, Chooser (7 Sessions)
Pricing of Options: Variables affecting Price of Options,
Binomial Model and Black-Scholes Model for Option Pricing
Option Greeks: Delta, Gamma, Theta, Vega & Rho
Fundamentals of Futures: Difference between Forward &
UNIT – IV Futures, Comparison between Futures and Options, Futures
(6 Sessions)
Terminology, Margins, Daily Mark-to-Market and Final

Settlement, Contango and Backwardation, Payoff Matrix from
Futures, Hedging with Futures
Swaps: Interest Rate Swaps, Currency Swaps, Utility and
UNIT –V Functioning of Swaps, Bank’s Role in facilitating Swaps (4 Sessions)
Credit Derivatives: Credit Risk & Rating, Collateralized Debt
UNIT – VI Obligations (CDO), Credit Default Swaps (CDS), Valuation of (5 Sessions)
CDS
Text Books:
 Hull, J. C. (2006). Options, futures, and other derivatives. Pearson Education India
Reference Books:
 Gupta S. L. (2010). Financial Derivatives. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India Limited.
 Hirsa, A., & Neftci, S. N. (2013). An introduction to the mathematics of financial
derivatives. Academic Press.
 Gupta, S. L. (2005). Financial Derivatives: Theory, concepts and problems. PHI
Learning Pvt. Ltd..
 Hunt, P., & Kennedy, J. (2004). Financial derivatives in theory and practice. John Wiley
& Sons.
Learning Outcomes:
 Awareness of Financial Derivatives and their implications for risk minimization and
trading benefits
 Understanding of mechanism of F&O Segments and it’s implication for retail investors
 Formulation of real time option combinations strategies as a retail trader and assessment
of pay-offs.
 Conditional applications of various financial derivatives in various real-life scenarios.
Rural Banking and Microfinance

Course Code: MBA512E42 Year: II Trimester: V Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:The subject intends to deliver the comprehensive knowledge of Rural Banking
Microfinance in Indian context with a lot of focus on its practical implication. The course
intends to provide a thorough knowledge of the concept of Rural Banking and microfinance and
how rural banking and microfinance institutions work, including the operational aspects of an
SHG/ MFI and to build up the financial literacy of the students aspiring careers in rural
banking and microfinance sector.

 To provide a thorough knowledge of the concept of Rural Banking and microfinance and how
rural banking and microfinance institutions work, including the operational aspects of an SHG/
MFI.
 To build up the financial literacy of the students aspiring careers in rural banking and
microfinance sector.
Organization of Rural Credit in India

Sources of credit for Indian Farmers, Credit delivery mechanism
in Rural finance: Multi agency approach. Rural cooperative
UNIT – I credit societies. Long-term rural credit: cooperative agriculture (5Sessions)
and rural development banks(CARDBS), Evolution of Micro
Finance Institutions in India.
Banks and Rural credit

Commercial banks and rural development, RBI guidelines for
the financing of agriculture by commercial banks, Lead bank
UNIT –II scheme, Regional Rural Banks (RRBs): introduction , progress (5 Sessions)
and evaluation of RRBs, NABARD: its functions and role in
rural credit
Perspectives of Microfinance:
Microfinance, Need of Microfinance, Evolution and Character of
Microfinance in India, Microfinance Product Portfolio, Key
UNIT – III Principles of Microfinance, Dilemmas in Contemporary (5 Sessions)
Microfinance Functioning, Microfinance as a Tool for
Development and inclusive growth of India
Microfinance Delivery Methodologies:
Self Help Group Model, Federated Self Help Group Model,
Association Model, Community Banking Model, Grameen Bank
UNIT – IV Model, Cooperative / Mutually Aided Cooperative Model, (5 Sessions)
Rotating Savings and Credit Association (ROSCA), Non
Banking Finance Company (NBFC) Model
SHG-Bank Linkage Programme:

Overview, Evolution, Need, Models of Linkage between Banks
UNIT – V and Self-Help Groups, Impact, Progress, Promotional Initiatives, (6 Sessions)
Issues in SHG – Bank Linkage Programme, Challenges
Operational aspects of Micro Finance

Accounting and Financial Reporting, Financial Analysis,
UNIT – VI Revenue Model, Operating Costs and Efficiency, Products and (4 Sessions)
Services, Risk Management, Credit Bureaus and Credit Scoring

Text Books:
 Indian Institute of Banking and Finance. (2008). Micro-Finance: Perspectives and

Operations; Macmillan India Limited.
 Panda D. K. (2009). Understanding Microfinance; Wiley India Publication.
Reference Book:
 Rhyne, E. (2009). Edition I. Microfinance for Bankers and Investors: Understanding the
Opportunities and Challenges of the Market at the Bottom of the Pyramid. Tata McGraw
Hill Publication, New Delhi.
 Kanhaiya Singh (2015), Micro Finance, Vikas Publishing House
Learning Outcomes
 Understand the concept of rural banking and microfinance and operational aspects of an
SHG/MFI.
 Develop their awareness regarding careers related opportunities associated with rural
Principles and Practices of Life Insurance

Preamble:The subject intends to deliver the comprehensive knowledge of Rural Banking
Microfinance in Indian context with a lot of focus on its practical implication. The course
intends to provide a thorough knowledge of the concept of Rural Banking and microfinance and
how rural banking and microfinance institutions work, including the operational aspects of an
SHG/ MFI and to build up the financial literacy of the students aspiring careers in rural
 To provide a knowledge and understanding related with basic concepts of Life Insurance.
 To develop application skills of life insurance aspect.
 To enhance capability for appropriate administration and the legal and regulatory
influences on the conduct of life insurance business.
Life Insurance System:Organizational structure Important

Activities, Fundamentals of Insurance Business, The Distribution,
System, Appointment of Agent, Functions of Agents, Remuneration
UNIT I of Agents, Trends in Distribution Channels; Plans of Life Insurance (5 Sessions)
: Need Levels, Basic Elements, Some Popular Plans, Limited
Payment Plans, Participating Policies, Convertible Plans, Riders, For
the Handicapped; Annuities : Nature of Annuities, Types.
Group Insurance : Nature of Group Insurance, Types, Group
Gratuity Schemes, Ways of Meeting Gratuity Liability, Group
Superannuation Schemes, Other Group Schemes, Social Security
Schemes; Other Special Need Plans : Industrial Life Insurance,
Salary Saving Schemes, Additional Benefits, Married Women’s
Property Act.
Principles of Life Insurance: Principal of Utmost Good Faith,
Insurable Interest, Application and Acceptance : Prospectus,
Proposal Form & Other Related Documents, Medical Examination,
UNIT III Age Proof, Special Report, Specimen of Proposal Form; Policy (6 Sessions)
Document : Need and Format, Policy Preamble, Schedule,
Attestation, Conditions and Privileges, Alteration, Duplicate Policy,
Specimen of Policy Document.
Premium Payment, Lapse and Renewal: Premium, Surrender
Values, Non- Forfeiture Options, Revival; Assignment Nomination
Loans – Surrenders – Foreclosure: Assignment, Nomination, Loan
and Surrenders, Foreclosure.
The Conceptual Framework of Insurance, The Insurance Device, The
UNIT V (4 Sessions)
Professional Approach, The Classification of Insurance Business,
The Financial Aspects of Insurance Business.

Policy Claims : Maturity Claims Survival Benefits, Death Claims,
Claim Concession Presumption of Death, Accident Benefit Options,
Settlement Options, Valuation and Surplus, Reinsurance,
UNIT VI Regulatory Mechanism (6 Sessions)
Exchange Control Regulations, Consumer Protection Act.
Ombudsman, Information Technology, IRDA Regulations,
Investment norms for life insurance companies..
Text Book:
 Kutty S. & Mishra P.(2009). Life Insurance. Insurance Institute of India
Reference Books:
 Module II, Principles and Practice of Life Insurance, The Institute of Chartered
Accountants of India: New Delhi.
 Black, Jr. Kenneth and Harold Skipper Jr., Life and Health Insurance, Prentice Hall, Inc.,
England.
 K.C. Mishra and C.S. Kumar, Life Insurance: Principles and Practice, Cengage Learning:
New Delhi.
 H. Sadhak, Life Insurance in India, Respose Books: New Delhi.
Suggested Journals & Magazines:
 Journal of the Insurance Institute of India
 Insurance Chronicle
 Life Insurance Today
 Journal of Insurance Regulations
Learning outcomes:
At the end of the course, student should be able to:

 Compare and contrast the types of life assurance available in the market.
 Applying the life assurance knowledge and skills in different scenarios.
 Demonstrate their effective administrative capability in coordination with legal and
regulatory influences on the conduct of life insurance business.
Fundamentals of General Insurance
Course Code: MBAE0043 Year: I Trimester: VI Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:Principles and Practices of Genral Insurance is concerned with providing

information to professionals related to legislation, insurance market, Insurance forms,
different general insurance coverages and claim settlement procedures so thatthey can utilize
this knowledge as per the situation in hand.
This course introduces student to the fundamentals of General Insurance. For better
managerial decision making it’s important for the student to understand these General
Insurance concept and their practical implications which can bring significant difference in
their managerial decision.

 To help students understand general Insurance Market in India.
 To examine the issues related to risk management in view of insurance.
 To acquaint the student with different policies of general insurance.
Insurance Legislation: General Insurance
Business(Nationalisation) Act 1972, The Insurance Act, 1938,
Insurance Regulatory Authority, Consumer Protection Act 1986.
The Insurance Market: Structure of General Insurance
Unit -I (4 Sessions)
Corporation of India, The Subsidiary Companies, Insurance
business by private sector. Insurance Agents, Insurance
Intermediaries in Overseas Markets, Tariff Advisory Committee,
Loss Prevention Associations of India Ltd.
Insurance Forms: Proposal Forms – Cover Notes, Certificate of
Unit- II Insurance, Policy Forms, Endorsements, Interpretation of Policies, (5 Sessions)
Co-insurance, Renewal Notice.
Fire and Marine Coverage: Standard Policies, Specified Perils
vs All Risks, Fire Insurance Coverage, Reinstatement Value
Policies, Declaration Policy, Floating Policies, Building in Course
UNIT- III (6 Sessions)
of Erection, Consequential Loss (Fire Insurance), Marine
Insurance Coverages, Hull Insurance, Marine (Cargo) Insurance,
Types of Marine Policies.
Miscellaneous Coverage: Motor Insurance, Third Party Insurance

on Inland Vessels, Personal Accident Insurance, Medical Policies,
Unit- IV Burglary Insurance, Legal Liability Insurance, Fidelity Guarantee (5 Sessions)
Insurance, Other Classes of Miscellaneous Insurance, Aviation
Insurance, Engineering Insurance, Non Traditional Classes, Rural
Insurance, New Covers.

Specialised Insurance: Industrial All Risk Insurance, Project and
Advance Loss of Profits Insurance, Oil and Gas Insurance,
Satellite Insurance; Rating – Premium : Tariff rating, Market
Agreement, Physical and Moral Hazard, Premium, Short Period
Unit- V (6 Sessions)
Scales, Advance Payment of Premium, Relaxation; Underwriting
Practice : Acceptance of New Business, New Business Procedure,
Renewal Procedure, Reinsurance Practice, Risk Inspection, Risk
Management, .
Claims: Preliminary Procedure : Investigation and Assessment,
Surveyors & Loss Assessors, Claims Documents, Arbitration,
Unit -VI (4 Sessions)
Limitation, Settlement, Loss Minimisation and Salvage, In House
Settlement, Practice in U.K., Practice in USA.
Text Books:
 Insurance Institute of India – IC 32- Practice of General Insurance
 Insurance Institute of India – IC 45- General Insurance Underwriting
Reference Books:
 Module I, Principles and Practice of General Insurance, The Institute of Chartered
Accountants of India: New Delhi.
 H Narayanan, Indian Insurance: A Profile, Jaico Publishing House: Mumbai.
 K.C. Mishra and G.E. Thomas, General Insurance - Principles and Practice, Cengage
Learning: New Delhi
Suggested Journals& Magazines:
 Journal of the Insurance Institute of India
 Journal of Insurance Regulations
Learning outcomes:
 Students will be able to understand various concepts related to general insurance.
 Students will be familiar with issues related to risk management in relation to insurance.
 Students will be able to distinguish between different policies of general insurance.
International Banking
Preamble:Indian banks are expanding their geographical horizons like never before. Indian
Industry is booming and banks will have to offer international finance on a major scale. This
course helps the candidate in acquiring a conceptual grasp over the entire gamut of
international and wholesale banking operations including ALM, Risk and Profitability
Management. It will help the candidates to understand legal and regulatory framework conflict
of laws and jurisdiction, sovereign risk, etc.

 To develop the concept of the international banking operating within the parameters of the
 To understand the place of international banking within the economic system
 To impart knowledge about, and encourage awareness of, current issues, facts and events
in international banking.
International Banking Operations (I):
International banking overview- meaning, evolution, international
financial centers off-shore banking units, profitability of
UNIT – I international banking operations. (5 Sessions)
Wholesale banking, retail banking, private banking, inter-bank
business, Investment Banking, Correspondent Banking
International Banking Operations (II):

International financial institutions-IMF, IBRD, BIS, IFC, ADB,
UNIT –II WTO (6 Sessions)
Asset Liability Management, Treasury Risk management.
International Banking Operations (III):
Treasury and Risk Mitigation, FOREX Market FEMA and
Regulatory Framework in India, Letter of Credit mechanism and
UNIT – III UCPDC / URC / URR Buyer’s / Sellers credit, Bilateral trade, (4 Sessions)
counter trade, high seas sales
UNIT – IV International corporate finance- (5 Sessions)

fundamental principle of lending MNC, International credit

rating agencies and global capital markets, Raising resources and
its deployment, ECBs / FCNRs, Syndicated Loans, Project and
Infrastructure Finance, Role of FIIs, FDIs, ADR/GDR
Legal & regulatory framework -
Basel norms, International law, Exchange management and
controls, International loan agreements, Country risk and bank
UNIT – V risk management ,International debt management, Anti money (5 Sessions)
laundering laws
Special Issues-
Technology and international banking, globalization trends ,
UNIT – VI financial innovations in international banking, Global financial
(5 Sessions)
crisis

Text Books:
 International banking legal & regulatory aspects by IBF Mac Millan publisher
International Banking and Finance,Lees, Francis A.Edition Number1,Palgrave Macmillan UK
Reference Books
 Management of Banking and Financial services, 2 nd Edition- Padmalathe Suresh &

Justin Paul, Pearson
 Asian Development Bank Report
 International Monetary Fund Report
Learning Outcomes
 Understand the concept of international banking the parameters of the internal and
external environment.
 The awareness about current practices latest emerging opportunities and issues.
 Understanding about FOREX market functioning.
Trimester IV
Course Outline
Business Modeling With Spreadsheets
Preamble:Business Modeling is a new approach for integrating data from multiple tables &
effectively building a relational data source in an Excel workbook. Within Excel, using Data
Models transparencies, providing tabular data to be used in PivotTables, Pivot Charts, and
Power View reports.
The objective of this course is not only to make the students to get a basic understanding of
statistical techniques, but also to develop the skill to apply the techniques in practical cases which
can be used in their projects and also when the students enter the industry after finishing their
courses.
To make students aware with the use of analytical techniques to solve real-time business
problems. The solutions to problems contain step-by-step instructions and Excel screen shots to
reinforce the understanding of the topics.
System view of business, various business functions, Business
UNIT – I decision making process. Risk and uncertainty in business (6 Sessions)
decision making, Business modeling, Steps in model building.
Types of models-Deterministic, Probabilsitic and Non-
probabilistic models and application of the corresponding tool for
UNIT –II the analysis, e.g. Linear programming, statistical methods viz, (4 Sessions)
descriptive statistics; probability and inferential statistics.
Decision tree and Simulation.
Introduction to Excel, application of excel functions-range name,
Lookup, INDEX, match, Text, Date and Day, Paste and Paste
special, Goal seek, Scenario Manager. The COUNTIF,
UNIT – III COUNTIFS, COUNT, COUNTA and COUNTBLANK (5 Sessions)
functions, The SUMIF, AVERAGEIF, SUMIFS and
AVERAGEIFS functions, Conditional formatting
Summarizing data by using histograms, Summarizing data by
UNIT – IV using descriptive statistics, Using PivotTables and slicers to (6 Sessions)
describe data.
Application of excel in marketing models: Predicting sales with
UNIT – V Excel’s CORREL and TRENDLINE functions, Times series (5 Sessions)
forecasting using moving averages, exponential smoothing and

trend line method, Evaluating excel forecast by the analysis of
forecasting errors.
Application of excel in Location model. Transportation and
UNIT – VI Assignment Models, production scheduling model, EOQ model (4 Sessions)
and financial planning models.
Text Book:
 John F. Barlow (2005), Excel Models forBusiness and OperationsManagement John
Wiley and Sons.
Reference Books:
 David Whigham (2007). Business Data Analysis Using Excel. Oxford
 Wayne L. Winston (2013) Microsoft Excel 2013: Data Analysis and Business Modeling. PHI
Learning Outcomes
On successful completion of the module, students will be able to:
 Appreciate the nature of modelling and how real-world systems may be represented in
mathematical form and realised on a computer.
 Determine when a real problem is in the non - standard form and represent it.
 Use the quantitative and statistical facilities of industry-standard spreadsheet software.
 Build spreadsheet models for the analysis of real-world problems using the approaches.
Data Environment and Management

Preamble:A wealth of invaluable information exists in unstructured textual form, but

organizations have found it very difficult to access and utilize it. This complexity is changing
rapidly: new approaches have finally made it possible to glean useful knowledge from virtually
any collection of unstructured data. Data environment & management is an important subject
in such cases.

 Toknow how to organize data for easy accessibility,
 To make students aware with different type of data sets in different environment
 Follow best practices for storage and backup to protect files from loss
 Document data so that anyone can follow what you did
 Properly cite and follow license conditions when using another researcher’s data
Understanding about Data and its formats What is data? What

unstructured data is, and how it differs from structured data, First
UNIT – I generation technology for handling unstructured data, from search (5 Sessions)
engines to ECM--and its limitations
What is variable?, What is ASCII data?, Example of *.csv data,
Example of tab separated data, Example of space separated data,
Example of text data, Example of plain data, Example of excel
UNIT –II data, (6 Sessions)
What is categorical data?: Nominal data, Ordinal data, What is
quantitative data?, Discrete data, Continuous data,
Understanding different Data Environments, Different Operating
System driven File Systems, Language driven file system,
UNIT – III Application driven file systems, Storage device driven file (4 Sessions)
systems
Introduction to XML, Introduction to XML and its data store

UNIT – IV principles, Managing XML data for data analysis (5 Sessions)
Data Preparation for Analysis, Identifying Business Problem,

developing cognitive maps, Data preparation using SPSS:
UNIT – V Metadata preparation, Data validation, Model preparation (5 Sessions)
UNIT – VI Cases discussion (5 Sessions)

Text Books:
 William H. Inmon (Author), Anthony Nesavich (2007). Tapping into Unstructured Data:
Integrating Unstructured Data and Textual Analytics into Business Intelligence. Prentice
Hall; 1 edition
 Radha Shankarmani (Author), M. Vijayalakshmi (2016). Big Data Analytics. Wiley;
Second edition
Learning Outcomes
By the end of this coursestudent will be able to:
 Recognise different type of data , data management in different type of environment,

management plan and its constituent parts
 Explain the purpose of a data management plan and how you can apply it to your
research and business decision making
 Started to construct your own data management plan
Data Mining
Preamble:This course will explore Data Mining theory and examine related applications.
Applications include mining of financial data, web data, multimedia and biological data. The
course will provide students with the tools for discovering information in large data sets. Data
mining refers to knowledge discovery from huge amount of data, and finding non-trivial
conclusions.
 Preparing students for data mining, statistics, data visualization, business intelligence,
knowledge mining, and databases, with a focus on analysis of large data sets.
 The course will target at least one new data mining problem involving real data, for
which the students will have to find a solution.
Basics of Data Mining, Need for Data Mining, Data Mining

UNIT – I Overview, Data Mining Tools
(5 Sessions)
Data preparation in Data Mining, Data preparation and
UNIT –II integration, Graphic representation (5 Sessions)
UNIT – III Attribute selection, Attribute transformation (5 Sessions)
Data mining techniques, Decision trees, Association rules

Bayesian networks, Clustering
Model Evaluation, Classifiers evaluation, Regression evaluation,
Clustering evaluation, Association Rules evaluation,
UNIT – VI Combination & comparing several of models
(5 Sessions)

Text Books:
 Dunham, Margaret H. Data mining: Introductory and advanced topics. Pearson
Education India, 2006.
 Han, Jiawei, Jian Pei, and Micheline Kamber. Data mining: concepts and techniques.
Elsevier, 2011.
 Tan, Pang-Ning. Introduction to data mining. Pearson Education India, 2006.
 Linoff, Gordon S., and Michael JA Berry. Data mining techniques: for marketing,
sales, and customer relationship management. John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
Learning Outcomes
Upon completion of the subject, students will be able to

 examine the concepts of data mining
 apply the concepts of DM techniques for clustering, association, and classification;
 understand the operation procedures of DM projects in an organization;
 select appropriate DM tools and methods to manipulate and achieve data;
 apply DM concepts for formulating business strategies and programs to enhance business
intelligence.
Course Outline
Data Visualization
Preamble:Data visualization is the presentation of data in a pictorial or graphical format. It
enables decision makers to see analytics presented visually, so they can grasp difficult
concepts or identify new patterns. With interactive visualization, you can take the concept a
step further by using technology to drill down into charts and graphs for more detail,
interactively changing what data you see and how it’s processed.

 To recognize the importance of data, their managerial issues, and their life cycle.
 To describe the sources of data, their collection, and quality issues.
Understanding the Tableau workspace, Dimensions and

Measures, Using Show Me!, Tour of Shelves (How shelves and
marks work), Building Basic Views, Help Menu and Samples,
Saving and Sharing your work Introduction to Data Visualization
UNIT – I with Tableau: What is Data Visualization and why does it matter? (6 Sessions)
Connecting to Data and introduction to data source concepts,
Working with data files versus database servers.
The Visualization Design AND Working with Data, Exporting

Data, Connecting Sheets, Making Basic Charts like Line, Bar etc.,
Joining multiple tables, Data Blending, Copy and Paste,
Understand how to deal with data changes in your data source
UNIT –II such as field addition, deletion or name change, reusing and (4 Sessions)
sharing data connections – the concept of metadata, Working with
multiple connections in the same workbook.
Advance Charts and Graphs, Creating Views: Marks, Size and

Transparency, Highlighting, Working with Dates: Date
aggregations and date parts, Discrete versus Continuous, Dual
UNIT – III Axis / Multiple Measures, Combo Charts with different mark (5 Sessions)
types, Geographic Map, Page Trails, Heat Map, Density Chart,
Scatter Plots, Pie Charts and Bar Charts, Small Multiples,
Working with aggregate versus disaggregate data
Sorting & Grouping, Filtering and Quick Filters, Cross-Tabs

(Pivot Tables), Totals and Subtotals, Drilling and Drill Through,
Aggregation and Disaggregation, Percent of Total, Working with
Statistics and Trend lines. Data Organization and Scripting ,
Calculated Metrics, Sorting, Filtering, Totals and Sub Totals,
UNIT – IV Various Aggregated Measures, Percentages, Data Spotlighting,
(6 Sessions)
and Summary Card, Date and time functions, String Functions
and logical functions, Working with String Functions, Basic
Arithmetic Calculations, Date Math, Working with Totals,
Custom Aggregations, Logic Statements
Dashboards, Building a Dashboard, Layout and Formatting,
Interactivity with Actions: Combining multiple visualizations
UNIT – V into a dashboard, Making your worksheet interactive by using (5 Sessions)
actions and filters.
Geocoding and Mapping in Tableau, Latitude and Longitude,

Filled Maps, Symbol Maps, Geo Coding, Online Maps, Sorting
UNIT – VI in Maps.
(4 Sessions)

Text Books:
 Daniel G. Murray (2013), Tableau Your Data, John Wiley and sons
Learning Outcomes

 Relate data management to multimedia and document management.
 Explain the operation of data warehousing and its role in decision support.
Big Data Analysis

Preamble:Big data analytics is the process of examining large and varied data sets -- i.e., big data --
to uncover hidden patterns, unknown correlations, market trends, customer preferences and other useful
information that can help organizations make more-informed business decisions.

The objective is to help students to:
 Understand what Big Data Analytics is
 introduce students the concept and challenge of big data
 Understand the components necessary to build a Big Data Analytics System;
Introduction to Big Data, Introduction to Data Visualization,

Business Drivers that have led to Big Data Innovations,
Characteristics of Big Data, Challenges and Limitations of Big
UNIT – I Data, Benefits of adopting Big Data, Common Adoption Issues,
(5 Sessions)
Basic Big Data Analytics, Big Data Visualization
Big Data” in the Enterprise, Big Data and Traditional Business

Intelligence and Data Warehouses, Planning for Big Data
UNIT –II Initiatives, New Roles Introduced by Big Data Projects, Emerging (4 Sessions)
Trends
Big Data in the Enterprise, The New Information Management
Paradigm, Big Data Implications for Industry, Emerging Database
Landscape, Application Architectures for Big Data and Analytics,
UNIT – III Enterprise Data warehouse (EDW), BDW, MDM, Overview of (6 Sessions)
Parallel and Distributed Data Processing and High Performance
Computing (HPC).
Overview of Hadoop 1.0 ecosystem, Overview of Hadoop

UNIT – IV 2.0/YARN, Data modeling Approaches. (6 Sessions)
noSQL concepts and MongoDB database Lab, Introduction to

noSQL, Types of NoSQL databases, Overview of CAP and
UNIT – V BASE, RDBMS vs. noSQL concepts, Overview of Sharding, (5 Sessions)
Replication concepts
Overview of Cluster Analysis, Dimension Reduction: Factor

UNIT – VI Analysis and Correspondence Analysis.
(4 Sessions)

Text Books:
 Zikopoulos, Paul, and Chris Eaton. Understanding big data: Analytics for enterprise
class hadoop and streaming data. McGraw-Hill Osborne Media, 2011.
 Ohlhorst, Frank J. Big data analytics: turning big data into big money. John Wiley &
Sons, 2012.
 Minelli, Michael, Michele Chambers, and Ambiga Dhiraj. Big data, big analytics:
emerging business intelligence and analytic trends for today's businesses. John Wiley
& Sons, 2012.
 Marr, Bernard. Big Data: Using SMART big data, analytics and metrics to make
better decisions and improve performance. John Wiley & Sons, 2015.
Learning outcomes
 Analyze the requirements for a Big Data Analytics System for a departmental/
organisational requirements,
 Formulate an effective strategy to implement a successful Data analytics project
Course Outline
Predictive Modeling
Preamble:Predictive modeling is a process that uses data mining and probability to forecast outcomes.
Each model is made up of a number of predictors, which are variables that are likely to influence future
results. Once data have been collected for relevant predictors, a statistical model is formulated.
 To enable students to identify appropriate database technologies to meet a set of

requirements and to recommend possible solutions.
To evaluate appropriate data analytics techniques to be used depending on the specific
information needs of the project.
To clearly communicate and present complex analytics results to business clients, using
practical and simple business terms that can be understood by a general non-technical audience.
To Create predictive models using statistical, data mining and machine learning techniques,
and evaluate and interpret such models to support fact-based decision making. Work both
independently and in a team to solve large data analysis projects.
Basics of Predictive Modeling, Learning from data, Types of

UNIT – I models, Process of predictive modeling, Performance metrics.
(5 Sessions)
Linear & Logistic Regression, Simple & multiple linear
UNIT –II regression, Assessing linear regression models. (6 Sessions)
Introduction to logistic regression, Assessing logistic regression
UNIT – III models. (4 Sessions)
Introduction to Neural Networks and machine
UNIT – IV learning,Clustering-Hierarchical and K- means clustering. (5 Sessions)
Tree-based Methods, Algorithms for training decision trees,
UNIT – V Predicting class membership, Predicting complex skill learning, (5 Sessions)
Segmentation modeling
Time Series Analysis, Fundamental concepts of time series,
UNIT – VI Stationary time series models, Non-stationary time series models (5 Sessions)
Text Books:
 Arose, Daniel T., and Chantal D. Larose. Data mining and predictive analytics. John Wiley &
Sons, 2015.
Reference Books:
 Bari, Anasse, Mohamed Chaouchi, and Tommy Jung. Predictive analytics for dummies. John
Wiley & Sons, 2016.
Learning Outcomes

Describe the business processes involved in marketing and customer relationship
management and explain the role of analytical and predictive tools in these processes.
 Implement data mining and machine learning techniques using a high-level programming.
Understand revenue management strategies and principles and develop analytics in different
area to support revenue optimization and decision making.
Marketing Analytics
Preamble:Marketing analytics is the practice of measuring, managing and analyzing marketing

performance to maximize its effectiveness and optimize return on investment (ROI). Understanding
marketing analytics allows marketers to be more efficient at their jobs and minimize wasted web
marketing money.
 To learn the power and methodology behind marketing analytics

 To Identify market trends and metrics to measure marketing success
Introduction to Marketing Analytics, Marketing analytics as an

UNIT – I enabler of marketing strategy, Slicing & dicing of marketing data, (5 Sessions)
RFM, LTVC.
Product-Market Fit: Gap Analysis, Comparing customer needs
UNIT –II and extent of need satisfaction, Carrying out/steps in gap analysis, (6 Sessions)
Importance Index, Performance Index, Competitor Analysis
Purchasing Behavior: Factor Analysis, Studying factors or
characteristics influencing purchasing decisions, Carrying out
UNIT – III Principal Component Analysis, Understanding Communalities (4 Sessions)
and Rotation of Factors, Checking appropriateness for factor
analysis-KMO Index &Barlett’s Test of sphericity
Market Segmentation: Cluster Analysis, Identification of

homogeneous groups for segmenting prospective customers,
UNIT – IV Carrying out Cluster analysis, Understanding similarity
(5 Sessions)
measures, Profiling the clusters
Customer Loyalty: Linear Discriminant Analysis, Understanding
key client characteristics, Developing a Linear Discriminant
UNIT – V Analysis Model, Checking for model fit - Wilk’s Lambda, group (4 Sessions)
centroids, eigenvalues and developing classification table and
hit-ratio, Developing structure matrix - canonical loadings
Conjoint Analysis: Concept, Process, Applications, Assumptions
and Limitations.
UNIT – VI Multidimensional Scaling: Concept, Process, Applications,
(6 Sessions)
Perceptual Map and Model Fit.

Text Books:
 Winston, Wayne L. Marketing analytics: Data-driven techniques with Microsoft
Excel. John Wiley & Sons, 2014.
 Sorger, Stephan. Marketing Analytics: Strategic Models and Metrics. Admiral Press,
2013.
 Grigsby, Mike. Marketing analytics: A practical guide to real marketing science.
Kogan Page Publishers, 2015.
Learning Outcomes
 To Understand price and promotion analytics to maximize their overall impact for
your business
 To Products, distribution and sales to identify channels to best engage with your
chosen markets
Financial Analytics
Preamble:Financial analytics is the creation of ad hoc analysis to answer specific business

questions and forecast possible future financial scenarios.
 Students will acquire knowledge of current theory and techniques of the major
business discipline using ARCH/GARCH
 Students will exhibit the leadership capacity and teamwork skills for finanacial
decision making.
 Students will understand the ethical implication of financial anlysis .
Introduction to Financial Analytics, Relevance and scope

financial Analytics, Recent trends in financial analytics, Financial
UNIT – I Time Series and Their Characteristics, Asset Returns, (6 Sessions)
Distributional Properties of Returns, Review of Statistical
Distributions and properties of financial time series
Capital Asset Pricing Model, Basics of portfolio construction,
UNIT –II Diversification and Portfolio Optimization (5 Sessions)
Modelling Volatility and Risk, Volatility the financial time series,
UNIT – III Modelling volatility using ARCH/GARCH models, Measuring (4 Sessions)
and modelling risk, Application of Value at Risk (VaR)
High-Frequency Data Analysis and Market Microstructure, Bid–

UNIT – IV Ask Spread, Empirical Characteristics of Transactions Data, (4 Sessions)
Models for Price Changes, Duration Models
Modelling Credit Risk, Corporate Liabilities as contingent
claims, Endogenous default boundaries and optional Capital
UNIT – V Structure, Intensity Modelling, Rating based term-structure
(6 Sessions)
models, Credit risk and interest-rate Swaps
Derivative Pricing, Issues regarding derivative markets,
UNIT – VI Brownian motion, Black -Sholes model, Modelling derivative (5 Sessions)
prices

Text Books:
 Baesens, Bart, Daniel Roesch, and Harald Scheule. Credit Risk Analytics:
Measurement Techniques, Applications, and Examples in SAS. John Wiley & Sons,
2016.
 Bennett, Mark J., and Dirk L. Hugen. Financial Analytics with R: Building a Laptop
Laboratory for Data Science. Cambridge University Press, 2016.
 Mitra, Gautam, and Leela Mitra, eds. The handbook of news analytics in finance. Vol.
596. John Wiley & Sons, 2011.
Learning Outcomes
 Students will demonstrate the ability to communicate effectively.

 Students will demonstrate critical thinking skills. Capital Asset Pricing Model
 Students will have an understanding of global perspectives.
Human Resource Analytics

Preamble:Human resource analytics is an area in the field of analytics that refers to applying
analytic processes to the human resource department of an organization in the hope of
improving employee performance and therefore getting a better return on investment.
 To analyze appropriate internal and external human resource metrics, benchmarks, and
indicators.
 To Operate relational databases and make recommendations regarding the appropriate HRIS
to meet organization’s human resource needs.
The Role of Analytics in HR, History of the Evolution of

UNIT – I Analytics, Importance of Analytics in HR, HR Analytics Value (5 Sessions)
Proposition
HR Metrics, Concepts, Objectives, Designing effective Metrics,
UNIT –II Choice of important metrics (6 Sessions)
HR Metrics Design, Design approaches to HR metrics, Inside-Out
UNIT – III Approach, Outside-In Approach (4 Sessions)
Metrics alignment with business strategy, goals and objectives,

UNIT – IV Creating levels of metrics measures, HR efficiency measures, (5 Sessions)
HR Effectiveness measures
HR Analytics Tools and Techniques, HR Data recording,
UNIT – V Software Tools, Quantitative Techniques, Visualization, (5 Sessions)
Analytic Techniques
Analytics Process Model, Analytics Process Model and Its
UNIT – VI Phases, Applying the Analytics Process Model, Effectively (5 Sessions)
Presenting HR Data

Text Books:
 Jac, FITZ-ENZ. The new HR analytics: predicting the economic value of your
company's human capital investments. AMACOM Div American Mgmt Assn, 2010.
 Soundararajan, Ramesh, and Kuldeep Singh. Winning on HR Analytics: Leveraging

Data for Competitive Advantage. SAGE Publications India, 2016.
 Edwards, Martin R., and Kirsten Edwards. Predictive HR Analytics: Mastering the
HR Metric. Kogan Page Publishers, 2016.
 Dipak Kumar Bhattacharyya (2017). HR Analytics: Understanding Theories and
Applications. Sage Publications
Learning Outcomes
 To Employ appropriate software to record, maintain, retrieve and analyse human

resources information (e.g., staffing, skills, performance ratings and compensation
information).
 To Apply quantitative and qualitative analysis to understand trends and indicators in
human resource data; understand and apply various statistical analysis methods.
Programming for Analytics

Preamble: R Programming for Analytics, is a tour through the most important parts of R, the
statistical programming language, from the very basics to complex modeling. It covers reading data,
programming basics, visualization, data munging, regression, classification, clustering, modern
machine learning, network analysis, web graphics, and techniques for dealing with large data, both in
memory and in databases.
 To introduce the participants to the field of data analytics, background and key concepts
 Introduce the participants to problem types in the area of data analytics – possible
problem formulation framework
 Introduce the participants to R – an easy to use tool for high level data analytics
 Introduce the part icipants to a comprehensive overview of linear algebra and statistics
concepts – critical concepts for the understanding of data analytic algorithms
Basics of Programming, Problem Solving: process, Problem

Analysis: Algorithm discovery, Algorithm design strategies,
UNIT – I Stepwise refinement, Control requirements, Implementing
(5 Sessions)
algorithm
R Programming, Overview and History of R, Getting Help, R
Packages: Loading, Installing and Managing
R data types and objects, Reading and writing data
Data Definition & Control Structures, Data definition types,

constants, variables, Expressions: Arithmetic, Logical,
Precedence rules Control Structures: Sequencing, Input and
UNIT – IV output statements, Assignment statement, Control Structures:
(6 Sessions)
Selection, Repetition, Combination, Functions, scoping rules and
loop functions, Flow Control
Exploring Data with R, Import, export and manipulate data and
UNIT – V data frames, Statistical summaries of continuous and categorical (4 Sessions)
data
Hypothesis tests, and simple regression models, Linear models
UNIT – VI like ANOVA, linear regression and mixed models, generalized (5 Sessions)
linear models, Basic graphics & reports of statistical analyses

Text Books:
 Gardener, Mark. Beginning R: the statistical programming language. John Wiley &
Sons, 2012.
 Zumel, Nina, John Mount, and Jim Porzak. Practical data science with R. Manning,
2014.
 Wickham, Hadley, and Garrett Grolemund. R for Data Science: Import, Tidy,
Transform, Visualize, and Model Data. " O'Reilly Media, Inc.", 2016.
 Matloff, Norman. The art of R programming: A tour of statistical software design. No
Starch Press, 2011.
Learning Outcomes
After completion of this course student will be to

 participate in logical explanation of the most used data analytic algorithms –
supported by hands - on work in R from an application viewpoint
 handle a real life application of data analytics – case study approach. The case study
can be chosen by the participants based on their field of interest
Logistics Management
Preamble:This course provides an overview of how firms use distribution intermediaries to

gain a competitive advantage in local and global markets through the integration of logistics
management. The management of the physical flow of products and information throughout the
entire supply chain is examined, including physical distribution, transportation, warehousing,
customer service, materials management, and third-party and global logistics, systems
planning, and operations and management of the supply chain.
 To develop an understanding of the role of logistics in a market-oriented society.

 To examine the major functions of logistics.
 To provide an opportunity for comprehensive analysis and discussion of key
contemporary issues and problems in logistics management.
 Examine the details of planning and control processes in logistics management.
The Logistics of Business – The Logistical Value Proposition –

UNIT – I The Work of Logistics – Logistical Operating Arrangements – (4 Sessions)
Flexible Structure – Supply Chain Synchronization.
Transport Functionality: Principles and Participants –
UNIT –II Transportation Service – Transportation Economics and Pricing – (5 Sessions)
Transport Administration – Documentation.
International Logistics and Supply Chain Management:
Meaning and objectives, importance in global economy,
Characteristics of global supply chains - Global Supply Chain
UNIT – III Integration – Supply Chain Security – International Sourcing – (6 Sessions)
Role of Government in controlling international trade and its
impact on Logistics and Supply Chain.
International Insurance: Cargo movements – water damage –

Theft – Privacy– pilferage – Other risk – perils with air
shipments – Risk Retention – Risk Transfer – Marine Cargo
UNIT – IV Insurance – Coverage A,B,C classes – Elements of air freight (6 Sessions)
Policy – Commercial Credit Insurance – Size of Vessels,
Tonnage, Types of vessels- Container, Combination ships – Non
vessel operating carriers.
UNIT – V Modelling logistics systems:Simulation of logistic systems - (4 Sessions)
Dimensions of Logistics & SCM – The Macro perspective and

the macro dimension – Logistic system analysis strategy,
Logistical Operations Integration, Customer service – Supply
Chain Relationships.
Framework and Role of Supply Chain in e-business and b2b
practices. Value of information in logistics & SCM - E-logistics,
UNIT – VI E-Supply Chains - International and global issues in logistics - (5 Sessions)
Role of government in international logistics and Principal
characteristics of logistics in various countries and regions.

Text Books:
 Handbook of Logistics and Distribution Management – John Gattorna
 Logistics Management – P. Fawcett, R. McLeish and I Ogden
Reference Books:
 Strategic Logistics Management – D.M. Lambert & J R Stock, Richard D Irwin Inc .
Learning Outcomes
 Understand the principles of logistics management.

 Understand the logistics role in the economy and the organization.
 Be aware of the distinction between the concepts of logistics.
 Combine their theoretical knowledge with practical knowledge.
 Understand the general concepts of customer service applications of logistics information
systems.
Enterprise Resource Planning
Preamble:This course is designed to provide the student with a thorough understanding of

both the role that Enterprise Resource Planning Systems (ERPs) play in an organization and
the challenging task of managing the Information Systems (IS) function. The hands-on
exercises, coupled with the in-class discussions of ERPs, will prepare the student with the
knowledge sought by businesses looking to use technology to maintain their competitive edge
in the market place.

By the end of this course, the student should be able to:
 Describe the role of an ERP in carrying out business processes in a company.
 Explain how ‘best business practices’ are incorporated in an ERP.
 Strategize pricing, production and sales in a competitive commodity market.
 Analyze sales data in an ERP to dynamically respond to changing market conditions to
maximize profits.
 Expedite production planning and control using tools provided in an ERP (e.g. MRP)
Report on the reasons for the success (or failure) of their production and sales strategy.
Enterprise: An Overview: Business Functions and Business

Processes, importance of Information: Characteristics of
information; Types of information.
UNIT – I Information System: Components of an information system; (4 Sessions)
Different types of information systems; Management information
system, Enterprise Resource Planning: Business modelling;
Integrated data model.
Introduction to ERP: Defining ERP, Origin and Need for an
ERP System, Benefits of an ERP System, Reasons for the Growth
UNIT –II of ERP Market, Reasons for the Failure of ERP Implementation: (5 Sessions)
Roadmap for successful ERP implementation.
ERP and Related Technologies: Business Process Re-
engineering, Management Information systems, Decision Support
Systems, Executive Information Systems- Advantages of EIS;
UNIT – III Disadvantages of EIS, Data Warehousing, Data Mining, On-Line (6 Sessions)
Analytical Processing, Product Life Cycle Management, Supply
Chain Management, ERP Security.
UNIT – IV ERP Implementation Life Cycle: ERP Tools and Software, (6 Sessions)
ERP Selection Methods and Criteria, ERP Selection

Process, ERP Vendor Selection, ERP Implementation Lifecycle,
Pros and cons of ERP implementation, Factors for the Success of
an ERP Implementation.
ERP Vendors, Consultants, and Employees: Vendors- Role of
the Vendor; Consultants: Types of consultants; Role of
UNIT – V a Consultant, Employees; Role of employees; Resistance by (4 Sessions)
employees; Dealing with employee resistance, Role of Top
Management, Role of Implementation Partner.
Future Directions in ERP: New Trends in ERP, ERP to ERP
II-Implementation of Organisation-Wide ERP, Development of
UNIT – VI New Markets and Channels, Latest ERP Implementation (5 Sessions)
Methodologies, ERP and E-business, Market Snapshot, The
SOA Factor.
Text Books:
 Essentials of Business Processes and Information Systems, by Simha R. Magal and
Jeffrey Word, ©2010, ISBN: 978-0-470-23059-6.
 Integrated Business Processes with ERP Systems, Preliminary Edition, by Simha R.
Magal and Jeffrey Word, ISBN: 978-0-470-88424-9.
Reference Books:
 Enterprise Resource Planning, 3rd Edition, by Bret Wagner and Ellen Monk, ISBN:
9781423901792, ©2009.
Learning outcomes
 To develop an understanding regarding role of an ERP in carrying out business processes
in a company.
 To analyze how ‘best business practices’ are incorporated in an ERP.
 To develop strategy for pricing, production and sales in a competitive commodity market.
 To analyze sales data in an ERP to dynamically respond to changing market conditions to
maximize profits.
 To assist in expediting production planning and control using tools provided in an ERP.
Performance Metrics and Modeling
Preamble:This course provides an overview of different perspective of supply chain and its
matrices. It provides a platform to deeply understand the functional domain of supply chain.
This subject will bring practical insight about different key drivers of supply chain and their
role in making supply chain more efficient and profitable.

 To Develop an understanding of the role of pricing, inventory and other factors in supply
chain.
 To develop a skill for effective decisions.
 To Provides a paradigm over which students can experience the integrated effect of
different metrics.
Drivers of supply chain: Facility, Components of facility,

Decisions; Facility-Related Metrics, Inventory:-Cycle Inventory,
Safety Inventory ,Seasonal Inventory ,Level of Product
Availability , Inventory-Related Metrics.ole of transportation in
UNIT – I SC,Design of Transportation Network ,Choice of Transportation (5 Sessions)
Mode ,Transportation-Related Metrics -Average inbound
transportation cost, Average incoming shipment size, Average
inbound transportation cost per shipment etc.
Drivers of supply chain: Role of information in supply chain,
Push Versus Pull view, Coordination and Information Sharing,
Forecasting and Aggregate Planning, Methods for Enabling
Technologies, Information related metrics: Forecast horizon,
UNIT –II Frequency of update, Forecast error etc. (5 Sessions)
Sourcing:-Components of sourcing decisions,In-House or
Outsource ,Supplier Selection, Procurement ,Sourcing-Related
Metrics :-Days payable outstanding, Average purchase price,
Range of purchase price etc.
Pricing: Components of pricing decisions, Pricing and
Economies of Scale,Everyday Low Pricing Versus High-Low
Pricing, Pricing Related Metrics:-Profit margin, Days sales
outstanding, Incremental fixed cost per order, Incremental
UNIT – III variable cost per unit, Average sale price etc. Inventory. (5 Sessions)
Components of Inventory Decisions:Cycle Inventory, Safety
inventory, Seasonal inventory, Level of product availability,
Inventory-Related Metrics:-Average inventory, Products with
more than a specified number of days of inventory, Average

replenishment batch size, etc.
Measuring Performance in Supply chain: Introduction to SCOR
model; Benchmarking supply chain performance using financial
data:-Total length of supply chain, Supply chain inefficiency
ratio, working capital productivity ratio. Enhancing Supply chain
UNIT – IV performance:-SC optimization, integration, and restructuring. (5 Sessions)
Forecasting: Charateristics of forecast, Qualitative forecasting
methods:-Delphi, Market research, Life cycle analogy, informed
judgement.Quantitative forecasting: Causal model, Time series
methods.
Inventory Management: Concept, classification, inventory
related costs, Managing seasonal, cyclic and safety stock; SC
UNIT – V designing and inventory decisions; Inventory management for (5 Sessions)
short life cycle products.
UNIT – VI Supply Chain Modelling and simulation (5 Sessions)
Text Books:
 Supply chain management by Sunil Chopra, and Peter Meindl, Pearson.

 Jeremy F. Shapiro. Modeling the Supply Chain. Duxbury Thomson Learning.
 Μartin Christofer. “Logistics & Supply Chain management”, Pearson Education Limited,
2005.
Learning Outcomes
 Understand the concept of pricing, sourcing, information, and other related issues within
the domain of logistics environment.
 Understanding specific attributes of forecasting activities.
 Understand the various measure of supply chain performance.
Purchasing and Inventory Management

Preamble:This subject describes the process of buying: identification of the need, selecting a
suitable vendor, price negotiation and other pertinent terms, and inventory control tools, to get
exposure of global sourcing techniques and the application of various management tools and
quality tools. The focus area of this course is on interactive study of purchasing and inventory
management functions of supply chain management.

 Understand the role and function of Purchasing and inventory management.
 Examine the practical role of purchasing and inventory management in modern day
business.
 Use basic Purchasing and inventory management decision making principles for problem
solving.
Purchase policy: Rate and Running Contract – Subcontracting-

Systems Contract – Stockless purchase –Buying seasonal items –
UNIT – I Forward Buying – Hedging – Purchasing Activities – Indent Status – A (5 Sessions)
to Z of Purchase Order –Transportation – Incoming Inspection – Bill
settlement –Documentation.
Right Price: Price Analysis – Determination of Right Price –
Influencing Factors on Pricing – Classification of Pricing – Price
UNIT –II Forecasting - Right Place – Purchase Budgets – Budgetary control – (5 Sessions)
Need Identification Problems – Definition of lead time Elements- Cost
Reduction and Lead time.
Relevance of Good Supplier: Advantages of Good Relations –
Prerequisites – Evaluation of Suppliers – The Buyers Role – Role of the
UNIT – III Vendor –Relevance of Good Suppliers – Need for vendor evaluation – (5 Sessions)
Goals of Vendor Rating – Advantages of Vendor Rating – Parameters
of Vendor Rating.
Material Management: Role,Classes of Material – Materials and
UNIT – IV Profitability – Profit Center Concept – Material Objective –Centralized (5 Sessions)
Purchasing-Decentralizing – Delegation of Powers.
Material Planning: Definition, Bill of Material – Material
UNIT – V Requirement Planning – Importance of Material Research- Definition– (5 Sessions)
Advantages of Materials Information System.
Codification: Classification – Methodology–Requirement of codes –
Coding Structure and Design –Advantages - International Codification
UNIT – VI – Cost and Consequences– Right Quantity – Economic Ordering (5 Sessions)
Quantity – Derivations of EOQ.
Controlling: Concept, Types of Control, and its process.

Text Books:
 Supply Chain Management: Strategy, Planning and Operation. By Sunil Chopra and
Peter Meindl. Prentice-Hall, Inc.
 Purchasing and supply chain management. By Robert Monczka, Robert Trent and Robert
Handfield.South-Western.
Reference Books:
 Production & Operations Management – S.N. Chary, TMH
Learning Outcomes
 Explain purchasing and inventory related terms.

 Combine their theoretical knowledge with practical knowledge
 Identify the basic concepts used in purchasing and inventory decisions including
 Identify inventory and material handling issues in an integrated logistics flow which
reflects sound business practices.
Recent Trends in E-Commerce
Preamble:This course provides an environment to the students to explore the realities and
implications of e-commerce from the perspective of the marketer. The basic orientation of the
subjects revolves around the Business-to-consumer (B2C) and business-to-business (B2B) e-
commerce domain. The course brings a wide range of e- commerce facets for marketers, as a
basic building block for learning in the highly volatile business environment.
 To gain an understanding of the theories and concepts underlying e-commerce.

 To apply e-commerce theories and principles into the real world.
 To gain familiarity with exiting challenges and issues in e-commerce.
3Pl & Cross Docking, Green Logistics, Lean Supply Chain, Agile
UNIT – I Supply Chain.
(5 Sessions)
Outsourcing and Postponement, Supply chain re-engineering,
UNIT –II Bull whip effect and VMI, E-Commerce and E-Procurement. (5 Sessions)
IT Enablement in SCM, E governance, Business ethics and
UNIT – III values, IT- Security: Hacking, Encryption and coding & Cyber (5 Sessions)
Laws.
International Insurance – Cargo movements – water damage –

UNIT – IV Theft – Privacy– pilferage – Other risk.
(5 Sessions)
Insurance Policy- perils with air shipments – Risk Retention –
UNIT – V Risk Transfer – Marine Cargo Insurance – Coverage A,B,C (5 Sessions)
classes – Elements of air freight Policy.
Introduction to E-Commerce, Trend shaping the Indian E-
commerce Industry, Role of Logistics in E-commerce, Supply
UNIT – VI Chain Management under E-Commerce, Risk and Challenges in (5 Sessions)
E-commerce.
Text Books:
 Kenneth C. Laudon, E-Commerce : Business, Technology, Society, 4th Edition, Pearson
Reference Books:
 S. J. Joseph, E-Commerce: an Indian perspective, PHI
Learning Outcome
 Explain the components and roles of the Electronic Commerce environment.
 Explain how businesses sell products and services on the Web.
 Explain basic electronic commerce functions.
 Describe the qualities of an effective Web business presence

Supply Chain Analytics
Course Code:MBAE0054 Year: II Trimester: VI Max. Hours:30
Preamble:The course addresses the tactical and strategic decisions in supply chains. It will
develop appropriate analytical skills, which provide students with the capability of addressing
real world problems. Students are exposed to quantitative and qualitative issues in specific
operating situations and learn where to make trade-offs among them.

 To identify corporate strategies.
 To identify problems to be solved.
 To apply critical thinking skills.
 To describe solution implications.
 To develop strategies for implementing solutions.
Understanding and defining the supply chain analytics (SCA).its

relationship with supply chain concepts. Importance of supply
UNIT – I chain analytics in the flows involving material, money, (4Sessions)
information and ownership.
Key issues in supply chain analytics, Concept of Descriptive
UNIT –II Analytics in a Supply Chain, Decision Domains in supply chain (4 Sessions)
analytics.
Introduction to Modeling, Approaches for Optimization and
UNIT – III Simulation, Modeling software, Supply Chain (SC) Decisions (7 Sessions)
using mathematical or interpretative modeling.
Analytics of a Transportation problem in a Supply Chain,
Prescriptive analytics in network planning: Network Planning in
UNIT – IV a Supply Chain, Design of Logistics Network using (5 Sessions)
Heuristics/optimization.
Modeling Coordination Decisions, performance management
UNIT – V using analytic techniques. (5 Sessions)
IT Enablement of supply chains
UNIT – VI Role of ICT in Supply chains. (5 Sessions)
Text Books:
 Supply chain management by Sunil Chopra, and Peter Meindl, Pearson.
 Jeremy F. Shapiro. Modeling the Supply Chain. Duxbury Thomson Learning.
Reference Books:
 D. Simchi-Levi, P. Kaminsky, E. Simchi-Levi, and Ravi Shankar, Designing and
Managing the Supply Chain concepts, Strategies and Case studies, Third Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2008.
Learning outcomes:
 Explain the role and applications of Descriptive Analytics in a Supply Chain.

 Explain the role and applications of Prescriptive Analytics in a Supply Chain.
 Understand the importance of the basics of Supply Chain Analytics and Optimization.
 Combine their theoretical knowledge with practical knowledge.
Storekeeping and Warehousing
Course Code: MBA4140 Year: II Trimester: IV Max. Hours: 30
Preamble:This course provides a detailed description of storekeeping & warehousing related

concept.This courseintroducesstudents to the basic principles of warehousing and stores
management. It provides valuable knowledge of the effect warehouse and stores management
has on the bottom line of a company; be exposed to the systems and tools necessary to
effectively manage your warehouse, as well as accurately measure your performance in this
area.

 To familiarize with the concept and importance of warehousing
 To develop the skills for valuation of inventory and stores management
 To provide adequate knowledge to minimize the cost and improve the overall efficiency of the
operation.
Warehousing Management - Objectives of Stores – Location

UNIT – I and Layout – Prevention – Management of Receipts – Issue (4 Sessions)
Control – Stores Documentation.
Stock Valuation And Verification - Need for Valuation –
Methods of Valuation– FIFO – LIFO – Average Price –
UNIT –II Weighted Average – Standard Cost – Replacement Price –
(6 Sessions)
Stock Verification – Process of Verification.
Spare Parts Management: Salient Features of Spares – Inventory

UNIT –III Control of Spares – Categorization of Spares – Provisioning of (5 Sessions)
Spares – Pricing of Spares – Relevance of Maintenance –
Maintenance Costs.
Insurance concepts: Risk Management - Buyer’s Interest –

UNIT – IV Marine Insurance – Inland Transit Insurance – Stores Insurance (5 Sessions)
– Contractors All Risk Insurance.
Miscellaneous Insurance – A to Z Claims Procedure – Loss
UNIT – V Minimization- Spare Parts Management.
(4 Sessions)
Ethics In Materials Management - Importance of Ethics –
UNIT – VI Business Ethics – Ethics in Buying – Code of Ethics – Problems
(6 Sessions)
in Ethics – Backdoor Selling – A to Z Tips for Ethical Buying –

Professionalization.
Text Books:
 Gopalakrishnan P.– Purchasing and Materials management – Tata McGraw Hill – 23rd
Edition – 2008.
 Purchasing and supply chain management. By Robert Monczka, Robert Trent and Robert
Handfield.South-Western.
 Production & Operations Management – S.N. Chary, TMH
Learning Outcome:
 Understand the concept and significance of storekeeping and warehousing in the present
scenario.
 Execute valuation of inventory and stores management.
 Minimize the cost of storekeeping and warehousing to improve the overall efficiency of
the operation.
Green Supply Chain Management

Course Code: MBA5138 Year: II Trimester: V Max. Hour 30
Preamble:The subject relates green practices to supply chain management. The course introduces
related methodologies and tools for analyzing, designing, and improving supply chains in a green
context.
 Develop an understanding of the role of green logistics in real life situations.
 Examine the major functions of green logistics with their practical relevance.
 Understand the significance of green supply chain in favor of society and business as
well.
Recent trends in green supply chain management; environmental

UNIT – I impacts of supply chains, the green supply chain as a competitive (5 Sessions)
advantage in today’s business environment.
Life-cycle assessment as a tool; greening of supply chains; green
UNIT – II (5 Sessions)
supply chain design.
Supply chain operations reference (SCOR) model; Supply Chain
Council; cross-industry standard and diagnostic tool for supply-chain
management; GreenSCOR as a focused model; applications of the
GreenSCOR model to a green supply chain.
Green procurement: vendor evaluation and sensitivity analysis. Green

UNIT – IV customers: Features of green customers, Target customer (5 Sessions)
identification.
UNIT – V
Continuous improvement in green supply chain: Prerequisite, (5 Sessions)
Methodology.Green supply chain benchmarking, Pareto analysis.
UNIT –V I
Green supply chain performance evaluation; Benefits, methodology, (5 Sessions)
Measurement toolkit.
Text Books:
 Green supply supply chain: An action manifesto by Stuart Emmett, & Vivek Sood.
 Supply chain management by Sunil Chopra, and Peter Meindl, Pearson.
 Jeremy F. Shapiro. Modeling the Supply Chain. Duxbury Thomson Learning.
Reference Books:
 D. Simchi-Levi, P. Kaminsky, E. Simchi-Levi, and Ravi Shankar, Designing and
 Μartin Christofer. “Logistics & Supply Chain management”, Pearson Education Limited,
2005.
Learning Outcomes
 Understand the environmental impacts of supply chains and hence the need for green
supply chains.
 Apply related methodologies and tools to the design of green supply chains and the
improvement of existing supply chains.
 Have a critical and analytical perspective that enhances their appreciation and
independent judgment of green supply chain design.
Strategic and Implementation Issues in SCM

Course Code: MBA5139 Year: II Trimester: V Max. Hour: 30
Preamble: This course provides an overview of how firms implement chain strategies to gain a
competitive advantage in local and global markets through the integration diverse activities. It clubs
practical insight through developing a relevant understanding about execution of supply chain in practical
scenario. To better grasp the contents of the course students are required to have basic understanding of
inventory policies, and principles of operations management.
Course Objectives:
 Develop an understanding of the role of logistics in real life situations.

 Examine the major functions of logistics with their relevance.
 Provides an opportunity for comprehend the skills and ability of the students while addressing
contemporary issues and problems of logistics management.
Quality control-Quality; Statistical process control; Process capability;

Acceptance Sampling; Average outgoing quality limit (AOQL)
concept; Cost of quality; Six Sigma and TQM. Inspection: Types and
step involved.
Constraint management-Introduction to constraints management and
POOGI concept; Types of constraint ;Assumptions; Theory of
UNIT – II (5 Sessions)
constraints; Logical thinking process; Drum Buffer Rope scheduling;
Critical chain. Issues involved in implementation of T,I and OE.
Distribution Strategy: direct shipment strategy; Intermediate shipment
UNIT – III strategy-warehousing, cross docking, inventory pooling. (5 Sessions)
Transshipment.
Supply chain strategy- Economic packaging and transportation;

UNIT – IV concurrent and parallel processing; standardization; Push and Pull (5 Sessions)
strategy; Mass customization.
UNIT – V Purchasing:-Types; approches; policies and principals. Master (5 Sessions)
scheduling, Aggregate planning-Material requirement planning.
Data base management system, Data Warehousing and Data Mining,
UNIT –V I Decision Support System and its implementation; Best of breed and (5 Sessions)
single vendor ERP solution.
Suggested Readings
 Supply chain management by Sunil Chopra, and Peter Meindl, Pearson.

 Jeremy F. Shapiro. Modeling the Supply Chain. Duxbury Thomson Learning.
 D. Simchi-Levi, P. Kaminsky, E. Simchi-Levi, and Ravi Shankar, Designing and
 Alan Harisson & Remko van Hoek, “Logistics Management and Strategy: Competing
through the Supply Chain”, FT Press, 2011.
 Μartin Christofer. “Logistics & Supply Chain management”, Pearson Education Limited,
2005.
Learning Outcomes
 Understand the concept of the logistics within the constraints of the internal and external
environment.
 Understanding specific attributes of logistics activities.
 Understand the logistics role in the economy and the organization.
 Combine their theoretical knowledge with practical knowledge
17-08-2017

1crsfile 1.MBADualSpecialisation2019-20

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

1crsfile 1.MBADualSpecialisation2019-20

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Master of Business Administration 1

Course Curriculum (Session 2019-20)

Master of Business Administration

Institute of Business Management

ABOUT THE PROGRAM

S. Trimester Code Subject Credits

1 MBAC0006 Business Environment 3

2 MBAC0007 Financial Accounting 3

3 MBAC0008 Micro Economics 3

4 MBAC0009 Principles and Practices of Management 3

6 MBAC0011 Computer Applications in Management 3

7 MBAC0038 Managerial Communication 3

8 MBAC0012 Managerial Aptitude – I 1

5 MBAC0024 Marketing Management 3

6 MBAE0025 Operations Management 3

7 MBAE0026 Business Analytics 3

8 MBAE0027 Fundamentals of Banking and Insurance 3

Corporate Governance and Business Ethics

1 MBAE0001 Business to Business and E- Marketing 3

2 MBAE0002 Consumer Behavior 3

3 MBAE0055 Product and Brand Management * 3

4 MBAE0056 Marketing Research* 3

5 MBAO0001 Rural Marketing Management 3

6 MBAE0003 Sales and Distribution Management 3

7 MBAE0057 Advertising Management* 3

1 MBAE0058 Training and Development* 3

2 MBAO0002 Leadership and Team Building 3

Business Analysis and Valuation

6 MBAO0005 Micro Finance 3

Global Business Environment

4 MBAE0017 Global Strategic Management 3

1 MBAE0067 Business Intelligence and Data Mining* 3

Database Management System

1 MBAE0023 Finance in Retail Operations 3

1 MBAE0027 Environmental Management for Rural Development 3

Inclusive Growth for Sustainable Development*

6 MBAO0001 Rural Marketing Management 3

1 MBAO0012 Management of Innovation and Research and Development. 3

2 MBAO0004 Mergers, Acquisition and Corporate Restructuring 3

Knowledge management Techniques for Technology

Advance Project Management

7 MBAE0039 Service Operations Management 3

1 MBAE0080 Management of Commercial Banks and Retail Banking* 3

3 MBAO0016 Investment Banking 3

Data Environment and Management

4 MBAO0018 Data Mining 3

4 MBAe0088 Purchasing and Inventory Management* 3

Preamble:To provide an introduction to business and the economic environment within

Objectives of the Course:

Economic & Political Environment: Economic Systems,NITI

* Provision for presentations / assignments / case analysis in additional sessions

Objectives of the Course:

By the end of this course, the student should be able to:

Overview of Financial Accounting: Role, Functions, Users,

Financial Statements Analysis-Common Size Statements,

Objectives of the Course:

Consumer’s Behaviour : Utility Analysis,law of diminishing

Production: Production Concepts and Analysis, Production

Principles and Practices of Management

Objectives of the Course:

Management: Concept, Nature, Importance; Management: Art

Leadership: Concept and Functions, Leadership style,

 Develop the understanding about basic management principles and concepts.